32.teach Yourself Panjabi

panjabi
Surjit Singh Kalra

Navtej Kaur Purewal
with
Sue Tyson-Ward
TEACH YOURSELF BOOKS
CONTENTS
For UK orders: please contact Bookpoint Ltd, 39 Milton Park. Abingdon, Oxon OXI4
4TD. Telephone: (44) 01235 400414. Fax: (44) 01235 400454. Lines are open from
9.00--6.00, Monday to Saturday, with a 24 hour message answering service. Email
address: orders@bookpoi nt.co.uk
For U.S.A. & Canada orders: please contact NTClContemporary Publishing, 4255 West
Touhy Avenue, Lincolnwood, Illinois 60646-1975, U.S.A. Telephone: (847) 679 5500.
Fax : (847) 679 2494.
Long renowned as the authoritative source for self-guided learning - with more than 30
million copies sold worldwide - the Teach Yourself series includes over 200 titles in the
fields of languages, craft, hobbies. sports, and other leisure activities.
A catalogue record for this title is available from The British Library
Library of Congress Catalog Card Number. On File

First published in UK 1999 by Hodder Headline Pic, 338 Euston Road.
London NW I 3BH.
First published in US 1999 by NTC/Contemporary Publishing, 4255 West Touhy Avenue.
Lincolnwood (Chicago), Ulinois 60646-1975 U.S.A.
The 'Teach Yourself' name and logo are registered trade marks of
Hodder & Stoughton Ltd.
Copyright 1999 SUrjit Singh KaJra and Navtej Kaur Purewal
In UK: All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted
in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopy, recording,
or any information storage and retrieval system. without permission in writing from the
publisher or under licence from the Copyright Licensing Agency Limited. Further details
of such licences (for reprographic reproduction) may be obtained from the Copyright
Licensing Agency Limited, of 90 Tottenham Court Road, London WI P 9HE.
In US: All rights reserved. No part o f this book may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical.
photocopying, or otherwise, without prior permission of NTClContemporary
Publishing Company.
Typeset by Pure Text India Ltd, Pondicherry
http://www.puretech .com
Printed in Great Britain for Hodder & Stoughton Educational, a division of Hodder
Headline Pic, 338 Euston Road, London NWI 3BH by Cox & Wyman Ltd, Reading,
Berkshire.
10
Year
2004
2003
2002 2001
How to use this course
The Panjabi script and sound system
oiI1J'l'!
2000
1999
? How are you?

lAnguage points: Possessive adjectives; Formal and informal
speech; Asking questions in Panjabi; Word order
2 H' fore?;
British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data
lmpression number
Introduction
<:r I'm Kiran
37
50
lAnguage points: Subject pronouns; Use of subject pronouns;

The present tense of ~ is, am and are; Fonnal uses of
possessive adjectives; Word order
What does it taste like?

Language points: Interrogative words; Nouns; Adjectives;
The simple verb; The possessive particle '",'; of
62
4 >r.iI1't .tt 1Ii'H ~I That's very good news!

lAnguage points: The present tense; Subject-verb agreement;
Simple postpositions; Nouns in the oblique; Adjectives in
Ihe oblique:
81
5 oiI1Ii'H HI?
95
3 feR C'
oil
~?
What was the matter?

lAnguage points: The present continuous tense (-ing); Uses of
present continuous; The imperative; Was and were;
The past continuous tense; Negative sentences;
Making interrogative sentences
6 oil ~ mIi::R!
tf.! HI ?
Did you study in Jalandhar?

lAnguage points: The past tense; Negative sentences;
Interrogative sentences
7
oil tiKi
~?
What will you (have to) drink?

lAnguage points: The future tense; More forms of the
Imperative; Ordinal numbers; What time is it?
108
124
CONTENTS
vi
8 ~ fJ:Ja"C! ~ ? i:ic! ~ I enjoy playing the sitar

Language points: Pronouns in the oblique; Must , have to;
Infinitives in the oblique; Vocative case; The ending>:'!'!' vaalaa
138
9 "AT O!\r:!' "" i' ~ ~ lOur cloth is tbe best!

Language points: Comparison of adjectives; ~ can and
can't; ~ already completed; The relative pronouns /';:roll'
and iI; More uses of ~
156
10 ft!'c! fu;o; M f>:;j A day in the village

Language points: The past tense; The 'agentive' poslposition
?! ne; Compound verbs; The particle iil ke
170
11 ~ 'R'fu>I The Golden Temple

Language points: Conjunct verbs; Causative verbs; The infmitive
as a verbaJ noun; The passive voice; ~ like
186
12 111<1 ~ f;i'l5'I A letter home

Language points: The perfect tenses; How did it go?;
197
ACKNOQnEDGEMENTS
The authors would like to thank a number of people who were involved in
different capacities throughout the inception and production of this book.
Thanks ftrst go to Dr Virinder S. Kalra, Lecturer in the department of
Sociology, Leicester University, England who gave invaluable guidance,
moral and technical support and advice each step of the way. To Balbir K.
Kalra and Amarjit K. Purewal for their patience and understanding during
the entire process. Also, to J. S. Bhogal, Neelu Kalsi, G. S. Bhogal,
Jaswinder Kaur and T. S. Nahal from CaJifornia for their help and encouragement.
The subjunctive; Conditional sentences
ABOUT THE AUTHORS

Surjit Singh Kalra is founder and director of the Panjabi Language
Development Board in Birmingham U.K., a voluntary organisation dedicated to the promotion and development of the Panjabi language. He is the
author of over twenty Panjabi teaching aids. He is a proliftc writer and is
widely published in the Panjabi press as well as having two books of short
stories published. He retired in 1992 as head of the Community Language
Service for Birmingham Education authority. He is presently the Sikh representative on the Inner Cities Religious Council.
13 f>:"I'<J e't>lr ~
Marriage customs
Language points: ParticipiaJ uses; The particle jihaa;
Reflexive adjectives and pronouns
210
14 ~ ?! Ha ..re ci\ for<r JiI? What did they say about me?
Language points: Purpose clauses; Compound poslpositions;
Indirect speech
223
Navtej Kaur PurewaJ is a lecturer at the University of Manchester in the

Department of Sociology. She teaches Development and South Asian
Studies. Her doctoral thesis was on Panjab.
15 ~ Vaisakhi
Language points: Relative-correlatives; The subjunctive
particle ~; The verb ~; Oblique infmitives with ~
232
Sue 1)!son-Ward was formerly Subject Officer for Community Language

examinations at a National Exam Board.
16
~ ~
He! m! Folk dances of Panjab
SYMBOLS AND
ABBREVIATIONS
243
Language points: Future continuous; Phrases of choice;

~ ... and
JiI ...
Appendices
Key to exercises
Topic vocabulary
Panjabi- English glossary
Grammar and verb index
254
255
265
276
295
I!I
tzl
l!J
exercises
language points
key words
recorded cassette
dialogue
m.
f.
v.
sing.
plu.
lit.
masculine
feminine
variable adjective
singular
pluraJ
literally
INTRODUCTION
Geographically, the present day area of Panjab is divided between the

nation states of India and Pakistan (see Map I). This division took
place in 1947 upon the departure of the British from colonial rule of the
sub-continent. While the language and culture of East and West Panjab
are similar, there are religious differences, with Muslims being the
predominant group in Pakistan Panjab, Hindus and Sikhs in Indian
Panjab, and a substantial Christian minority in both parts. Panjab has
come to some prominence in the West because of the long history of
migration from the region to the four comers of the world.
1. Map 2
2. Pakistan
3. India
4. Nepal
5. Bhutan'
6. Sri lanka
7. Bangladesh
Map 1 Indian sub-continent
INTRODUCTION
There are. therefore, mainly three areas of the world where Panjabi is
spoken; in East Panjab (India) where it is a state language, in West Panjab
(Pakistan) where it is most widely spoken and in the diaspora,
particularly Britain, North America, East Africa and Australasia. This
wide geographic spread of the language is ironic given the fact that
the word Panjabi - also spelt Punjabi - designates the language of the
' Panj - ab', the ' Five Rivers'. These are the Jhelum, Chenab, Ravi, Beas
and the Satluj (see Map 2).
z-@-'"
I
;:
No accurate figures are available on the number of Panjabi speakers,

either as a first or second language, but if the three Panjabs and various
dialects are taken into account an approximation of 100 million would
not be too far from the truth. One of the main problems with designating
the exact number of Panjabi speakers is the presence of a large number
of distinct dialects that are spoken across the large geographical area of
East and West Panjab. There are some eleven recognised dialects of
Panjabi: Majhi, Bhattiani, Rathni, Ludhianwi, Doabi, Patialwi, Powadhi,
Malwi, Multani (Siraiki), Putohari and Hindko. The last three can
arguably call Panjabi a dialect of themselves and are all spoken in the
Pakistan part of Panjab. In the diaspora the most spoken form of Panjabi
is the Doabi, and encompasses those speakers from the Jalandhar area of
East Panjab.
8
z
:J
iO
'"
\ ......... ,
.....
:tS'/t\r
~"0,,~
."
."
~
'",
'\
I
"'"
.~
I":
'"
2:
<i
.,.::" f:::"":<
=
..
""
.." ""
c. ~
~
..
...
..""
.~
;,;
~
t5l"
Given the great variety of Panjabi there is some debate as to what is

standard. This book is based upon the Majhi dialect which is the everyday
form used in Lahore and Arnritsar. The most important point is that once
you have mastered the language using this book you will be understood
across the Panjab. The language used here is neither the colloquial rural
nor the urban literary, as the focus of this course has been on developing
an ability to communicate in as many different situations as possible .
One of the more interesting facts about the Panjabi language is that where
it is numerically the most widely spoken, in Pakistani Panjab, it is hardly
written at alL Panjabi is most often written in East Panjab in the Gurmukhi
script. It is also possible to write the language in the Persian script
often referred to as Shahmukhi in this context. However, in the last one
hundred years or so, Panjabi has become closely associated with Sikhs
and Sikhism, thus Gurmukhi has also become associated with Panjabi.
Gurmukhi literally means 'proceeding from the mouth of the Guru', and
it is widely acknowledged that Guru Angad, the second Sikh Guru
PANJABI
(1504--1552 AD), began the process of modifying existing scripts of the

time laying the basis for the modem Panjabi alphabet that is used in this
book.
Despite the modem day usage of Gurmukhi, the fIrst Panjabi literature
was written in Shahmukhi, and popular history associates this writing with
Shaikh Farid and Goraknath. However, the literary period of the language
begins with the sacred scriptures of the Sikhs, the Guru Granth Sahib.
This collection of writings by the Sikh Gurus is probably the fIrst manuscript of the Panjabi language. After the period of the Gurus, it was the
Sufi poets who developed the Panjabi language. In fact it is the folk literature developed by the Sufis, and particularly the Quissa - love ballad
form - which has had a long and lasting impact on the development of
Panjabi literature. The stories of Heer-Ranjha and Mirza Sahiba are
deeply embedded in the everyday life and culture of Panjab.
During the period of British colonial rule, the advent of the printing press
saw the proliferation of the Panjabi language in the Gurmukhi script.
Pamphlets, journals, novels and short stories all began to appear at the
beginning of the twentieth century using the Panjabi typewriter. However,
the official language of the time was either English or Urdu. The division
of Panjab in 1947 between East (India) and West (Pakistan) and subsequently of East Panjab in 1966 led to the formation of the State of Panjab
in the Indian Union. Panjabi is the official language of communication in
East Panjab and the modem development of the language has been greatly
accelerated by state patronage. Indeed, the development of Panjabi
University in Patiala is one such example of state sponsorship.
Language may be the basis of culture, but there are many other aspects of
Panjabi society and everyday life that impinge on the use of language. We
have included a Commentary section in each unit which will introduce
various aspects of the social and cultural life of the three Panjabs,
although these are by no means exhaustive discussions of the rich culture
of Panjab and the Panjabi diaspora.
HOW TO USE THIS

COURSE
Who is this course for?

This course in Panjabi has been designed for the absolute beginner
who mayor may not have studied a language before. The course will be
useful for people who want to learn Panjabi in order to speak with their
Panjabi friends and relatives, to communicate with Panjabi communities
in relation to their work, to learn about aspects of Panjabi culture and
society or to travel to Panjab itself. The course will also be useful for
those who already kuow a little Panjabi but who may not have the
confIdence to speak and even for those fluent in spoken Panjabi but who
wish to learn to read and write the Gurmukhi script. Throughout the
course you will come across a number of different situations in which you
will learn how to make requests, ask and give information and to express
your feelings. The units include dialogues, language points and
background information about Panjab and Panjabi people both in the
region of Panjab as well as in other parts of the world where Panjabi
communities have settled.
The course is divided into two parts. The fIrst part (Units 1-10) is
specifically designed for those who want to learn the basics of grammar
and vocabulary in order to communicate in a simple manner and also
enable you to read and write simple sentences. The second part (Units
11-16) will help you to expand your kuowledge of spoken Panjabi further
and is designed for those who are committed to becoming profIcient in the
Gurmukhi script.
Overall, the course introduces you to a wide range of vocabulary and
covers the basic grammar of Panjabi. By the end of the course, you will
be able to understand the spoken language, communicate in Panjabi in a
number of everyday situations while also having a sufficient level of
understanding of the written language to begin to read newspapers and
PANJABI
to write letters. We hope that this course will be the beginning of your
journey into the world of the Panjabi language.
How to use this course

The structure of the book is outlined In the contents pages. It is
recommended that you read the introductory chapters before proceeding
with the course. The Panjabi script and sound system follows this section
and it is advisable to work through this section regardless of whether you
intend to learn the script or not. Through this section you will gain
practice of listening, speaking and reading which will help you for the rest
of the course. After the script chapter, the book is divided into sixteen
units. The pattern of each unit is as follows:
First there is an outline in English of what you will learn in
the unit.
~ lI'a' gall baa! (Dialogue): Each unit has two or three

dialogue passages containing situations and commonly used
speech which include the vocabulary and grammar to be
covered in that unit. In the rust part (Units 1- 10) the
dialogues use Gurmukhi, Roman script and English
translations. In the remainder of the book (Units 11- 16) the
dialogues are only in Gurmukhi and English. However,
Roman is maintained in the vocabulary sections tIuoughout
the book.
.. ae'0;61 shabs;!aavalee (Vocabulary): The vocabulary
sections follow each Dialogue and include all new words,
and sometimes key expressions, which appear in the
dialogue text. All nouns are denoted according to their
masculine or feminine (mlf) gender in parentheses and all
adjectives which vary according to gender and number are
identified with a (v).
rfw>II'J! abhiaas (Exercises): These follow the vocabulary

and often make reference to the dialogues that they follow.
There is a range of different exercises including true/false,
matching, comprehension. 'fill in the blanks' and crosswords.
ijhl >I'ii bolee baare (Language points). These sections cover
the main grammar points which appear in the dialogues.
HOW TO USE THIS COURSE
Each new grammar point is explained clearly using examples to illustrate. Often, English equivalents to the
Panjabi are given alongside the explanations.
~ viaakhiaa (Commentary): These sections intrnduce
you to various aspects of Panjabi culture which have been
touched upon in the content of the dialogues. These will
help you to become acquainted with colloquial speech,
social etiquette and Panjabi history, traditions and customs.
rfw>II'J! abhiaas (Exercises): Further exercises come at the
end of each unit and review some of the main vocabulary,
content and grammatical elements that were introduced in
that unit. While the exercises that come after the dialogues
in the units do not contain references to grammar, the exercises at the end of the units may test you on your ability to
use the grammar you have learned.
At the end of the book there is a key to the exercises so that you can check
your answers. The course concludes with a Panjabi-English glossary
which will be of use to you throughout the course in referring to the
English defmitions of Panjabi words which appear in the units.
How to study each unit

Read the summary at the beginning of each unit to learn
about what will be covered.
Study the dialogues using the vocabulary lists for words that
you do not understand and then read the dialogues aloud.
Read the commentary section which will give you the
relevant background to the dialogues.
Complete the exercises which follow the dialogues and
vocabulary. Check your answers with the key to the exercises at the end of the book.
Go tIuough the grammar sections to understand the new
grammar points introduced.
After learning the grammar, read the dialogue again to make
sure that you fuUy understood the content.
Go back to the dialogue and repeat it as often as you can,
acting out the roles of the different characters.
PANJABI
Complete the exercises at the end of the unit, checking your

answers with the key to the exercises at the end of the book.
How to use the course with the cassette
THE PANJABI SCRIPT

AND SOUND SYSTEM
The book is accompanied by an audio tape which will help you to

recognise and distinguish the Panjabi sound system and also to improve
your hstening and speaking abilities. While the book is in itself a complete
course, the audio tape will be an added advantage for all Panjabi leamers
as it contains pronunciation exercises, dialogues from the units and oral
comprehension activities based on the rI'3rn abhiaas (Exercises).
Introduction
As you begin to go through the first part of the book (Units 1- 10), you
should listen to the recording of each
S'3" gall baa! (Dialogue) as you
read It. Listen to it again without looking at the book once you have
understood the general meaning. This will allow you to pay attention to
the pronunciation and intonation of the speakers. Imitating the speakers in
the dialogues is a useful way of picking up the language quickly. As you
progress through the course to the second part (Units 11 - 16), you should
try to listen to the dialogue on the tape without reading it in the book.
Panjabi is most commonly written in the Gurmukhi script which is the

most complete and accurate way to represent Panjabi sounds. Unlike
English, the Gurmuklti script follows a 'one sound-{)ne symbol' principle.
There are a few exceptions to this rule and these will become apparent
throughout the book. However, with some practice you will be able to
recognise the characters and know their names and sounds. Ultimately,
with even a basic knowledge of the sound system, you will be able to read
and write Panjabi in the Gurmuklti script.
om
The Gurmukhi alphabet has forty letters including thirty-seven consonants

and three basic vowel sign bearers. There are ten clear pure vowels and
three auxiliary signs. The most striking characteristic of the Gurmuklti
script, in comparison with English, is that, with the exception of five, all
letters are joined by a line across the top. Like English and other
European, Latin-based languages, it is written and read from left to right.
However, there are neither capital letters in Panjabi nor articles such as
'a' and 'the'. Panjabi spellings are, for the most part, regular and relatively
siruple to learn, though you may come across variations in spellings of
some words. However. as is the case in English, Panjabi spellings are not
fully standardised.
Handwritten Panjabi, as with any script, differs from person to person in
style. Some people prefer to write Panjabi without lifting a pen, making
curves and having an irregular top line. It is up to the individual as to what
sort of style he or she wants to adopt. Our advice to new learners is to follow the sirup Ie, clear style of lettering. There are a number of Panjabi
fonts available on computer disk which have differing typefaces, some of
which are very clear, attractive and decorative.
10
PANJABI
Equivalent sounds which have been given in romanised (English) script

are only approximate since the Gunnukhi alphabet has many unfamiliar sounds to the English speaker which often may not be exactly represented by the English alphabet. It is hoped that you will use the cassetfe,
attend classes, or seek help from a native speaker so as to perfect your pronunciation and to familiarise yourself with the sounds. In order to learn
any language it is important to follow these basic rules: listen carefully,
repeat aloud and distinctly, and do not worry about making mistakes.
Apart from unfarniliar sounds, there are nasal and double sounds, intonation, stress and different dialects which might initially dishearten the
student. However, with a little practice, you will begin to enjoy learning
Panjabi.
Transliteration
The standard modem system of transliteration (the writing of Panjabi in
the Roman alphabet) is used in this book with some modifications. As
there are forty letters, ten vowel sounds and three auxiliary signs in
Panjabi, it is necessary to adapt the standard English alphabet. You will
note two ways of distinguishing letters:
1 by a combination of two English letters such as rh, kh, bh,
nh, etc. In those few cases where these letters appear
together but not in combination, for instance, a 'r' and 'h'
appear together, a '-' is shown between those letters.
2 by underlining, for example, the letter n (ill indicates nasalisation or underlining ch <!!) indicates an aspirated sound.
Consonants
The Panjabi alphabet
South Asian languages are richly endowed with sounds and consonants.
Sanskrit may have been one of the fIrst languages to group the letters
according to their sounds. At one time there were only thirty-fIve letters
in the Panjabi script, but later fIve more letters were added in order to
accommodate Urdu sounds correctly. This need arose because of the many
loan words from Urdu used in Panjabi. More recently, an extra character
(.8 I) was introduced, though it has not become popular and hence will
not be included in this book. The complete Panjabi alphabet is given in
TableA.
11
PANJABI SCRIPT AND SOUND SYSTEM
Table A
Panjabi alphabet
l)f
-e
or
l::f
01
l.Il
kh
gh
ng
jg
ch
ch
jh
nJ
(5
If
th
dh
nh
1:(
t!
tt
th
dh
l./
'a
ph
bh
liI
"8
c;:'
";i
w/v
rh
1;1
ill
i.I'
sh
kh
gh
It is quite possible to learn the characters of the Gurmukhi script (~
ffitit gurmukhee lipee) and sounds of the language at the same time as,
by and large, Panjabi is a phonetic language. It is more accurate to call the
Panjabi writing system a syllabary because each character represents a
syllable. It is important to note that two phonetic features of all North
Indian languages are the system of contrasts between aspirated and
unaspirated consonants and the contrast between retroflex and dental
PANJABI
12
consonants. These do not occur in English. Aspirated consonants are

accompanied by an audible expulsion of breath, whereas non-aspirated
consonants are those produced with minimal breath. The letter ' k' in the
word 'kil' and 'I' in the word 'top' come close to Panjabi aspirated
consonants. The problem for English speakers arises with non-aspirated
consonants. To get an idea of the difference between the two, try saying
the words ' kit' and 'top' while holding your breath. In dental consonants
the tongue touches the upper front teeth, whereas with the retroflex
, consonants the tip of the tongue curls upwards against the palate (see diagrams in Appendix) The nearest approximations to English are the 't'
sound in the word 'eighth' which is dental-like and the ' d ' in the word
'breadth' which is retroflex-like.
ng
as 'ng' in 'sing'. No English equivalent.
ch
as 'ch' as in 'cheese' but with less release

of breath.
13
strongly aspirated form of 'ch' . No English

equivalent.
as 'j ' in 'jeer' but with less release of breath

and with the tongue against the lower teeth.
jh
the stronger aspirated counterpart of the

above, somewhat like 'bridge'. No English
equivalent.
nj
representing the palatal nasal sound.

No English equivalent.
as 't' in 'train' but with the tongue further back

and with less release of breath.
Panjabi syllabary
th
The syllabary in Table B gives the Panjabi letters in groups, according to

pronunciation.
the strongly aspirated counterpart of the above.

as 'd' in 'drum' but with tongue further back

and with less release of breath.
dh
strongly aspirated form of the above.

nh
representing the retroflex nasal sound.

a'
unaspirated soft 'I'. No English equivalent.
"
th
as 'l!!' in 'thermos ', strongly aspirated form of

the above.
'i!
!!
as 'th' in 'then' with less release of breath.
'Q
dh
strongly aspirated form of the above.

as 'n' in 'nice' but with the tongue flatter

against the front teeth.
There is a range of techrtical terms used to describe the pronunciation of

Panjabi consonants. For those who are interested in technical" and
linguistic matters these can be found in the Appendix. The important thing
is to be able to distinguish between the different consonants. The audio
tape or the help of a native speaker are invaluable tools in this process.
Table B Panjabi Syllabary

Gurmukhi
Translit
-eration
Pronunciation
as's' in 'suo',
this ' h' sound as in ' ahead ' is the simplest form,
although there is considerable variety, which
will be discussed later.
as 'k' in 'sky', but with less release of breath.
kh
as 'k' in 'kit' but with stronger release of

breath. No English equivalent .
as 'g' in 'go' but with less release of breath.
gh
as 'gh' in 'ghost' said quickly. No English

equivalent.
PANJABI
14
l.(
as 'p' in 'spin' but with less release of breath.
ph
as 'f' in 'fund' , aspirated form of the above,

though many Panjabi speakers pronounce
'ph'as 'f' .
"F.I
sh
1
>f
lot
kh
kh
111
ill
gh
"
]
i.I
<:
:;:
ph
as 'I' in 'life'.
Subjoined consonants
Some Panjabi words require consonants to be written in a conjunct form,
which takes the shape of a subscript to the main letter. The second
consonant is written under the first as a subscript. The reason for this is
discussed after we have looked at Panjabi vowels. There are only three
commonly used subjoined letters (see Table D) and to distinguish them
from their normal forms the word ii<ff paireen, which means belonging
to the foot, is attached under the letter.
as 'b' in 'bin' but with less release ofbreath.
lI"
bh
as 'bh' in 'club-house' spoken quickly.

as 'm' in 'mother',
'"
as 'y ' in 'yet'.
t'!
I:
Consonants with dots
voiced and never lost like the English ' r'.
Table C
These letters are named by adding the words ii<ff f>t.il paireen bindee to
the name of the letter, SO "F.I is called m'I 001' f>t.il sasse paireen bindee,
which literally means sassa with a dot in its foot. Many Panjabi speakers
do not make a distinction between \;f ):::II -ar in, and G i:. There are two main
reasons for this, first, their pronunciation is quite similar and second, they
are used to differentiate borrowed words from Urdu, the knowledge of
which is decreasing in East Panjab. You may come across written texts
in which writers have not used the dot. In this book, however, we have
maintained its use.
II
"
15
PANJABI SC RIPT AND SOUND SYSTEM
as 'r' in 'motor.' This sound is always fully
>:
v/w
this sound lies between the English sounds ' v'

and ' w'. However, unlike the English 'v' the
lower lip hardly touches the upper teeth;
unlike the English ' w' there is no lip-rounding.
For transliteration purposes we only use 'v'.
"if
rh
no English equivalent.
"F.I
sh
as 'sh' in 'ship'.
lot
kh
similar to 'ch' in Scottish 'loch'.

ill
gh
no English equivalent.
i.I
as 'z' in zip'.
:;:
as 'f' in 'fmd'.
Consonants with a dot

It is also important to note the distinction between plain consonants and
those consonants which are marked by a dot, as shown in Table C.
Table D Subjoined consonants

Full Name of
Subjoined
letter full letter
letter
u
U'U' haahaa
...
raaraa
"
<!'a'
>:
>:7:- vavvaa
"'.
Name of
subjoined letter
ii<ff U'U' paireen
haahaa
ii<ff
<!'a'
paireen
Transliteration
h
r
raaraa
ii<ff >f>:o
parree!!
vavvaa
For the purposes of transliteration there is no special sign for the

subjoined character so you will have to pay careful attention to the Panjabi
spelling.
16
PANJABI
Nasalisation
ng
ng
As shown in the syllabary, the nasal consonants belong to the five

different classes of consonants. Nasalisation is produced by directing a
substantial part of the breath towards the nasal cavity as the letter is being
uttered. In addition there are two nasalisation signs in Panjabi which
accompany consonants:
flt.tt
bindee
tippee ....
There are ten vowels in Panjabi in contrast to the English five (a, e, i, 0,
u). Panjabi vowels are generally pronounced as they are written,
following the one sign - one sound rule. They are pure vowels making
only one sound. However, there are two forms that vowels can take. The
independent vowel form which does not require a consonant and
the dependent form which is attached to a consonant. All consonants use
the dependent form of the vowel. Tables F and G show the dependent
vowels on their own and combined with the letter 1'/ s.
Table F
These will be dealt with in detail later.
Most letters in Panjabi have a flXed pronunciation. however some are

variable and this depends on their position in a word. Consider the letters
in Table E.
Table E Pronunciation of consonants
I
2
3
4
5
6
7
Sound at beginning of word
Sound in middle or at end of word
111
gh
jh
db
db
bh
or
";!
a'
ch
111
il
"i!
!I
";!
"Q
"8
Perhaps the most variable pronunciation of a single consonant in Panjabi

is that of the letter <l h. Words beginning with <l h and those where no
vowel precedes or affects it, carry the h sound as it would be used in
English. For instance:
haleoom!
government
Dependent vowels on their own

Vowel sign
Pronunciation of consonants
17
Vowels
There are five nasal consonants in Panjabi:
.11
<TcilH haleeem doctor
However, when <l h is used in the middle of a word following consonants

and vowels its pronunciation is varied. We will return to this point after
considering the vowel symbols and sounds.
8
9
10
1m Table G
invyible
f
1
.....
"'"
....'"'
Name of vowel
a
aa
i
ee
u
"'"
f'J:roo<jI
f>ro'<iI
~
00
e
ai
Us-
au
muk!aa
kannaa
sihaaree
bibaaree
aunkarh
!lulainkarhe
laanv
!lulaanvaan
horhaa
kanaurhaa
Dependent vowels in combination with s
Pronunciation
Consonant and
vowel sign
"
"R'
fR
"!!
R
jI
jj
jj
sa
saa
si
see
su
soo
se
sai
so
sau
a in ahead
a in part
i in it
ee in see
u in put
in food
a in cake
a in man
o in show
o in bought
00
18
PANJABI
You may note that the vowels are divided into five pairs. In the first three,
the distinction is between a short and long sound, for example between u
and 00. In the last two pairs the distinction is between closed and open
sounds so e is closed and ai is open sounding.
However, the pronunciation of both independent and dependent vowels is

the same (see Table H).
Table H
Short a sound - muk1aa

We have seen that in Panjabi there are ten vowels and they are represented
by nine symbols. The vowel muktaa has no equivalent sign to be used
with consonants. The individual consonant expresses its own sound and
also implies an a sound with it. This means that, unlike English, words can
be formed with consonants only without using any visible vowel. Each
consonant has an inherent sound, making it a syllable on its own.
However, there is no symbol for this sound in Panjabi, though we have
chosen to represent muktaa with the letter a for purposes of transliteration. Examples of the use of muktaa can be found in many borrowed
words from English, for example: 0Ill kap, cup, and _ mag, mug.
The inherent a is not pronounced in three main positions:
at the end of a word, e.g. C!'a kaar
with a subjoined consonant, e.g. JfI sree
at a syllable break, e.g. ~. 1110-~ gar-ilan
Independent vowels
The independent form can occur in three ways. First, when the vowel
comes at the beginning of a word or a syllable, second in those instances
where two vowel sounds are required as a consonant cannot support two
vowels, and third, in a dipthong - when two vowels are present in one
syllable. In fact one of the features of Panjabi is the presence of many
dipthongs, sometimes with three vowel sounds in one word with no
consonants, for instance rfer aaiaa, (he) came.
Independent vowels are represented by dependent vowels camed by the
ftrst three letters of the Panjabi alphabet.
@
oorhaa
", b
airhaa
-e
-e'hn eerhee
They are never used on their own and do not represent any consonant
sounds. They must be accompanied by their allocated vowel signs. Their
main function is to denote their own respective vowel sounds. They are
founder, basic or parent vowel bearers representing the ten sounds.
19
Independent vowel
Formula
Example
word
Transliteration
Meaning
- u is added to It to give ~
.. 00 is added to It to give !
upaj
production
fl5
ooth
camel
is added to It to give It
fk:
ot
shelter
immortal
Invisible sign 'a' is added to '"
..
I
aa is added to a to give ""
""'"
amar
aataa
flour
ai is added to'" to give ..
$nor
ainak
spectacles
au is added to '" to give ;;j
f i is added to -e to give re
1 ee is added to ~ to give !!'I
e i5s added to ~ to give j!
aura!
woman
re-
inaam
prize
l!br
eesaa
eklaa
Jesus
unity
Silent vowel signs

In English there are some silent or soft spoken consonants, for example r
and k. There are no such consonants in Panjabi, however there are silent
vowels. These are not often found in modem Panjabi but occur often in
the sacred language of Sikh religious texts. Silent vowels give special
meaning to the word they are referring to. The most common use of the
silent vowel you will come across is in the Sikh greeting m JfI ror5
sal(i) sree akaal. Note that the sihaaree in the word
has no effect on
the pronunciation, however its presence does alter the meaning:
I'Ia'
sal. extract
Jto sa!! seven
sat(i)
true
In this example we have included the silent vowel in brackets for purposes
of illustration, however throughout the rest of the book the silent vowel is
not included in the transliterated text.
Tones
One of the unique features of Panjabi, in the variety of modem South
Asian languages, is the presence of pitch contours. These change the
20
PANJABI
meaning of tbe word depending on the way it sounds. In tecbnical terms

tbese are called 'tones' and there are three types: low, high and level. Tbe
Panjabi tone system is far less complex than Chinese, the best known tone
language. The low tone is cbaracterised by lowering tbe voice below the
normal pitcb and then rising back in the following syllable. In the high
tone the pitch of the voice rises above its normal level falling back at the
following symbol. The level tone is carried by the remaining words. Tones
are not represented by any letters or symbols in the Gurmukhi script. In
this course we are not marking words with tone signs, as we believe this
will create confusion. The best manner to learn tonality is from repetition
from the audio tape or listening and imitating native speakers.
Table I illustrates how tone can cbange the meaning of a word.
Il!!!l Table I
Tone illustrations
Low tone
jhaa
liil!'
gborhaa horse
.m
gbarhee watch
peep
21
pronunciation of the word changes so as to produce the

haurhaa and laanv vowels respectively. For example: ~
suhnhaa is pronounced as ~ sohnhaa and fJroa' sihal is
pronounced as ilua' sehal.
Subjoined consonants revisited

As we previously noted, a few Panjabi words require consonants to be
written in a subjoined form, which takes the shape of a subscript to the
main letter. The reason for this is to indicate that the inherent muktaa
vowel is not present. Where vowels are present on the fIrst letter, these are
meant to be applied to the subjoined consonant. Therefore, in the word t{H
prem, there is no a symbol in the transliteration indicating the absence of
the muktaa. The laanv vowel is applied to the r in the foot of the p. Note
that the pronunciation of the subjoined consonant is the same as the
normal consonant.
Level tone
,...
Higb tone
cba-aa desire
;ro
korhaa whip
iiiu30 kobrhaa leper
"'"
karbee link of
"'!'t
a chain
chaah
tea
karhhee turmeric
curry
Return of " haahaa

We have already noted the variable pronunciation of the consonant " h.
Now that we have covered vowels and tones, we can return to look at
some of the other varieties of haahaa's pronunciation.
1 When" is preceded by a sihaaree the pronunciation of the
vowel changes to resemble lIulaanvaan. For instance the
word Bfua sbahir is pronounced iroa shair. The pronunciation of the word is therefore converted into a higb tone.
2 When" is accompanied by aunkarh, the pronunciation of
the word changes to resemble kanaurhaa. For instance the
word ~ hahul is pronounced ~ bauhl once again
changing the word to a high tone.
3 In a similar manner, when the letter preceding the" has
either the aunkarh or sihaaree vowel attached, then the
Auxiliary signs
The double sound
>lftrcI
adhak ~
The function of the >Iftror allhak' is to allocate a double sound to the particular letter that it is assigned to. It should be placed above the preceding
letter that is to be read twice, however, in practice it is placed between the
two letters. Therefore, when the allhak occurs between two letters, it is
the second of the two that is to be repeated. For example, in the Panjabi
word for thigh, 1.k pall, the allhak affects the letter c: I changing the
sound of the word from pat to patl. In some cases another vowel sound
may come in between the two letters, but the allhak still affects the
second letter, for example in the word ~ bachchio, the allhak
comes before the sihaaree vowel but still affects the letter" ch, so it
is pronounced chch. The allhak is a very important, though subtle
device, as two letters without an adhak give rise to completely different
meanings. For example uar pag means foot, whereas tl'iII pagg means
turban. A similar effect can be seen in English with the words super
and supper.
Nasal sounds: Nt!! bindee . and fi'tiI tippee ....

The binJIee and the tippee both serve to add a nasal sound to a particular
vowel. The binJIee is used with kannaa, laanv, lIulaanvaan, bihaaree,
22
PAI'UABI
horhaa and kanaurhaa and the independent fonns of vowels where # is

the bearer. For example: ill" gaan cow
The tippee is used with the muklaa, sihaaree, aunkarh and dulainkarhe.
For example: >hi khand sugar
The sound of the tippee and birulee is almost equivalent to the n in pound
or bangle. However, their sound varies from the almost totally nasalised
to a more fully pronounced n sound. For transliteration purposes the letter
!! is used for both the tippee and birulee.
Panjabi loan wo rds

The Panjabi language has a substantial number of words which have been
borrowed from the English language, for example school, college,
telephone, bus, pen, pencil, chalk, ticket, and computer. Moreover, some
Panjabi words have been adopted by English including chutney, pandit,
kebab, samosa, saree, dhobi, and guru. Some English words borrowed by
Panjabi have also been altered by Panjabi pronunciation and you will
notice in the transliteration that English words and names have been
written with this in mind.
There are ten vowels represented by nine signs. Their positions relaring to
consonants are as follows
are written beneath the letter: - . - - ... are
written above the letter; f written on the left of the letter while' and ,
are written on the right. The three auxiliary signs, '" .4 are written above
the letter. Panjabi is best written on lined paper initially. In English the letters rest on the line, whereas in Panjabi the horizontal headstroke is writlen upon the line, the characters then hang from the line, in much the same
way as clothes bang from a washing line.
i;
Panjabi alphabet t.'/nos't ~ ~ ft<NI

paniaabee varanhmaalaa gurmukhee lipee:
Letter
The letters in Panjabi dictionaries are arranged in the order of Table A,

reading left to right, as are the order of words within each letter. The
exceptions to this rule are those letters which are disringuished by a dot
that is 1'1 , 14 , ill, iI and l:, as these letters occur within the non-dotted fonn .
Subjoined letters are not differentiated from the fu ll fonn. Dictionary
order in the Gunnukhi script is based upon phonology as vowels precede
consonants. Therefore, the vowel signs follow muktaa, kannaa,
sihaaree, bihaaree, a unkarh, llulainkarhe, laanv, llulaanvaan,
horhaa, kanaur haa.
Writing
Panjabi words are made up partly of consonants and partly of vowel signs.
Letters are written flfst and then the sound symbols. Panjabi punctuation
is similar to that used in English. However, one distinct difference is that
in Panjabi a vertical stroke is used at the end of a sentence to mark a full
stop. For example: My name is Ritu. H<r 1'i'H fus" ~ I
iiIlI'
-e
-eb'l
"R
If"R'
<l
<l'<l'
CI
ci'or
>I
"""
1II
11
"iI
II
"
1J
~
"ill-
'""
h
tfw
lfi:r
ir:'
-e
ror
15
"is
h
h
"iI
?:
a-
'c"
'""
tl
1'>
\l
Sign of letter
Name of letter
1lI
11
Dictionary orde r
23
PAI'UABI SCRIPT AND SOUND SYSTEM
h
>h
l'I'?r
ti'tr
oarhaa
airhaa
eerhee
sassaa
haahaa
kakkaa
khakhkhaa
gaggaa
ghaggaa
nganngaa
chachchaa
chahhaa
jaiiaa
jhaiiaa
njannjaa
tainkaa
thaththaa
daddaa
dhaddaa
nhaanhaa
lallaa
thaththaa
daQQaa
dhaQQaa
nannaa
pappaa
a
s
h
k
kh
g
gh
ng
ch
ill
j
jh
nj
t
th
d
db
nh
I
1!l
d
db
n
p
24
PANJABI
25
u~~~V~\1~
3'S'l~ ~'S'Q~
,~~o(5
'JRjgH'M .
ct!~E' ll5"5"~
~v~~ U1f~li~
:
IJ
'\I
26
PANJABI
27
*'
1hr
w
h
H'>-r
.. .,...
phaphphaa
babbaa
bhabbaa
"""
f!i'5'
Iallaa
vavvaa
1J
"1f'1J'
11
ti'w
rhaarhaa
shashshaa
khakhkhaa
ghaghghaa
ph
b
bh
m
y
r
I
v
rh
sh
kh
gh
zazzaa
faffaa
G:
'8
mammaa
"6
:tI
ill
D
R
R
iI
7:
yayyaa
raaraa
Writing Patte rn
YYf
'Y
d1
-+-
t=i
--.-
T ~ df
t:;r ;:r
-:a
--+-
V:J
U
}+-
Y'1 W
U t
3"
--+-
:::;r ~3
}--f
-+-
~ ~
f) -+- -V
:a
}--f
p- p.y
Exercises
I!l l. Read the following sentences out loud and check your pronunciation
Relationship between independent and dependent vowels:

independent
Dependent
'" ,
Translit-
>If'
fe
1tI
aa
ee
- - ~
i!
it
>ii
~.
00
II
ai
with the audio recording.
a. C!U W"6 0ffiH

c. W"6 mil H5CI
au
eration
2. Write out the following words:
a. C!H5
Sample reading and writing lessons
The vowel muklaa has no visible symbol in the Gurmukhi script. For
transliteration purposes it is represented by the letter Q .
1lfH<I, """ ;re
amar, charach chal

Amar, go to the church
c. _
2 """ >If' kannaa aa
1 ~ '" muktaa a
Reading 1 crcn-t', Ciflf, Qfl-fa

karam, kap, kamar
Karam, cup, Kamar
b. """
The dependent fonn of the kannaa vowel is placed to the right of the letter that is affected. For transliteration purposes it is represented by the
symbol aa.
Reading
2 C!H5, ffi!T W"6

kamal, mag bhar
Kamal,fill the mug
l-Rrcif, i1cI
wa
malak, jag bhar

Malik,fill the jug
1.
lI'H,
ow, >:'8
'IF<J
shaam, naanaa, vaal vaah

sham, grandfather, comb hair
3.
;j';J', URI
>If'
chaachaa, ghar aa
uncle, come home
2. <!'l-f, '8'R
raam, bas pharh
ram, catch the bus
4.
orcr, llf?i'<J ' "

kaakaa, anaar khaa
baby. eat the pomegranate
28
PANJABI
Writing Pattern
-r-
wt
c;
-+- ?
-+- -:4J
"8 -+-
-+-
4W
-+-
~(l
-+-
~~
r Kfi
-+-
t::f y
r~
~
"B
~ (5
~S
-::Jl
;J ~...
4- U lf
I!l l. Read the following sentences out loud and check your pronunciation
Exercises
!I I.Read the followi ng words out loud and check your pronunciation with
the audio recording.
a. !;I'H lhr <1'>1
c. Jh "",.
a. ~
b. !;I'H
i'o 1"i'CI
d. lI/'tI, "ff7I, \k
Reading
c. ?WI'
1. lIi'tI, \k,5"<r
akhkh, patt, la!!
eye, thigh, leg
"'"
athth hathth
eight hands
c. "'"
The dependent form of the sihaaree vowel is placed to the left of the
letter being affected. For transliteration purposes it is represented by the
letter i.
The >Iftro! allhak' should be placed above the preceding letter that is to be
read twice, in practice, however, it is placed in between the two leiters.
Therefore, when the allhak occurs between two letters it is the second
letter of the two that is to be repeated. For transliteration purposes the
allhak has the effect of doubling the consonant effected.
3.
b. ~
a. \k
adbak '
Reading
b.
4 flro'<Il fe f slhaaree I
2. Write out the following words
llItr.l
-+-
2. Write out the following words:
Exercises
29
Writing pattern
r~-q
2.
<1'>1, >hi !;I'H

rakhkh, pagg shaam
sham, put on the turban
4. Jh 1"i'CI
sa!! nakk
seven noses
1. f\;rcrn, fe"c:, fe"or, fcfu

kiran, itt, ikk, kill
Kiran, brick, one, nail
3.
2. f;fu, i'R'tl' futI

jill, sidh-dhaa likh
Jill, write straight
fumrcJ, m
4.
fm,
l!ilbar, richch gioh
reu ~ fualo; m>

ih chaar hiran han
these are four deers
Dilbar, count the bears
Writing pattern
-e
-+-
-+-
? C'
-+- ?
1:;U
.-+- ....,.
6:~
~
c;:
30
PAI'UABI
Exercises
31
PAI'UABI SCRIPT AND SOUND SYSTEM

Exercises
I!ll. Read the following sentences out loud and check your pronunciation
I. Read the following sentences out loud and check your pronunciation
a. re'or fi!'c:' b. t'orcm fRW fu>! c. ~ foh! fR d. feu "iI'6 f<I'lI un

2. Write the names in Gunnukhi of the items in the pictures.
2. Write the names in Gurmukhi of the items in the pictures.
a) richch
b) kill
c) hiran
5 firn'a't eI 1 bihaaree ee
The dependent form of the bihaaree vowel is placed to the right of the
letter that is being affected. For transliteration purposes it is represented
by the letter ee.
Reading
1.
"R'ItI,
;I'l;iI,
.ret, RW
seetee, dabbee, vaalee, see!aa
whistle, small box, earring, Sita

3. ;Nt ~ fu>JreI
chaachee kha!aaee liaaee
Aunty has bought a biscuit
2. ~,~ w;;: OR!

reetaa, ghaleechaa saaf kar
c. vaalee
b. billee
a. seetee
6 0i'0I3 ~ _ aunkarh u
The dependent form of the vowel aunkarh is placed under the letter to be
affected. For transliteration purposes it is represented by the letter u.
Reading 1.~,;r.;I?, !,!,!, til

gudh dh, dhakkanh, sukh, pee
milk, lid, Sukh, drink
3. "!'=OI,
Rita, clean the rug
nnn
i.II3'i'I 1"i'
om
Young boy! Do not stick

out your tongue.
Ishar's cat was black
Upkar, bring the wool

4. ~,!ftI OR!
gulaab, chupp kar
yuvak zabaan naa kadhdh
4. -e'hre ~
or'l'I'I "R'I
eeshar gee billee kaalee see
2. ~,~rn...
upkaar, unn liaa
Gulab, keep quiet
Writing pattern
Writing pattern
.d
~
r
-+-
L,- U)~
~
~~
~
-+-
~S
Gf-+-~-z:;Lt
t.=r
-+-
f4"t:=f
~-+-?~
7'
"il
32
PANJABI
Exercises
33
2. Write the Gunnukhi of the items in the pictures.
!!II. Read the following sentences out loud and cbeck your pronunciation
2. Write the name of the following pictures in Gurrnukhi:
c. ihaarhoo
b. soor
a.ooth
laanve
a. dhakkanh
~!
{fulalnkarhe
b. zabaan
c. unn
. The dependent fonn of the vowel laanv is placed on top of the affected
letter. For transliteration purposes the letter e will be used to symbolise the
laanv.
I. lJ'I, r.r, ~, ~
soor, pharh, ibaarhoo, bboop
pig, hold, broom, Bhup
3. "s!'I CO ~
Saroop l!aa ooth
Sarup's camel
3.
4. ~, ~~
Anoop, moora! banhaa

Anup, draw a picture
Writing pattern
~fu;cojju~
ub ien l!aa seb e

That is Jane's apple
2. ~,~W
roop, aarhoo khaa

Rup, eat the peach
iffi, 1i.P>r6, iii, H<I'
2.
feuiHB~
ih che mez han

These are six tables
lele, piaare, bhed, meraa

lambs, beloved, sheep, my
The dependent fonn of the vowel J1uIainkarbe appears under the letter
being affected. For purposes of transliteration the symbol 00 is used to
represent the J1ulainkarbe.
Reading
I.
Reading
00
4.
~, it.3~
devid, sher l!ekh

David, look at the lion
Exercises
!!II. Read the following sentences out loud and check your pronunciation
a. feu i iffi
c. feu
H<I'
jju ~
2. Fill in the blanks by writing the correct words in Gunnukhi:

Exercises
a. _ _ _ lele
b. _ _ _ bhed
c. _ __
seb
9 ~ >iI - duIaanvaan ai
The dependent fonn of the vowel llulaanvaan is written on top of the
affected letter. For transliteration purposes the symbol ai is used to
represent J1ulaanvaan.
34
PANJABI
Reading
ire
2.
svaitar, baig, jamail, pair

sweater, bag, larnail,foot
~ ~
i'il
4.
ajj ai!Vaar hai

Today is Sunday
feu jjjrn;r 5
a. - ? kholaa
ih ainak lai
Have these spectacles
11
feu 'ihffl' H<n h
~~
ih kaimraa meree bhainh gaa hai

This is my sister's camera
~;;j -
b. -
'i:' motaa
c. - ; r ghorhaa
kanaurhaa au
The dependent form of the kanaurhaa vowel appears above the affected
letter. For transliteration purposes the symbol au is used to represent
kanaurhaa.
Reading
Exercises
a. feu 'ihffl' ~ ~ ~
c.
35
2. Fill in the missing letters in Gurrnukhi:
I.~, Q,~,
3.
feu 0 H<n h
1. i;i!, iiln, 'IlBo, ~

2. 'F.I(3C'; ~, ~ ~
sharan kaur, chaul ubaal
faujee, paurhee, balaur, gaurh
Sharan
Kaur, boil the rice
soldier, ladder, playing marbles, run
3.
~~
c. _ _ _ ainak
b. _ _ _ ai!Vaar
bhainh
>lia.r
4. feu ii8 fuR <m

ih mere khidaunhe han
These are my toys .
TI ?
uh aural kaunh hai?

Who is that woman?
2. Fill in the blanks by writing the correct words in Gurmukhi:
a.
Exercises
10
mr f1
- horhaa
b~~TI?
The dependent form of the vowel horhaa appears above the affected letter. For transliteration purposes the letter 0 is used to represent horhaa.
Reading I.~, Hco, lii;p, RiI
kholaa, motaa, ghorhaa, sotee
donkey,fat, horse, stick
3. fu:1 "" H<T<'>
rotee khaa mahan
Eat your food Mohan.
2. >i<J? iiiH
sohanh kol 10laa hai

Sohan has a parrot.
4. W tff'W He E>i
aao bachchio mor gekho
Come on children look at
the peacock.
fu:1 ""
a. -
b ~Hco~
d. W tff'W
E>i
chaul
b. f - i
12 fd;iI biru!ee
khidaunhe
c. -
til
faujee
and ~ tippee" n
The bim!ee and the tippee both serve to add a nasal sound to a particular
vowel. For transliteration purposes, the letter D is used for both the tippee
and bindee.
Reading .
1.
feu ii8 'IlBo <m
2. Fill in the missing letters and vowels in Gurrnukhi:
TI
Exercises
a. >i<J?
d.
1Jo
~,
singh, chum, moonh
Mui,
lion, beak, mouth

3. 0(", i';!, ~, Hlu
kaan, gem!, kainchee, meenh
crow, ball, scissors. rain
2. ~,
WI,
anb, jannj, lanngaa

mango, marriage party. lame person
4. ~, ii'B, ~, ~
honth, paund, unglee, vataaoon
lips, pound, finger, aubergine
'"
36
PANJABI
Writing pattern
-+-
....0...
~~~
-+-
=.;:
5~
~di$i
ott
'd'5
U?
tubaadaa kee haal hai?

How are you?
Exercises
.l!Il. Read the following words out loud and check your pronunciation with
the audio recording.
a. fi:I>q,
c.
lju,
w;, ~
~,
Hfu
In this unit you will learn:

how to use simple greetings
how to introduce yourself
how to ask how people are
b ~,mr, ~
d.cr,~,~
2. Fill in the missing letters and vowels in Gurmukhi:

a. n-- ianni
b. 5 - lanngaa
c. <:--
v3taaoon
III 1 What is your name?

I!l iIi'5 ~ '\ ~ ciI ("ill-dj 7
gall baat 1 tuhaadaa kee naam hai?
It is the first day of the new Paniabi class at Heywood College. Mr Charan
Singh is the teacher and Jane, Henry and David are students.
"IR!1'i fi:I>q
Jffir J{'IllfOffi till
Charan Singh
sal sree akaa! iee!

Hello! (see Commentary section)
w;
Jffir J{'IllfOffi till
Jane
sal sree akaa! iee!

Hello!
"IR!1'i fi:I>q
H<I' l'i'H
Charan Singh
meraa naam charan singh hai. tuhaadaa kee naam hai?

My name is Charon Singh. What's your name? (to Jane)
"IR!1'i fi:I>q
ill e<J'lI' oil
w;
til H<I' l'i'H w; ill
Jane
iee meraa naam ien hai.

My name is Jane .
l'i'H
iI ?
'.
38
-;reo
PANJABI
MIll
C hara n Singh
~ I ~
oil1'i'li
achchaa. tuhaadaa kee naam hai?

OK! What's your name? (to Henry)
&a'I
iii >l<r 1'i'li &a'I
H enry
jee meraa naam hainree hai.
~t
My name is Henry.
C haran Singh
abhiaas
I!ll.
b)
c)
shaabaash!
Exercises
After reading the dialogue and/or listening to the audio tape, try to do the
foUowing exercises.
True or false?
>l<r
meraa
means your
means my
,q.
achchaa
means well done
a) ~
R'I3'a I
39
HOW ARE YOU?
tubaadaa
True/ False
True/ False
True/ False
Well done!
David and Jane exchange greetings in an infonnal manner.
2. Arrange in correct word order
i!n
a)
J a ne
m'<! l{t ramt >l<r ni i!n Et -3<!' oil ni E ?

sa! STee akaal. meraa naan jell e. !eraa kee naan e?
Hello. My name is Jane. What's your name?
maDavid
m'<! l{t ramt >l<r ni ~ Et

sa! STee akaal. meraa naan devid e.
Hello. My name is David.
PJI J:lae'<i61
~
m'<!l{tram
iii
jee
>l<r
,q.
R'I3'a
-3<!'
meraa-hai-devid-naan
My name is David.
b) g<lT ~ 1'i'li oil?
tuhaadaa-hai-naam-kee?
What is your name?
c) ni E oil -3<!'?
na3!!-e-kee-leraa?
What is your name?
1Zl2 How are you?

B~~ ~ ~citU'5-51
shabdaavalee
tuhaadaa
kee
naam
hai
sa! STee akaal
oil
1'i'li
>l<r ~ iIm ni
meraa
achchaa
shaabaash
!eraa
ni
naan
Vocabulary
your (fonnal)
what
name (m.) (fonnal)
is (fonnal)Sikh greeting (literal
meaning: God is truth)
honorific particle signifying
respect (see Commentary)
my
OK, a/right
well done
your (informal)
name (m. ) (infonnal)
is (informal)-
- The ways in which is, am and are are fonned in Panjabi will be referred
to in Unit 2
gall baat 2 tuhaadaa kee haal hai?

Parveen and Talat meet each other in the city centre. Parveen is with her
brother Rahim and sister Salrna.
\.f61W;
Parveen
..
I't:m>H tSotH. ~ oil <l'5 ~ ?

asslaam alaikam. tubaadaa kee haal hai?
Hello. How are you?

3l'!1I'
Talat
I't:m>H. >l<r <l'5 m
~I
vaalaikam asslaam. meraa haal theek hai.
Hello. I'mfine.
\.f61W;
Parveen
3l'!1I'
Tala t
feu >l<r T<I' ii
feu >ra'l R
~I
ih meraa bharaa hai ale ih meree bhainh hai.

This is my brother and this is my sister.
oil~~m~?
kee tuhaadaa parvaar theek hai?
Is your family a/right?
'"
40
PANJABI
Salma and Rahim
shukreeaa. saadaa parvaar theek hai.

Thank you. Our family is fine.
"a'HG
Tala!
khuQaa haafiz.
Goodbye.
c.:iI>f,
JlHH' ~ ~ ~
Rahim, Salma
and Parveen
15'tc!
feu
TcI'
~
h
~
~
"R'iI'
1:J'fi:'E
Exercises
ISh.
Begin the conversation
1:J'fi:'E1
khuQaa haafiz.
Goodbye.
haal
<J'5
abhiaas
following exercises.
1:J'fi:'E1
shabdaavalee
2UT oil
41
HOW ARE YOU?
hai
5? tuhaadaa kee haal
hoi?
asslaam alaikam
vaalaikam asslaam
theek
ih
bharaa
ale
bhainb
parvaar
shukreeaa
saadaa
khuQaa haafiz
Vocabulary
condition (lit.) (m.)
is
How are you?
(see Commentary)
Muslim greeting
a)
~~
vaalaikam asslaam
Hello.
response to Muslim
greeting
finelOKla lright
this
brother (m.)
and
sister (f.)
family (m.)
thank you (m.)
our
Muslim departing
phrase
b)
H<r <J'5
meraa haal theek e

I am fine.
c) tiI,~m5
Jee, parvaar theek hoi

The family is fme.
'.
2. Match the expressions

a) H<r TcI' meraa bharaa
b) H<fI h meree bhainb
c) "R'iI' ~ saadaa parvaar
bolee baare
1. our family
2. my brother
3. my sister
Language points
Possessive adjectives
1. Adjectives are words which describe people, places and objects. The
words my, your and his/her are possessive adjectives. Unlike in English,
the possessive adjective in Panjabi changes according to what is being
possessed. In Dialogues I and 2 the word <J'5 haal (condition) is
42
PANJABI
grammatically masculine and therefore requires a masculine possessive
adjective. Similarly, a woman talking about her children will use two
forms of the word my, distinguishing between her son and daughter. )loo
meraa would apply to the male and Hl3'I meree for the female. Note that
it is the ending which changes. This distinction is the sarne even if the
father were talking about his son and daughter.
The following tables illustrate the way in which possessive adjectives are
formed with singular, masculine and feminine objects. Note that the plural
forms given here (their, our) refer only to the nature of the possessor, not
of the object being possessed.
Possessive adjectives with singular masculine objects

1st person
Examples:
meraa
Mother talking about her children:

)loo ffl'Iot'
~
Hl3'I
43
HOW ARE YOU?
ill
ill
meraa larhkaa theek hai.

meree larhkee theek hai.
saadaa
My son is fine.
My daughter is fine .
2nd person
luhaadaa
your (informal)
your (formal)
ih lIaa/is lIaa
his/her
~"i!'
ihnaandaa
his/her (formal)
their
~ "i!'I~ "i!'
uh lIaa/us lIaa
his/her
~"i!'
uhnaan lIaa
his/her (formal)
their
teraa
Father talking about his children:

meraa larhkaa theek hai.
meree larhkee theek hai.
my
our
My son is fine .
My daughter is fine.
3rd person
You will have noticed that there is no difference between the sentences
spoken by the mother and the father. The form of the possessive adjective
does not depend on the gender of the possessor (i.e. whether male or
female) but on the gender of what is being possessed. In addition to
gender, possessive adjectives also change according to whether the
possessed object is singular or plural. As both parents are talking about
one person, the possessive adjective is in the singular form .
There are, therefore, three factors which need to be taken into account
when selecting the appropriate possessive adjective:
whether the object is masculine or feminine
whether the object is singular or plural
whether the situation is formal or informal
2. In addition to describing objects, possessive adjectives are also used to
describe different states of being, i.e. how you are, how you are feeling or
other personal descriptions such as your name. You will remember from
Dialogue 2 that Parveen uses the possessive adjective your when asking
her friend Talat How are you? The literal meaning of this question in
Panjabi is How is your condition? Talat responds by saying I'm fine,
literally My condition is fine with the possessive adjective my.
feu
"i!' IteR "i!'
'.
Possessive adjectives with singular feminine objects

1st person
I:
meree
saadee
my
our
2nd person
leree
tuhaadee
your (informal)
your (formal)
44
PANJABI
HOW ARE YOU?
3rd person
45
to address a singular male/female in a formal manner
to address more than one person, male or female, in an
ih gee/is gee
his/her
ibnaangee
his/her (formal)
their
Conversely, the word "3cr" teraa is used only in an informal manner to
uh gee/us gee
his/her
Here are two common examples of the formal and informal:
uhnaangee
his/her (formal)
their
Further examples of possessive adjectives with plural objects will be

illustrated in Unit 3.
I!I Formal and informal speech

There is a clear distinction between formal and informal speech in
Panjabi. For instance, two sisters talking over the phone will use
significantly different speech from two strangers meeting for the fIrst
time. Let us consider the example of a telephone conversation between
Surinder and Mohinder who are sisters.
Surinder fci? ~ ? kiddaan Mohinder? How are you, Mohinder?
Mohinder l5'Ic! <:PI '3<1' oil U'8 ~? theek haan. leraa kee haa! e? [' m
fine. How are you?
Now let's contrast this situation with two strangers meeting in an office.
Mr Sandhu ~ oil U'8 U tit? lUhaadaa kee haa! hai jee? How are
you?
Mr Iohal
~I HCI' U'8 l5'Ic! UI dhannvaag meraa haal theek hai.
Thank you. I am fine.
If you compare these two example situations, you will notice that there are
two Panjabi words for the same English word your. In the fIrst meeting
between Mr Singh and the Panjabi class at Heywood College, the words
'3<1' teraa and ~ tuhaadaa are used for your. Either word is used
depending on who is being addressed. The word ~ tuhaadaa is used
normally when addressing more than one person (plural) or when
addressing one person, male or female, formally as a sign of respect.
Therefore, the word ~ tuhaadaa serves two purposes:
informal or fannal manner
address a single person, male or female.

~
oil
'3<1' oil
i'i'li
u? lUhaadaa kee naam hai?
.,;I U/~?
What is your name? (formal)
leraa kee naan haile? What is your name? (informal)
Asking questions in Panjabi

In Dialogue I the word oil kee is used to turn a statement into a question.
For example:
Statement-~ ~
l5'Ic!
!Uhaadaa parvaar
Your family is
fine .
theek hai.
Question~ ~ ~ l5'Ic! U ? kee lUhaadaa
Is your family
parvaar theek hai?
fine?
UI
However, you do not always need to use a question word, or interrogative,

to turn a statement into a question. The use of intonation (rise and fall of
the voice in speech) and emphasis can serve the same purpose. Raising
your voice at the end of a sentence or using a questioning tone are equally
effective. To ask the question What is your name? you can simply say:
jee lUhaadaa naam?
'.
Your name, please?
The use of any question depends on the context of the conversation, the
relationship between the speakers, and the number of people involved.
You may have noted that the question How are you? is given as ~ oil
U'8 U ? tuhaada. kee baal bai? There are three literal meanings of this
sentence: What is your condition?, How are you getting on? and How are
you feeling? The various forms of How are you? will be used throughout
the rest of the book. So look out for them!
There are many ways of asking and responding to the question How are
you? in Panjabi. Some of the possibilities are listed in the Commentary
section. You do not have to learn all of these, but they are useful to know
when trying to understand the speech of other Panjabi speakers.
46
HOW ARE YOU?
PANJABI
viaakhiaa
Commentary
1. How are you?

There are various ways of saying How are you? in Panjabi. Here are some
examples:
.ifri'u1
koil<re~1
fa/? 1
loon kiven hain? (informal)

teraa kee haa! hai? (informal)
kiddaan? (colloquial)
Buddhist minority. Throughout the remainder of the book, we have

focused on the Hindu, Sikh and Muslim religious groupings.
Sikhs greet each other by saying: 'FIfa' J{I rcrH iii sal sree akaal jee, or
simply'Flfa' J{I rcrH sal sree akaal. There is an associated body language
with each greeting. When saying 'FIfa' J{I rcrH sal sree akaal the hands
are, usually, joined together in front of the chest, with the head slightly
bowed. In formal and respectful circumstances the suffIx iii jee is added.
The reply to the greeting is the same, 'FIfa' J{I rcrH sal sree akaal. This is
also used on departure, and may be combined with other sayings such as
00 ~ phir milaan ge (see you again) or <f>I ""'" rabb raakbaa
Now let's have a look at the variety of responses to the question How are
you?
(May God protect you).

theek e
tuhaadee kirpaa
hai
vaahiguroo !laa
shukar hai
Fine. (informal)
By your blessings.
(/ am fine) (formal)
By Ihe grace of God.
(/ am fine) (formal)
It is common for Panjabi speakers to respond to How are you? reciprocally by asking the same of the enquirer:
~~
loon sunhaa
You lell (how you are). (informal)
~ ~ tuseen sunhaao You lell (how you are). (formal)
As in English when asked the question How are you? many people say
thank you after replying with such responses as /' m fine. There are a few
common ways of expressing thank you in Panjabi:
.~
dhannvaa!l
.~
shukreeaa
.~
miharbaanee
tuhaadee kirpaa hai.
~ f<rcl1.I' ~I
1!12_ Panjabi greetings

Panjabi greetings are chosen, not according to the time of day - as in cases
such as Good morning or Good evening - but according to the religion of
the speakers. All the world's main faiths are represented in Panjab.
However, after the partition of the region, the main religious group in
West Panjab (Pakistan) is Muslim, with a sizeable Christian minority, and
in East Panjab there is a mixture of Sikhs and Hindus with a Christian and
47
The Muslim greeting is ~ RlorH asslaam alaikam, which is taken

from Arabic and means Peace be upon you. The reply to this is ~
~ vaalaikam asslaam, which means Peace be upon you also. On
departing a Muslim may say l:f'!' ~ khullaa haaliz, which means May
God protect you. Men will greet each other by a shake of the hand and an
embrace or by the raising of the right hand. Women would greet one
another with an embrace or a clasping of the hand.
~ namasle, ~
iii namasle jee, or~, namaskaar are different forms of Hindu greetings. The greeting is from Sanskrit and literally means / greet you respectfully. The reply to ~ namasle is ~,
namasle. Men may shake hands in greeting. However, to and among
women the folding of hands and a slight bowing of the head is considered
a mark of respect. There is no specific departing phrase.
'.
It is considered good practice to use the greeting of the other person's religion on fIrst meeting. Therefore if Mr Singh, who is a Sikh teacher, had a
Muslim student in his class, he would greet him by saying ~ RlorH
asslaam alaikam. The student could equally reply ~ ~,
vaalaikam asslaam or say >Ifo J{I rcrH sal sree akaal as a sign of respect.
However, if you are not certain of the other person's religious background,
it is advisable to use the westemised, secular greeting hello or hello jee.
iii jee is an extra added word known as an honoriftc particle, signifying

respect. The use of the word iii jee is very common in the Panjabi
language. It can be added to the end (and sometimes before) almost any
sentence as a sign of respect in a fannal context. To some extent jee is the
equivalent of please and also of sir/madam in English.
48
PANJABI
abhiaas
Exercises
HOW ARE YOU?
You
Say hello, tell her your name and ask what her name is.
Kiran
Her ~ fcta;o; UI
1. Word search
Three words are hidden in the box. These words are ll/'r achchaa, OK,
~ shaabaash, well done, and <fa <1'>1' rabb raakhaa, goodbye. Find
them by looking horizontally across each of the rows.
"if
-a
1'1'
H'
l./'
;J
l!'
1;1
or
1iI
tI
"
1;1
l!'
fu
cit
U'6
a7
meraa naam Kiran hai.
Kiran
Tell her you are fine and then ask her how she is.
Her U'6 .:t l5'Ior UI
meraa haal vee theek hai.
I am fine too.
a<l
tuhaadaa kee haal hai?

My name is Kiran. How are you?
You
49
You
Say goodbye.
...
2. Greeting response
How would you respond to someone who greets you with the following
expressions?
a) ~ namas!e
c) "Rf3 -.:tI1lf<I'l'! sal sree akaal
b) hlmf ~
asslaam a1aikam
3. Use the appropriate formal and informal possessive

adjectives in the foUowing sentences.
a) _ _ cit ~ U 7 _ _ kee naam hai? What is your name? (formal)
b) _ _ cit U'6 U 7 _ _ kee haal hai?
c) _ _ cit n' ~ 7 _ _ kee naan e?
How are you? (informal)

Whot is your name? (informal)
1!l4. Complete the conversation

You have just met Kiran, a new student in the Panjabi class. Following the
English prompts complete the following conversation in Panjabi.
Kiran
rnl
"Rf3 -.:tI1lf<I'l'!
~ cit ~ U 7
kee naam hai?
Hello. What is your name?
sal sree akaal jee. tuhaadaa
main kiran haan

I'm Kiran

how to say who you are
how to ask about and describe ethnicity or nationality
about Panjabi sentence word order
t%ll Are you English too?

I!!l ~ l!'<f 'I ott 2Jff <tI ~ U 7
gaD baat 1 kee tuseen vee angrez ho?
51
I'M KIRAN
Hd' a
Ashok
meraa gesh bhaaral hai ale meree bolee gujraalee hai.

My country is India and my language is Gujarati.
ua<'> fri>q
'F.I'>I'a I
W'Cf3'
&01, oil fc!a;>; ~ ~ ?

shaabaash! hainree, kee kiran gujraalee hai?
Well done! Henry,.is Kiran Gujarati?
&01
nul,
Henry
nabee!!, uh panjaabee hai ale hindoo haL

No, she is Panjabi and Hindu .
ua<'>
Mui
Charan Singh
~I
bhaaI1ee
gesh
bhaaral
babul achchaa
bolee
gujraalee
~
~
vee
honhaa
Ii'
i
nul
t!il'Ul
main
le
nabeen
panjaabee
and
no
a person from Panjab or of
Panjabi origin (m./f.)
and
Hindu (m./f.)
fc:fe"l'dEll
2J1'I'
tuseen
t!(J}ffi
W'diI
;'in
nul ;:ii, Ii' t!(J}ffi nul <PI Ii' ~ <PI
Jane
nabeen jee, main jannan nabeen haan. main angrez haan.

No, I'm not German . I'm English.
jf=
Ii' ~
David
main vee angrez haan ate main viQiaarthee haan.

I'm also English and I am a student.
a Ii' f.. f" .. 'attl <PI
Mui
>rga' V
I ~, oil
W'diI U ?
Charan Singh babul achchaa. ashok, kee lUseen bhaaI1ee ho?
Very good. Ashok, are you Indian ?
Vocabulary
you (informal)
German (m./f.)
English (m./f.)
student (m./f.)
you (formal)
Indian (m./f.)
country (m.)
India (m.)
very good
language (f.)
a person from Gujarat or of
Gujarati origin (m./f.)
also
to be
loon
is the teacher and Henry, Jane, Ashok, Kiran and David are students
anending the class.
Jane, are you German?
u >a fds ~I
shabdaavalee
~
t!il'Ul
l!!!annvaag.
Thank you.
It is the second day of the Panjabi class at Heywood College. Mr Singh
Mui
;'in, oil
t!(J}ffi 5' ?
Charan Singh jen, kee loon jannan hain?
~ ~I
Charan Singh
jannan
angrez
vigiaarthee
ua<'>
U >a Ha'I ijl'I'l
W'Cf3'
>rga' ,q.
ijl'I'l
ua<'>
ale
hindoo
'.
52
PANJABI
abhiaas
Exercises
I'M KIRAN
53
Kiran
fHR'a F.RIH'I ~ oil <1'8 ~ ?

namas!e misaz sharmaa. tuhaadaa kee haal hai?
Hello Mrs Sharma. How are you?
fHR'a
faRJo
1. True or false?
F.RIH'
~ <PI
oil
~ HT
iii fu"ii
1J<'i?
>lfR1'
~ ~ <PI
Say whether these statements about the students ' ethnicities and
nationalities are true or false.
Mrs Sharma main theek haan. kee !ere maa!aa jee iththe han? aseen
!lonon saheleeaan haan.
l'mjine. Is your mother here? We are both friends.
a)faRJo~~
b) it'; MOHn ~
c)
llf80r 8'<I3'l ~
kiran gujraa!ee hai

jen jarman hai
True / False
faRJo
n.rr iii, ~ fu"ii n.rr 1J<'i, ~ 111<1 1J<'i I
True / False
Kiran
ashok bhaartee hai
True / False
naheen jee, uh iththe naheen han, uh ghar han.

No , she's not here. She's at home.
llf80r
HT
Ashok
maa!aa jee, kiran Ie main !lonon ikko kalaas vich haan.

Mother, Kiran and I are both in the same class.
1!l2. Listen to the tape and tick the correct box

Panjabi
English
iii, faRJo i H
re"a
shabdaavalee
John
fi::.J
Ram
ih
maataajee
HTiiI
III 2 I'm Kiran

I!l..m ~ ~ H' f'crcrco; <Ji
gall baat 2 main kiran haan
~ ~
asee!!
gonon
l'!Ul'I'I
sahelee
uh
naheen
ghar
main
iththe
faRJo
~I
Kiran
namas!e. main. kiran haan. kee !Usee!! ashok ho?
oil
H
fu"ii
>lfR1'
n.rr
Kiran and Ashok meet at the Hindu temple. They have only met once in
the Panjabi class and are still unacquainted with one anoth,er.
<PI
<PI
Gujarati
Jeevan
H faRJo
0IH'l'I
U?
111<1
>lfR1' ~
re"a
aseen.d.onon
ikko
kalaas
vich
0IH'l'I
Vocabulary
he, she, it
mother (f.)
I
here
we
both
friend (f.)
he, she, that, they
no
house, home (m.)
both of us
same
class (f.)
in
..
Hello. I'm Kiran. Are you Ashok?
iiI. H llf80r <PI fi::.J Ha HT iil1J<'i, fHR'a F.RIH'I
llf80r
~I <P
Ashok
namas!e. haan jee, main ashok haan. ih mere maa!aa
abhiaas
Exercises
jee han, misaz sharmaa.
Hello. Yes, I'm Ashok. This is my mother, Mrs Sharma.
54
PANJABI
!!II. Listen and give appropriate responses

Kiran
OIl ~ lJfi:ioI
Ashok
Subject p ronouns
Pronouns are words used in the place of nouns, or naming words, which
Mrs Shanna
Kiran
u? Whaadaa kee haal hai?
Mrs Shanna
OIl i"a H'3' n'I fi!'>i
Language points
bolee baare
u? kee wseen ashok ho?
~ OIl <J'5
55
I'M KIRAN
Kiran
un? kee lere maalaa jee iththe han?
are used to re fer to persons, places or objects. In English the words I, you,
he, she, it, they and we are called subject pronouns. In Panjabi they are
very irnportan t as the endings of verbs change according to which subject
pronoun is being used, as will be seen in subsequent units.
Singular 5 ubject pronouns

a. ; j Ii' ~
b. U lJfi:ioIOIl ~ ?
c. rn:it' fi!'>i ~ un
I am Kiran .
Are you Ashok?
She is not here.
haan-main-kiran
ho-ashok-kee-luseen?
naheen-iththe-uh-han
First person
Ii'
main
Second person
loon
tuseen
you (informal)
you (formal)
feu
ih
uh
he/she/it
he/she/it
Thirdpers on
3. Crossword
Complete the crossword in English using clues taken from Dialogues I
and 2.
I)
2)
_____ 5
3) ~ i
ikko
4)
lJfi:ioI
kiran _ _ _ _ _ hai
jen _ _ _ _ _ hai
lJfi:ioI ~ ftFci
Ru un
kiran le ashok !lonon
n'I "i!'
<'i'H _ _ __ _
~ H'3'
n'I _____ un
kiran !Ie maalaa jee _ _ _ han
'2)
14 )
l' )
13 )
5)
'--
>JfJIf
aseen
we
Second person
!Useen
you
Thirdpers on
feu
ih
uh
they (near)
they (far)
f--
f---f--
'.
ashok !Ie maalaa jee !laa
naam _ _ _ _ _ hai
5) ~
First person
vich han
~ H'3'
Plural subject pronouns
Unlike in English, but as in all the Latin-based languages, persons, places

and objects (nouns) are grammatically either male or female in Panjabi.
Even though some objects have ambiguous status in the sense that some
people may refer to them as masculine and others as feminine, generally
all nouns, even those with ambiguous status, belong to either the
masculine 0 r feminine gender. Some nouns can be used for both male and
female, sue h as doctor. You will note in the vocabulary sections that we
have given (m.), (f.) and (m./f.) to represent the gender of a noun.
There is no gender distinction in the actual forms of subject pronouns,
only in the verb endings that refer to the subject pronoun. For example,
~ uh can refer to one man or woman or a group of either men or women.
There is no way of distinguishing, by looking only at the subject pronoun,
56
PANJABI
between he, she or they as the third person singular and plural forms are
interchangeable. It is the verb ending which will enable you to recognise
whether it is he, she or they being referred to. In Panjabi there is no
equivalent to the word it which implies gender neutrality in English.
Use of subject pronouns

1. feu ih and ~ uh literally mean he/she/it in the singular and they in
the plural. There is however a recognisable distinction between the use of
~ uh and feu ih. ~ uh refers to a person or persons absent or at a
distance, whereas feu ih is used when the person or persons are present
or in close proximity.
57
I'MKIRAN
similarity here between the singular, informal use of you, til and the plural
and singular formal, forms of you, vous (French) and usted (Spanish).
Tbepresent tense of
honhaa is, am and are
Subject pronouns are assigned appropriate forms of the verb to be. This
can siroilarly be compared with English: I am, you are, we are, he is, they
are. In Panjabi to be is expressed in the verb ~ honhaa which denotes
states 0 f being, conditions and existence. Note the following pairings of
subject pronouns with their assigned forms of ~ honhaa:
Singular
2. In English the words these and those are called demonstrative

pronouns. In Panjabi there are no specific equivalents. ~ uh and feu ih,
however, often translate into those and these, respectively, in many
situations.
First p erson
M<i
main haan
lam
Second person
-aU'
loon haiTI
lUseen ho
you are (informal)

you are (formal)
3. When talking about a singular person who is deserving of respect, such

as Kiran's mother in Dialogue 2, it is grammatically correct always to use
the plural form:
Third person
~u
ih hai
uh hai
he/she/it is
he/she/it is
fe"lI
rn:rr <In, ~ UIQ <lnl uh iththe naheen han, uh ghar han. She's
i!,j1'
ii
feuu
Plural
not here, she's at home.
First p erson
>lfRf <i
aseen haan
we are
~ uh and feu ih are used in the plural, in this case, which is reflected in
the use of the plural form of ~ (<In) honhaa (han) instead of the
Second person
2R't'ii
tusee!! ho
you are
singular U hai, even though only one mother (she) is being talked about.
Third person
feu
ihhan
uh han
they/these are
they/those are
4. In a similar way, the word ~ loon you is used informally and 2R't'
luseen is used in both formal speech as well as in the plural form. These
two forms of you require discretion in their application. ~ loon is used
between family members and close friends as well as when speaking to
younger people. It is also used in public speech where a degree of
informality is expected, such as when bargaining in the market or fixing the
price of a taxi fare. 2R't' luseen is a more formal and polite form which
is used between people of equal status and age as well as to people deserving respect due to age or social standing. However, when the distinction
between the formal and informal use is not obvious, it is always safest to
use the formal. Formal and informal speech is a crucial distinction in
Panjabi and will crop up many times as you progress through the course.
lf you have some knowledge of French or Spanish, you will note the
<In
~<ln
o.
Format uses of possessive adjectives

The form at uses of subject pronouns in Panjabi also extend to possessive
adjectives. In Unit I we saw how possessive adjectives are formed with
singular masculine and feminine objects. Possessive adjectives used to
describe people with respect or in a formal situation always take the
formal form, even when the person being described is in the singular. Note
the foil owing examples where the possessive adjectives and fonns of ~
honhaa , to be change according to the formal and informal contexts in
which they are used to describe singular people. In the following
examples, note how Heft meree (my) and ~ leree (your) change intO}ffl
mere an d~ luhaade.
58
Formal
PANJABI
I'M KIRAN
fl:.:J H6 H'a" iii U'1'i ih mere maa!aa jee han This is my
59
viaakhiaa
Commentary
mother.
Informal
fl:.:J H<iI H'a" U ih meree maataa hai This is my mother.
Formal
oil
~ H'a"
han?
Informal
iii fu"ii
U'1'i
kee tuhaade maataa jee iththe
Is your mother here?
oil TctI H'a" fu"ii
u?
kee !eree maa!aa iththe hai?
Is your
mother here?
These examples illustrate how the plural in Panjabi can be used to make
speech more formal. However, this is only one aspect of plural possessive
adjectives. in these examples the object here is itself not in the plural (and
the form of the adjective is being used in a formal situation). Unit 3 illustrates possessive adjectives with plural objects.
Word order
Note the word order of a simple Panjabi sentence - subject (person carrying out the action) first, verb ( the action) last and the rest in between. The
sentence I amfine is written in Panjabi as I fine am, where I is the subject
and am is the verb. For example: if l5'Ic! <P main theek haan I am fine
if
main
l5'Ic!
<P
theek
haan
fine
am
subject
verb
1. Where are you from?

The question of where someone comes from depends on who is doing the
asking and where the conversation is taking place. For example, a person
born in Panjab living in London will respond that they are from india if
the questioner is an English person. However, if the questioner is a fellow
Panjabi they may say the district or the village they are from. This
apparently simple question becomes even more complicated when asked
to diaspora South Asians. The response to the question Where are you
from? can give rise to replies such as Birmingham or New Jersey which
are quite legitimate responses. increasingly, the use of a religious identity

tagged onto a national identity is a fann of self-identification used in the
diaspora. Therefore, a young person responding to the question Who are

you? may reply a British Muslim or Canadian Sikh. It is important to
remember that Panjabi speakers come from a huge variety of national,
religious and social contexts and this is reflected in the many possibilities
that the questions Where do you comefrom? and Who are you? can evoke.
If you meet a Panjabi in England or North America, they are likely to live,
or at least have relatives, in three areas which are known as centres of
Panjabi settlement: Southall in England, Yuba City in California and
Vancouver in Canada. Each of these areas is often called Little Panjab.
Early Panjabi immigrants settled here and these places are still icons on
the global map of Panjabi travels, serving as temporary embarkation ports
10 would-be emigrants. These areas are distinctive for the range of shops
selling South Asian goods such as groceries, sweets, music, jewellery,
clothing and food. Apart from being a central shopping area they are the
focus of social, religious, political and cultural activities.
Word order in Panjabi is generally more flexible than it is in English. Note

how the meaning does not change though the word order does in the
following sentences:
tuhaadaa naam kee hai?
tuhaadaa kee naam hai?
Both examples mean What is your name? However, this does not mean
that any word order is allowed. The form of the verb ~ honhaa (U hail
is still at the end of the sentence in both examples.
2. Names
South Asian names can provide many clues about a person's sex,
background, country of origin and religious affiliation. These are often
very important pieces of information, particularly when engaging in
formal conversation.
Sikh names
Most Sikhs have three names: a personal name, a second name and a
surname. The second name, 'Singh' for men and 'Kaur' for women is in
60
PANJABI
fact a religious name and its addition is one of the main ways of
distinguishing men from women. Otherwise fIrst names can be the same
for men and women. Surnames vary from representing someone's caste or
the name of their village.
Hindu names
The Hindu naming system is similar to the English naming system. in that
most individuals have one or two personal names followed by a common
surname. First names are generally male and female specillc. A middle
name of Kumar or Chand is quite popular in North India and is a way of
distinguishing a Hindu Panjabi from a Sikh.
61
I'M KIR AN
b) H' >:'t iafciH _ _ (<J',

I' m also English.
e)
main vee angrez
c) oil llfi:ic! ifcrcm~

(hain. han)?
paniaabee
(haon. hail.
( 6', <rn) ?
kee ashok !e kiran

Are Ashok and Kiran Panjabi?
4. Word search
Three wo rds are hiddens in the box. These words are ~ j a rman
German. ~ palliaabee Panjabi and iafciH angr ez English . Find them
by looking horizontally across each of the rows.
Muslim names
CI
1"i
Muslim names tend to be less fIxed in the order of fIrst and second name.
There is also a tendency for women not to have the surnames of their
husbands. but j ust to have the word bibi or begum attached. which means
lady or woman. Muslim names tend to be a composite of Koranic names
with some local flavour. Male and female names are distinguished.
"
l../
CI
H'
>iI
"Fit
>if
ill
i1
CI'
fu
oil
Throughout the book you will come across a range of Sikh. Hindu and
Muslim names. Try and see if you can distinguish them. It is worth
remembering. however, that some names transcend religious boundaries,
and also that you may come across a lot of nicknames.
abhiaas
Exercises
1. Complete the box

han
ho
is
are
2. Say the sentences in Panjabi

a) Are you Ashok?; b) Are you Kiran?; c) I am Kiran.; d) He is Ashok.
3. Refer to the dialogue and choose the correct forms

of to be from the options given
a) oiI i ~
_ __ (U , a')? kee !oonjarman _ _ _ (ho. hainl?
Are you German ?
~t!"~otte?
is daa suaad kee hai?

WHAT DOES IT TASTE LIKE?
iii mr.iI fb'I
iil'i
oil
Jane
kee shalgam miththaa hai jaan kasailaa?

Are turnips sweet or bitter?
~
<10 ~ '!Ii!3' ~ ;;'I <101
uh miththe han !e bahu! sas!e vee han.
They are sweet and also very cheap.
how to ask questions

how to describe people and things
II aae'i;;81
0I6w
iG"
chotaa
bhindee
vaddaa
sha!gam
sastaa
miththaa
jaan
bahu!
~/
Mr Singh has taken the Panjabi class to SouthaU in order to give the
students an opportunity to hear and speak Panjabi in a rea! situation. They
are in a grocery shop.
ernn
firo oil
Henry
ih kee hai?
What is this?
firo cfcI50 ill

ih karelaa hai.
It (this) is a bitter gourd.
ernn
fuR
Henry
is gaa suaag kee hai?

fuR
Shopkeeper
C'
B"f"! oil
B"f"!
BmIH
5'61'o1:!'d
C'
7f;so
fH"o-
gukaangaar
Shopkeeper
~ ~I
<IRH'
ma'
abhiaas
iil'i
Jane
us sabzee gaa kee naam hai?

What is the name of that vegetable?
c. Rffim-f shalgam means turnip

d. 1=I'R'3'" saslaa means expensive
e. ~ suaag means taste
oil
?'i'H ~
Vocabulary
bitter gourd (type of vegetable) (m.)

it, this
of
taste (m.)
bitter (v.)
that
vegetable (f.)
small (v.)
okra (type of vegetable) (f.)
big, large (v.)
turnip (m.)
cheap (v.)
sweet (v.)
or
very
Exercises
1. True or false?
a.
C'
w orR5' 7
After reading the dia!ogue and/or listening to the audio tape, try to do the
is gaa suaag kaurhaa hai.

It has a bitter taste.
mr.iI
mmH <101
shabdaavalee
'I'I'Iffi
CO
E'iI'i!
gaD baat 1 ih kee hai?
mmH fi.i'cy ~
karelaa
is
gaa
suaad
kaurhaa/ kasailaa
us
sabzee
1'=
tzll What is this?

I!l -ai'5 llI'3' "I reu oft u 7
chotee sabzee bhindee hai !e vadde shalgam han.

The small vegetable is okra and the large ones are turnips.
nrn

the names of vegetables and Panjabi food
~ ~
5'ot'o'd
Shopkeeper
Shopkeeper
63
b.
fb'I bhindee means bitter

or6H' . karelaa means okra
True I False
True I False
True I False
True I False
True I False
64
PANJABI
i!l2. Mr Khan' s shopping list
ami>!
shalgam
turnip
fiB'!
bhindee
okra
-ar;m
gaajar
carrots
""!!
aaloo
poraroes
b'I
gobhee
cauliflower
tamaatar
tomatoes
malar
peas
t%l2 Which sweets are good?

!!11k l:r<r ~ Fccosl.,,; fHFO>II'e11J1i ~ un ?
gall baa! 2 kihrheeaan mithiaaeeaan
changeeaan han?
Mter visiting the grocery shop, Mr Singb takes Jane and Henry to the
Panjabi sweet shop (flifo>orel -.it ~ mithiaaee dee dukaa n). Panjabi
sweet shops are not like confectionery shops, because although they are
most famous for the sweet dishes that they sell, they also provide a range
of other dishes.
~ ~
~ ~I
fi.!RC<! fRlII
feu
Mr Singh
ih bahu1 changee mithiaaee !lee !lukaan haL

This is a very good sweer shop.
flifo>orel -.it
=?
Wi
fiffl for<J;i1",; fHRinIe'lor
Jane
iththe kihrheeaan mithiaaeeaan changeeaan han?

Which sweers are good here?
fi.!RC<! fRlII
"R'<I'Ir fHRinIe'lor ~ =
MrSingh
saareeaan mithiaaeeaan changeeaan han par laddoo

khaas suaa!lee han.
All of them are good, bur ladoos are especially tasty.
"" ~ :tI'R B"I'iI =1
"" ~ >ffdi =1
Henry
par laddoo maltinge han.

But ladoos are expensive.
Wi
cit
Jane
kee koee namkeen cheez hai?

Is there anything salty?
mrornnila
<Ji til, uti
birrer gourd
karelaa
65
Mr Khan is at the local grocery shop buying vegetables. Listen to the tape
to hear which items he has purchased from the shopping list that Mrs
Khan has given him. As the items are spoken on the tape, tick them off the
list. Don't worry if you can't recognise all the words.
or<!w
"RHR =1
Shopkeeper
haan jee, pakaurhe 1e samose han.

Yes, rhere are pakoras and samosas.
Wi
cit "RHR 0RI'6
Jane
kee samose karaare han?

Are the samosas spicy?
~CII'ne'd
<Ji til, "RHR
Shopkeeper
haan jee, samose bahu1 karaare han.

Yes, the samosas are very spicy.
0RI'6 =1
shabdaavalee
f'oro;tI
kihrhee
flifo>orel
mithiaaee
:tI'R
changee
!lukaan
il!!lhe
laddoo
khaas
B"I'iI
suaagee
""
par
maltingaa
koee
cheez
namkeen
haanjee
pakaurhaa
fiffl
~
~
~
.na
?'!OiIo
<Jitil
tlb
ffiblo
CRl'6'
samosaa
karaaraa
Vocabulary
which, which one (v.)

Panjabi sweet (f.)
good (v.)
shop (f.)
here
a type of Panjabi sweet (m.)
especially
tasty
but
expensive, costly (v.)
any
thing (f.)
salty
yes (polite)
a type of deep-fried pastry similar
to friners (m.)
triangular stuffed pastry (m.)
spicy (v.)
66
PANJABI
abhiaas
Exercises
1. Complete the table

fH'O'
fl!iUI
suaag
ClH6
u;o;
1lS
~ u;o;l
chaar karnre han ale go ghusal khaane han.

There are four rooms and two bathrooms.
llfiior
Ashok
>eiI;p ~
Charan Singh
kaurhaa
"iI'<I
Charan Singh
sweet
67
taste
\lCI
-airel iii 51
bagheechaa tanbaa hai par rasoee hotee hai.

The garden is long but the kitchen is small.
feu Ii';! 5, \lCI Ha 'effi 1lS ii<iI ~ fe'Oi ~ u;o;l
ih sachch hai, par mere bachche ale meree palOee
iththe khush han.
That's true, but my children and my wife are happy here.
2 . Arrange in correct word order

a) 5 ~ feu hai-gukaan-ih This is a shop.
b) 5 ~ ~ feu hai-changee-gukaan-ih This is a good shop.
c) feu "i!'I ~ 5 ~ ih-gee-mithiaaee-hai-gukaan This is a
sweet shop.
feu hai-gukaan-gee-mithiaaee-changee-ih
d) 5 ~ "i!'I ~
This is a good sweet shop.
tzl 3 This is our sitting room

1!I -ai'5 l:I'3" ::1 fu<J w.tl ~ ~
gall baat 3 ih saadee baithak hai
Mr Singh has taken his students to visit his house and is showing them
around.
~ fl!iUI
Charan Singh
feu "R'lI't
~ 51 >-r.: 0RI?i', ""
.m H<l'tr fuN u;o;
ih saadee baithak hai. maaf kamaa, har paase

mereeaan kitaabaan han.
This is our siUing room. Sorry. my books are
everywhere.
-anm
~ 1IRI
Henry
luhaadaa ghar vaddaa hai. paurheeaan chaurheeaan han.
>!is' 5 1 iiliII' ~ u;o;l
Your house is big. The stairs are wide.
im
!Wi mrc!
Jane
kinne kamre han?
u;o;
How many rooms are there?
Pli aae'<i8l
~
shabdaavalee
baithak
maafkamaa
har paase
paurheeaan
chaurhaa
karnraa
kinne
&husal khaanaa
ba&heechaa
lanbaa
-airel
rasoee
>-r.: 0RI?i'
""
.m
iiliII'
b
0()icI'
FoR<
:i! Rd):(w
~
Vocabulary
silting room (f.)
sorry
everywhere
stairs (f.)
wide (v.)
room (m.)
how many
bathroom (m.)
garden (m.)
long (v.)
kitchen (f.)
68
PANJABI
-a
oR' ?
1'oro;r i:5? (m.)
OI!I'R
sachch
bachche
pa!nee
khush
bolee baare
true , truth (v.)

children (m.)
wife (f.)
happy
Language points
Interrogative words
Interrogative words change sentences into questions. In Panjabi interrogative words generally begin with the letter a k and may appear at the
beginning of the sentence or within the sentence.
~
kaunh
who
oil
kee
what
f<;ffl
kiththe
where
kiUll
why
fiR
kive!!
how
oR'
kaJ!oll
when
foro;r
kihrhaa
which'
fcr.:r;ft
kihrhee
which'
*Note that these two examples of which only apply to singular objects.
The endings of f<;ro;p kihrhaa and f\;ro;iI kihrhee change according to

the nature of the noun to which it is referring: whether it is singular or
plural, or masculine or feminine.
foffl-a
f\;ro;iI
l'!>r.iI 7 (f.)
kalaas kaJ!oll hai?

kihrhaa phal? (m.)
kihrhee sabzee? (f.)
When is the class?

Which fruit?
Which vegetable?
Nouns
In Panjabi. nouns are affected by gender. either masculine or feminine.
and number. either singular or plural. Every noun in Panjabi. even an
inanimate object, is assigned a masculine or feminine gender and has
a singular or plural numerical character. The process of assignment
of gender to nouns is quite arbitrary. There are no obvious reasons,
for example. why ~ kursee chair is feminine and liE mez table
is masculine. However, in logical tenns, all nouns which represent
males are masculine and those which represent females are feminine.
For example. l:tor mundaa boy is masculine and ~ kurhee girl is
feminine.
There are no steadfast rules about the distinction of the gender of

inanimate objects. In Panjabi this is a matter of convention. whereby
the gender of a noun is often simply understood. There is a general
code that nouns ending in -e'I (ee) are feminine and nouns ending in "" (aa)
are masculine. such as B;iO!' larhkaa boy and t'Sl!ciI larhkee girl.
Exceptions to this. however. are plentiful. with words such as. <l'IiiI,
haathee (elephant) masculine.}j, maan (mother) feminine and }i'6',
maalaa (necklace) feminine all having endings which counter this
general code. So be careful! You will learn more about nouns as you go
along.
Type 1: Variable nouns

Variable nouns are those which change from the singular form when they
are plural.
Masculiue
Examples:
~~-a?
~oiI-a?
~
7
~ fu"'I ~
~m-a?
69
-a ?
uh kaunh hai?
uh kee hai?
uh kiththe hai?
uh iththe kiUll hai?
uh kivell hai?
Who is helshe?
What is that?
Where is shelhe?
Why is he/she here ?
How is she/he?
Singular
Plural
l:tor
t1i
mundaa
munde
boy
boys
Singular
Plural
ri
chaachaa
chaache
uncle
uncles
70
PANJABI
Feminine
Singular
Plural
Singular
Plural
~
~
kurhee
kurheeaan
girl
girls
lIukaan
lIukaanaan
shop
shops
E"I""
71
Some nouns are significantly different from their masculine/feminine

counterparts:
11<1'
bharaa
brother
Wi!
bhainh
sister
tlB'
mundaa
boy
kurhee
girl
It.!-
banllaa
man
janaanee
woman
Type 2: Invariable nouns

Invariable nouns are those which do not change fonns from the singular
to the plural.
Words borrowed from English are also classified in tenns of gender and
Masculine
are pluralised according to the pattern of Panjabi nouns. For example:
Singular
Plural
lIf'eH't
lIf'eH't
aagrnee
aa.dmee
man
men
Singular
Plural
<fcI
<fcI
hathth
hathth
hand
hands
Some other examples of invariable nouns:
irn
motee
pearl
necklace
nose
river
haar
noll
Nouns borrowed from English
Masculine
plural
singular
~
kairnraa
camera
kairnre
cameras
taileefon
telephone
taileefon
telephones
Feminine
lIariaa
Note that generally all feminine nouns are variable, that is feminine nouns
change from the singular to the plural fonn.
plural
singular
u5z
palet
plate
paletaan
'plates
il'Fm
painsal
pencil
iI'R8I
painsalaan
pencils
Adjustable nouns
In Panjabi the same noun can often be used to represent both genders by
simply changing the ending to express their femininity or masculinity.
These types of nouns are irregular, though the pattern of endings that they
take can be distinctly identified.
Masculine
O'M'
}f;jj
chaachaa
pu!!ar
ooth
naukar
baal
raajaa
mochee
uncle
son
male camel
male servant
male child
king
male cobbler
Feminine
= ;r.iI
=
=
:;;;
=
=
=
chaachee
pu!!aree
th5iI oothnhee
~ naukaraanhee
~ baalrhee
0'iI
raanhee
~
mochanh
Y'a"a't
paternal aunt
daughter
f emale camel
maid
f emale child
queen
female cobbler
Similarly, the plural ofJliil:r samosaa (samosa) is Jli:iR samose in Panjabi

and samosas in English.
Adjectives
An adjective is a word that gives descriptive infonnation about a
noun, pronoun or another adjective. Generally, adjectives come before
the noun and after the pronoun. Similar to nouns, adjectives are also
either masculine or feminine and are used in singular and plural fonns,
reflecting the gender and numerical traits of the nouns that they
are describing. There are two types of simple adjectives, variable and
invariable.
72
PANJABI
Variable adjectives
l;!B
Jl'i:"
l;!B~
khu sh larhkaa
happy boy
l;!B~
khush larhke
happy boys
khush larhkee
happy girl
khush larhkeeaan
happy girls
Masculine singular
1!1S' ~
vaddaa larhkaa
big boy
l;!B
Masculine plural
~~
vadde larhke
big boys
l;!B~
Feminine singular
~=or'!
vaddee larhkee
big girl
Feminine plural
~~
vaddeeaan larhkeeaan big girls
When the noun is the same for both genders and singular/plural forms, it
is the variable adjective and/or the verb which will indicate the numerical
and gender characteristics of the noun.

Examples:
Singular
Plural
feu 1!1S' >fC!'l'i -I ih vaddaa makaan hai This is a big house.

feu ~ >fC!'l'i un ih vadde makaan han These are big
houses.
Variable adjectives also indicate the gender characteristic of the noun.
feu 1!1S' Hr.! -I ih vaddaa mez (m.) hai This is a big table. (m.)
feu ~ ~ -I ih vaddee kursee (f.) hai This is a big chair. (f.)
There are some exceptions regarding adjectives of this type. Some
adjectives do not change their form according to the noun 's gender
and number associations, despite the fact that they end in 1:!1 ee or "I' aa
such as:
vadhiaa
superior
gulaabee
pink
You need to learn such exceptions as you go along.
red
happy
clean
laal
khu sh
saaf
l'I'H
Variable adjectives end in "I' aa for the masculine and 1:!1 ee for the
feminine such as 1!1S' vaddaa (masculine) and ~ vaddee (feminine)
big. They inflect (i.e. change their endings) with the number and the
gender of the noun.
73
WHAT DOE S IT TASTE LIKE?
=or'!
The simple verb

Verbs indicate activity and are also called action words. Throughout the
book the Panj abi verb is referred to in the infinitive form (i.e. the form to).
The root of the verb plus the ending -~ nhaa or the ending -1'" naa form
the infinitive. Here are some common examples of verbs in the infinitive,
or simple form
Root
Infinitive fo rm (= 'to - -')
Ending
likhnh aa
to write
fmf
likh
-~
nhaa
lIenh aa
to give
lie
-~
nhaa
>I'i!'
khaanh aa
/0
-~
nhaa
aaunhaa
'"~
khaa
aau
-~
nhaa
bolnh aa
ire
bol
-~
nhaa
kahinh aa
to come
to speak
10 say
10 live, slay
to do
<mJ
kahi
-~
nhaa
<Jfu
rahi
-~
nhaa
OR!
kar
-1'"
naa
rahinhaa
OR!""
karn aa
eat
The simple ve rb is also used as a form of command particularly related to

actions in the near future.
Examples:
Invariable adjectives
jalllee aaunhaa
come back quickly
Invariable adjectives do not change according to the nouns that they

specify and do not end with "I' aa or 1:!1 ee, such as:
haulee bolnhaa
speak softly
chiththee likhnhaa
write a letter
74
PANJABI
The possessive particle? daa
0/
'"
""'"
.!Iaa
.!Ie
.!lee
.!Ieeaan
In Panjabi these kinds of words come after the noun and are therefore
called postpositions. This is also the second function of? lIaa in that it
dictates word order and acts as a grammatical point determining the
endings of the nouns and adjectives associated with the possession.
tere
your (informal)
!U/laade
your (formal)
3rd person
masculine singular
masculine plural
feminine singular
feminine plural
Words such as of, in, to or from are called prepositions in English and signify place or position. These words come before the noun and are therefore called prepositions.
ih .!Ie/is .!Ie
his/her
ibnaan .!Ie
his/her (formal)
their
uh .!Ie/us .!Ie
his/her
uhnaan .!Ie
his/her (fonnal)
their
Possessive adjectives with plural feminine objects

1st person
1=
mereeaan
my
saadeeaan.
our
!ereeaan
your (infonnal)
your (fonnal)
!Uhaadeeaan
lrurhee .!Ieeaan painsalaan
aa.!lmee .!lee .!Iukaan
meree bhainh .!Iaa karnraa
the girl's pencils

the man's shop
my sister's room
3rd person
fe>! ""'"
Possessive adjectives with plural objects

In Unit I you learned about possessive adjectives with singular objects.
When objects being possessed are plural. the endings of possessive
adjectives change accordingly. The following tables illustrate the use of
the possessive adjective with plural objects.
Possessive adjectives with plural masculine objects

1st person
mere
saade
my
our
2nd person
Examples:
I:
75
2nd person
In Panjabi. possession is expressed through the particle ? In English

possession is not usually expressed using the word of, for example. the
pencil of the girl. would usually be written the girl's pencil. The particle
? lIaa is therefore similar to the apostrophe s in English as it establishes
the relationship between possessions. The particle? lIaa of should agree
with the gender and number of the object being possessed. Generally. it
takes the following forms:
?
~
""'"
ih .!Ieeaan lis .!Ieeaan

ihnaan geeaan
his/her
uh .!Ieeaanl us .!Ieeaan
his/her
uhnaan. geeaan
his/her (fonnal)
their
mere bachche
!Uhaadeeaan kitaabaan
uhnaan .!Ieeaan
mithiaaeeaan.
saade larhke
his/her (fonnal)
their
my children
your books
their sweets
our sons
PANJABI
76
I!I Numbers
In Dialogue 3, you were introduced to the numbers U'6 chaar and ~ 110.
The following is the list of numbers from 1-20. The topic vocabulary list
at the end of the book gives the remaining numbers up to 100.
II
fiIrora1
giaaraan
'II'lf
baar-haan
ler-haon
'9
12
13
14
panj
''1
15
che
,~
16
san
17
athth
",1:
iii'
naun
gas
fE'oI
ikk
go
!inn
'9
2
3
4
U'6
chaar
'I
6
7
tIr!
i
lh
1:
..rn
'1
'0
10
viaakhiaa
1. The vegetable seller l'!ir.tI
"
''1
mr
t/l!<P
mr
chaud-haon
pa!!l!araon
solhaan
salOar-haon
18
~
llfl5'q'
,t
19
fl'iI
unnee
'10
20
veeh
athaar-haon
Commentary
<:'5'
sabzee vaalaa
WHAT DOES IT TASTE UKE?
77
In Panjab, fresh seasonal vegetables are available in abundance. The land

is rich and the climate is tropical. Vegetables can generally be bought
from a variety of sources. A street hawker carrying vegetables in his handpulled cart will make his daily rounds in the streets, shouting the names
of vegetables at the top of his lungs in a manner that signals his presence
more than does the content of his wares. Vegetables can also be bought
from the market (often called a >iii mandee or even H'Cfore maarket)
where dozens of greengrocery stalls and shops are situated next to each
other. These stalls offer a wide variety of fresh vegetables (~
sabzeeaan) according to the season. In Panjab, visiting the market, especially in the evenings, is more than just for shopping; it is also a social and
entertaining experience. Prices are not displayed so that customers have
to make enquiries to shopkeepers, comparing prices of different stalls and
bargaining as they go along. An accepted and often time-consuming part
of shopping in Panjab is bargaining. Once a bargain has been made, the
shopkeeper uses his age-old technique of weighing the goods between
two pans on his scale. Most shopkeepers are efficient in mentally calculating the price of the weighed goods and are keen to chat, pointing out the
low prices of other vegetables on offer and generally to praise their goods.
This is a contrast to shopping for vegetables in western countries which is
usually impersonal and mechartical.
2_ The Panjabi sweet shop ~ '" ~

mithiaaee dee dukaan
Sweet shops are an integral part of shopping areas catering for South
Asian commurtities in England, America, Canada and other parts of the
world. These sweet shops are not like confectionery shops or bakeries, as
they are often attached to take-away restaurants and also offer a range
of spicy snacks and rtibbles. It is customary for most South Asians to
exchange boxes of sweets among ftiends and family on happy occasions.
These can range from weddings and birthdays to festivals. Sweet shops,
therefore, remain busy throughout the year. There is an enormous variety
of sweets from different regions of the Indian sub-continent. Most sweet
shops in the diaspora offer about fifty of the more common types of sweets
and savoury dishes. Here is a list of some of the more popular items.
Sweets
'Il"t
laddoo
a sweet round ball, generally orange in colour,

consisting of tiny particles made of gram flour
78
PANJABI
a round soft brown ball made of milk powder soaked in

gulaab jaamanb a sweet syrup
a) fuu ~ ___ UI
>reiliI
c) fuu fh'I
~ iI'H\!!
a bar of milk powder, similar to fudge, which is cut into

diamond and rectangular shapes and is also found in a
variety of colours such as white, pink and green
barfee
~
whirls of batter, yellow-orange in colour, which are

soaked in a sweet syrup
jalebeeaan
'61'1~
79
ih karelaa ___ hai. This biller gourd is small.
b) fuu ~ ___ UI ih karelaa ___ hai. This biller gourd is large.

UI
ih bhindee _ _ _ hai.
This okra is small.
d) fuu fh'I
UI
e) fuu _
___ UI
ih bhindee
hai. This okra is large.
ih shalgam _ __ hai. This turnip is small.
I) fuu mm>i _ _ _ UI
ih shalgam _ _ _ hai.
This turnip is large.
sweet round balls made of cheese soaked in a clear

sweet syrup
ras guile
'61'1 ~
ras malaaee
sweet round balls made of cheese soaked in thick,

sweet milk
a sweet dish made from grated carrots
gajrelaa
~
sweet round balls made from ground lentils and gram

flour
pinneeaan
Savouries
1!12. Who has ordered what?

Mr Singh, Jane and Henry have each ordered several food items. Listen to
the tape and tick the box to show who has ordered what.
There are about a dozen salty dishes which are available from sweet
shops. These are the most common ones:
l.IiS
pakaurhe
lOOl
samose
seasoped and spiced vegetables covered in a gram flour

batter which are deep fried in oil
deep-fried triangular pastries filled with boiled peas,
potatoes and sometimes minced meat
abhiaas
Exercises
1. Choose the appropriate adjectives

Bitter gourd and turnip are masculine and okra is feminine.
small
Ro
gobhee
Mr Singh
Jane
Henry
3. Who am I?
After reading the commentary section, try to guess who I am from the
descriptions given below.
a) I am sweet, full of syrup, round and dark brown in colour.
motaa
motee
b) I am sweet like fudge, in diamond and rectangular shapes and come in

a variety of different colours such as white, pink and green.
vaddaa
vaddee
c) I am a very popular savoury snack, triangular in shape, covered in

pastry, ftIled with potatoes and peas, and deep fried .
big
?!is'
samosaa laddoo pakaurhe ras malaaee bhindee
PANJABI
80
d) I am like a fritter, dipped in a batter of gram flour mixture, and deep

fried. My core ingredients are usually cauliflower, potatoes and aubergine.
4. Insert the correct possessive adjectives

(Remember that the forms of possessive adjectives change not only in
terms of who is in possession of the object, but also by the gender and
number of the object being possessed.)
samose suaa,dee han.
Their samosas are
mIi foI'ii <m?
c. -
~ <RI
larhke kiththe han?
Where are my sons?
trii <m kilaaball!! har paase han. Our books are

everywhere.
d. -
fHflI"""e1JJfl m
"IfliIJJfl <ml
mithiaaeeOll!! sabh Ion

chll!lgeeall!! han.
barhee khushee dee

gaD hail
That's very good news!
tasty.
b. -
lI3l~~ome!
Your (formal) sweets

are the best!
how to introduce yourself and others

how to ask and answer questions about work
how to ask and respond to questions about place of origin
how to talk about your family
how to describe actions and objects in the present
IZll What do you do?
I!hm 1:1'<f " gl'I'f cit orcR U 7

gall baat 1 tuseen kee karde ho?
Dr Singh and Mrs Sharma are travelling on a train going from
Binningham to London. They are meeting for the fIrst time.
fHl:rn
lreH'
Mrs Sharma
Il'I JIflmI oil feu Jl're

~ ?
sal sree akaa!. kee ih seet khaalee hai?
Hello. Is this seat vacant?

"iI'OfC"6
friuI
Dr Singh .
Il'I JIflmI <P iii m
~I
oil
Mrs Sharma
~I ~ iill
sal sree akaal. hall!! jee, khaalee hai. baitho jee.

Hello. Yes , it's vacant. Please sit down.
He- "I'i'H fHl:rn
lreH' ~I "I'RR'C!
JI'fua, ~
"I'i'H ~ I
dhll!lDvaa!l. meraa naam misaz sharmaa hai. sar!laar

saahib tuhaadaa kee naam hai?
Thank you. My name is Mrs Sharma. Sardar Sahib,
what is your name?
82
PANJABI
Ha'
?'i'H 'lfil'hr
IT<IH' ?
fRlII
fHRr.!
Dr Singh
IT<IH'
Mrs Sharma
~ ,;UH!'<i8l
~
)ffl'l
Ru
<roT
lOll
rfurlror
t1t!'>r
fti'm
~ ~I ~
~ ~I
shabdaavalee
oiIn'tr
3'
'R'f'<:ra
Ru
H' oiIn'tr 3' ~I oil ~

-
naheen jee. main gillee !on haan.

No. /' m from Delhi.
~
~
'R<r.!'i3
mI H' fti'm 3' ~I
khaalee
baithnhaa
baitho jee
sar!laar saahib
daaktar
adhiaapkaa
barmingham
rahinhaa
iffim
H'
main vee banningham vich rahindaa haan. main keeneeaa Ion haan. kee !Useen panjaab Ion ho?
I live in Birmingham too. I am from Kenya. Are you
from Panjab?
seet
~t
main adhi aapkaa haan ale main barmingham vich

rahindee haan. !Useen 1ciththe rahin!le ho?
I am a teacher and I live in Birmingham. Wh ere do
you live?
H' ~
fHRr.!
oil ORR
meraa naam ajeel singh hai. main daaktar haan. !Useen

kee kar!le ho, misaz sharmaa ?
My name is Ajeet Singh. /' m a doctor. What do you
do , Mrs Sharma?
t1t!'>r 3' ii ?
Dr Singh
~ ~I ~
keeneeaa
panjaab
!lillee
Vocabulary
seat (f.)
empty, vacant
to sit
please sit down (formal)
M,. (see Commentary)
doctor (mJf.)
teacher (f.)
Birmingham (m.)
to slay, 10 live
Kenya (m.)
from
Panjab (m.)
Delhi (f.)
83
THAT'S VERY GOOD NEWSI
abhiaas
H' rfurlror ~
fcffl cf;ffi ii ?
Mrs Sharma
H'
UI
Exercises
following exercises
1. Fill in the blanks

Following the first example, fill in the blanks with the Panjabi phrases
according to the English ones given to you. You may borrow phrases from
the dialogue.
a) H' ~ ~
b)
c)
d)
main daaktar haan

I am a doctor.
Is this seat vacant?
r m a teacher.
What do you (formal) do?
Yes, it is.

a) I live in Birmingham too.
~H'~~~
vee main barmin....gham rahindaa hoan

b) I am from Delhi. fti'm3' H' ~ !lillee Ion main haan
cJ What do you do ? ~ ii ORR oil? !Useen ho kar!le kee ?
3. Remarks and responses

The following conversation is between two unacquainted passengers on a
train. Put the responses of Passenger B into order according to Passenger
Ns remarks by using the correct corresponding number.
Passenger B
Passenger A
1 oil fu<J ~ ~ ;:r;tt U ?

kee ih taren landan jaandee hai?
a main leedz rahin!!aa haan
2 ~ ~ cf;ffi ii ?
!Useen .1ciththe rahinde ho?
b main adhiaapkaa haan
3 ~ oil aYH ORR ii ?

!Useen kee kanm karde ho?
c haan, ih taren landan jaandee hai
4 oil ~ f<M iitre ii ?

kee !Useen hindee bolde ho?
d main panjaab Ion haan
H' l'furn
~~
H' rfurlror
~.
fu<J
~ ~
H' t1t!'>r 3'
;:r;tt U
5 oil ~ ~ 3' ii ~ fti'm 3' ii ? H' f<M ~ t1M..n iRI? ~

e main hindee ale panjaabee
kee !Useen panjaab Ion ho joan
boldaa haan
!!illee Ion ho?
84
PANJABI
THAT'S VERY GOOD NEWS!

~1IIHO!H
t%l2 That's very good news!
I!l am l:I'a"
~ 'SI'";i\ ~ ttl
am
"U I
gall baat 2 barhee khushee dee gall hail

While Dr Singh and Mrs Sharma chat on the train going from
Birmingham to London, Fatima Khan boards the train at Coventry. Mrs
Sharma and Fatima Khan know each other. Fatima Khan addresses Mrs
Sharma by her fIrst name, Sita.
~ ~I
Fatima Khan
~RaH'
Sita Sharma
~~
Fatima Khan
~RaH'
Sita Sharma
~~
....n
RaH'
Sita Sharma
asslaam alaikam.
Hello.
~~
>:'5orH
Fatima Khan
vaalaikam asslaam.
Hello.
~ fi:i>q, fu<J
~ fi:i>q ;:J?;I
HciI .rom ~ ~ il ~, feu
daaktar singh, ili meree sahelee faalimaa khaan hai.

faalimaa, ili daaktar singh han.
Dr Singh, this is my friend Fatima Khan. Fatima, this
is Dr Singh.
~I
(Sita addresses Fatima.)

~, 1IfaR! <!liS ~ ~ t!'I.r ~ ~ ~ ;:J?;I
~l'i'5~~1
Sita Sharma
faa!imaa, agle hafle nOOll sakool geeaan chutteeaan

shuroo hundeeaan han. bachchiaan naal barmingham
aaunhaa.
School holidays start next week. Come with the
children to Birmingham.
knI;r~1
Fatima Khan
Iil I:I.. e'<:81
CI'ffiI f>:;j ~ ;:J?;I
saare theek han. mistar khaan maujaan karge han.

saadaa betaa ale betee kaalaj vich parhhge han.
Everyone is fine. Mr Khan is enjoying life. Our son
and daughter are studying at college.
(Sita Sharma introduces Dr Singh and Fatima Khan to one another.)
fHl:r.::t
Dr Singh
i ?
namasle see!aa. !eree siha! kiven hai?

Hello Sita. How's your health?
~ , HciI f>roa" ~ ~ ;s'Ior il ~I
namasle! meree silia! hunh bilkul theek hai.
miharbaanee.
Hello! My health is perfectly fine now. Thank you.
~ ;it iIi'8 i ,
barhee khushee gee gall hai!
That's very good news!
~ \Ia"ire t!' cit <m i ?
!ere parvaar gaa kee haal hai?
How is your family?
JI'6 ;s'Ior ;:J?;I f\.!JreQ ~ Ht ORR ;:J?;I ~ ;reo rif
>3iI
Fatima Khan
3c't f>roa"
85
Ht
oran'
;reo
>3iI
CI'ffiI
tG!""
.rom
~
<r.:a"'
~~
~
inshaa allaa.
We'll try. [literally: If God wishes]
shabdaavalee
barhee
khushee
gall
silia!
hunh
bilkul
saare
maujaankarnaa
betaa
betee
kaalaj
parhbnaa
sahelee
aglaa
haf!aa
shuroo honhaa
sakool
chutteeaan
Vocabulary
very (v.)
good (f.) (lit. happiness)
matter, news (f.)
health (f.)
now
absolutely, perfectly
everyone, all (v.)
to enjoy
son (m.)
daughter (f.)
college (m.)
to read, to study
friend (f.)
next
week (m.)
to start, to begin
school (m.)
holidays (f.)
88
PANJABI
The example of 0RIl'i' shows the manner in which verb roots ending with
89
Plural
consonants are fonned in the simple present tense. However, those roots
which end in vowels follow a slightly different pattern. The nasal consonant is placed between the root and the present tense endings. Here, the
verb ~ peenhaa (to drink) is used to illustrate. Note that the biwlee .
follows the bihaaree 1 ee of ~ peenhaa.
Simple verb: ~ peenhaa to drink. Verb root: til pee:
subject + (object, where appropriate) + simple present + auxiliary =
present tense
H' main / (subject) (1st person, singular feminine) + ~ paanhee water

(object) + tiI'iI peewlee drink (present of to drink) + <:P haan am (auxiliary) (1st person singular) = H' ~ tiI'iI <:P main paanhee peewlee
Masculine
rRf
Feminine
liffi <:P
rRf
~~liffi~
~ ~
fuu/~ ~
liffi Wi
ib/uh paanhee peende

han
Feminine
H'~~<:P
H'
main paanhee peendaa

ha,,!!
main paanhee peendee

ha,,!!
tiI'iI <:P
i~~u
loon paanhee peendaa hain
loon paanhee peendee

hain
fuu/~~~e
fuu/~ ~
ih/uh paanhee peendaa hai
ih/uh paanhee peendee

hai
tiI'iI
you drink water
fuu/~ ~
til'l!'tr
they drink water
Wi
ih/uh paanhee peendeea"!!

han
main sochl!ee ha,,!!

bachche khed!!e han
aseen ur!!oo bol!!eea"!! haan
/ think
the children play
we speak Urdu
Subject-verb agreement
Masculine
til'l!'tr
Here are a few more examples of other verbs in the simple present:
rRf~~<:P
we drink water
luseen paanhee peende (Useen paanhee peendeeaan

ho
ho
~~Wi
Singular
til'l!'tr <:P
aseen paanhee peendeea,,!!

ha,,!!
H' R;r.iI <:P
haan / drink water.
aseen paanhee peende

ha,,!!
u
tiI'iI e
/ drink water
you drink water
he, she, it
drinks water
The verb in a sentence must agree with the gender and number of its
subject (with a few exceptions in the past tense which will be discussed in
Unit 10). If the subject is feminine and singular, then the verb must also
be feminine and singular. As you should have noticed in the previous
section on the simple present tense, there are two verbs: one is the main
verb which indicates the action and the other is the auxiliary verb (a form
of ~ to be). The main verb changes according to the gender and number
of the subject, and the auxiliary verb must also agree with the subject but
only changes according to the person (I st -/, 2nd - you, 3rd - they) of the
subject.
In the following examples note how the verbs (main and auxiliary) are in
agreement with the subject.
H'
nr.!1
<:P
main
jaandee
ha,,!!
Wi
uh
jaande
han
~
~
!Useen
jaande
ho
Wi
munde
jaande
han
90
PANJABI
Notice that the main verb and the auxiliary verb agree with one another in
the singular and plural aspect of the subject. This is an essential element
of forming sentences in Panjabi, and it should therefore be understood
how verbs change accordingly.
Simple postpositions
You will recall from Unit 3 that the particle? lIaa, in addition to showing possession, can be used as a postposition. Simple postpositions can be
used to denote a number of different senses. In Panjabi the most common
simple postpositions are as follows :
m,Em
3'
~
~
1m, ~m!
vich, ge vich
ton
Ie
tak
naal, ge naal
noon
tl;ra 3'
Hil~
1l/'n~
fi!'>t ~
~1m
0!5H m!
~~
!;I'H~
mezle
ajj lak
iththe !ok
parvaar naal
kalam naal
amreekaa noon
shaam noon
91
do not reveal this because they are either invariable or are feminine in
gender (see Unit 3). All nouns before a postposition, whether or not in a
changed form, take on the oblique case. Generally, proper nouns such as
names of people and places are not inflected by the postposition which
follows them. In addition, masculine and feminine nouns have noticeably
different formations in the oblique. You will note that feminine nouns in
the singular and plural do not change in the oblique. Only masculine
nouns change form when followed by postpositions.
Masculine singular
from
on
until, up to
with
to
baagh vich
panjaab Ion
direct
in, inside
iii;r
O!H<I'
oblique
mundaa
ghorhaa
karnraa
~~
boy
horse
room
mundenoon
ghorhe Ie
karnre vich
~~
-am
to the boy
on the horse
in the room
Masculine plural
Here are some simple examples of the uses of postpositions:
lI'Bm
in the garden
fromPanjab
on the table
until today
up to here
with the family
with a pen
direct
iIS
ij
-a
Panjabi nouns can be used in three different cases (modes of expression):

the vocative, direct, and oblique. Each has its own corresponding way of
formation. The vocative case reflects direct speech and will be dealt with
in Unit 8. Direct nouns only change according to gender and number, as
has been explained in Unit 3, and are not affected by any postposition. In
contrast, the oblique case refers to the changes that some nouns undergo
when affected by postpositions. In the examples of nouns with
postpositions, all of the nouns are in the oblique case, though their forms
munde boys
~~
ghorhe horses 'iiij';J.d
karnre rooms orHfur m
mundiaan noon
ghorhiaan Ie
kamriaan vich
to the boys
on the horses
in the rooms
Feminine singular
direct
to America
in the evening
Nouns in the oblique
oblique
oblique
lasveer
kurhee
picture '3'W:la
girl
or;iI ~
janaanee
lady
ffiwii 3'
lasveer vich
kurhee noon
janaanee Ion
in the picture
to the girl
from the lady
Feminine plural
direct
oblique
~ tasveeraan pictures ~
kurheeaan girls
~ janaanee
aan
ladies
~~
~
3'
tasveeraan in the pictures

vich
kurheeaan to the girls
noon
janaaneeaan from the ladies
lon
92
PANJABI
Adjectives in the oblique

Adjectives must agree with the nouns they describe. Therefore, it is only
logical that adjectives should also change form when attached to a noun
followed by a postposition. In a similar manner to the oblique forms of
nouns, adjectives are inflected in the oblique case, in addition to carrying
the feminine or masculine, singular or plural nature of the nouns which
they qualify. When adjectives are attached to oblique nouns, they also
become oblique. Invariable adjectives, however, do not change. Notice the
pattern of inflection of the adjectives in the following examples:
Oblique
Direct
tfis< ic:'
vaddaa betaa
Q ~
vadde bete
-.r.tI ire'!
vaddee betee
-.r.n.r ;retr
vaddeeaan
beteeaan
8'l'!
r.n
elder son
elder sons
lli'B1>lfi
laal gaddeeaan
to the elder son
~8k>lf'~
to the elder sons

vaddiaan betiaan noon
elder daughter -.r.tI ire'! 1'<'5
with the elder
vaddee betee naal
daughter
elder daughters
;retr 1'<'5
with the elder
daughters
vaddeeaan beteeaan
naal
-.r.n.r
red car
laal gaddee
8'l'!
Q~~
vadde bete noon
8'l'!
r.n m
in the red car
laal gaddee vich
red cars
8'l'!~m
in the red cars
laal gaddeeaan vich
93
THAT'S VERY GOOD NEWSI
In the 1960s in Britain a Panjabi man would almost defmitely be working

In a factory or foundry in labouring or semi-skilled occupations. This is in
contrast to migration to America in the 1960s where, due to the operation
of quotas, only professionals such as doctors and engineers were allowed
entry from the Indian sub-continent.
As communities have settled and the old industrial manufacturing sector
has gone into decline, Panjabis are now found in all walks of life in Britain
and North America. However, there is a concentration in certain parts of
the economy, particularly in traditional professions such as law, medicine
and engineering as well as self-employment. A large number of Panjabis
are also involved in business ventures in textiles, food processing and
retailing, the most popular niche markets. At the same time there is an
increasing diversity of occupational and class profiles of Panjabis, from
the long-term unemployed to multimillionaires.
abhiaas
Exercises
1. True or false?
a.~
means health
means alright
means doctor
means fine
siba!
billcul
c. "IIi:P>rucr adhiaapakaa
khushee
d. J;!RI
b.~
True I False
True I False
True I False
True I False
2. Who made the statements?

Reread the dialogues, then look at the following:
viaakhiaa
Commentary
Employment and the Panjabi diaspora

There has been a long history of labour migration from Panjab to all parts
of the world. The descendants of officers in the British Indian police force
formed the core of the community in Malaysia and the Philippines, while
political migrants at the beginning of the twentieth century formed the
core of the old community in Vancouver, Canada. In Britain, migration
occurred after World War IT and was primarily into the old industrial
heartlands of the Midlands and the North, with a sizeable group also
working in London. From a predominantly rural background to urban
Britain, Panjabi men went from tilling the land to toiling on factory floors.
a) feu ;rare'CI fRIll ""'I ib daaktar singh han. This is Doctor Singh.
b) ~ ~ Ht -.r<re ""'I mistar khaan maujaan kar!!e han.
Mr Khan is enjoying life.
c) H' -.;1 -.rcrf'HlIIH ~ .rl main vee barmin...gham rahindaa haan.
I live in Birmingham too.
3. Oblique or direct?
The following sentences contain adjectives and nouns which have been
underlined. Identify which ones are direct and which ones are oblique.
a) oil feu ~ >rei ~?
kee ib tuhaadee betee hai?
Is this your
daughter?
94
PANJABI
b) ~~
';!' 1'i'H
cit -a ?
tubaade bete daa naam kee hai?
What is
your son's name?
c) OIH<I' w.;: -al

d) ~
kamraa saaf hai. The room is clean.

kurheeaan kamre vich han. There are girls in
mre m <:101
the room.
e) ~~ ~ ~I
agle hafte noon aaunhaa.
Come next week.
ott mn:n?
kee gall see?
What was the matter?
l!l4. Subjects and verbs into plural forms

Listen to the following sentences and/or read them in the following list.
The sentences are in the present tense. Change the subjects and verbs from
the singular to the plural. Remember that the verbs (both main and
auxiliary) must agree with the subject. The fIrst one has been done for
you.
a) 1l ~
-iii or<r.iI lfJff
-iii orCt!'tr i
aseenlandan vich kanrn karl!eeaan

haan
meree betee sakool vich parhhl!ee hai
lUhaadaa larhkaa kiththe rahindaa hai?
kee uh mundaa paujaabee boll!aa hai?

how to describe continuous actions in the present and past
how to fonn commands and requests
how to express was and were
til 1 What are you doing?

lm~ilnr3' <t ~
ctI oro oUI -5' ?

gall baat 1 toon kee kar rahee hain?
Geeta and Sita are two women working in a garments factory. They are
sitting next to one another as they are sewing and have the following conversation.
~11citoracUlu?
Geela namasle! loon kee kar rahee hain?

Hello! What are you doing?
#I<r
~I
<rea'
Sita
H' il'er
mJI'
cUI
<PI
Heft HJ;fuo; -iii <roT ora cUll 1l -eit
cUI <PI
namas!e. main jebaan lagaa rahee haan. meree

masheen kanm naheen. kar rahee. main sooee vart rahee haan.
Hello. J am stitching pockets. My machine is not working
so I am using a needle.
#I<r
1 -iii ~ n
~ ~ ora cUI UI ~I 1l -iii

cUI <PI
Geeta loon samaan zaaiaa kar rahee hai!!. sunh! main kanm chadd rahee
haan.
You are wasting your time. Listen! I am leaving work.
Sita
cUI U ?
loon kanm kiun chadd rahee hain?
Why are you leaving work?
96
PANJABI
~ WB'\ ~
~'h
iIIW
l'rol' ~ fu<:rl
mtW }jar 1J<!'lllI' l'rol' 01<1
fu<:r
Geeta
mainejar saadee !ankhaah naheen vadhaa rihaa. uh

saadeeaan mangaan pooreeaan naheen kar rihaa hai.
The manager is not increasing our pay. He is not fulfilling
our demands.
"RW
i m
Sita
loon theek kahi rahee hain!

You're right! (literally: You are saying it right).
r.; ",ae'<:i81
shabdaavalee
in!'
m$'
mil><
masheen
~~
~
~
<iH
kanm karnaa
sooee
vara!nhaa
to listen
work (m.)
to leave , to quit
manager (m./f.)
pay, salary (f.)
mainejar
"'od'=
"
L!J lIIfB>IrR
2. Crossword
1. HBk;
2. obi
masheen
kanm
lankhaah
jebaan
abhiaas
6.
samaan
-ee'
sooee
14 )
to waste time
5)
rI
J
~
6)
r-r-r-r-'---
to increase
tzl2 What was the matter?
demands (f.)
fulfilling
right, correct
to speak
I!I~ "I3"S ~ ctI ~
m?
gall baat 2 kee gall see?

Preet and Sumeet are close friends. They are meeting each other after the
weekend.
Exercises

a) ~ iT ad! 01<1 oil 1? narnas!e-hain-rahee-kar-kee-!oon?
~
)
Mter reading the dialogue and/or listening to the audio tape, try to do the
What are you doing?
4. ila'
5. mf
to use
sunhnaa
kanm
chaddnhaa
!ankhaah
vadhaaunhaa
mangaan
pooreeaan
theek
kahinhaa
to do
pockets (m./f.)
to stitch, to apply, to put on
machine (f.)
to work
needle (f.)
time (m.)
b) j:f ila' <r ad! mr main-jebaan-haan-rahee-Iagaa I am stitching

pockets.
c) l'rol' ~ fu<:r ~ ~ WB'\ naheen-vadhaa-rihaa !ankhaahmainejar-saadee The manager is not increasing our pay.
Using the words given to you in Panjabi, complete the crossword with the
English translations.
Vocabulary
samaan
zaaiaa kamaa
AA;re
>t.Ji
WHAT WAS TH:..E::.

MIi.:..:JT=
ER.:.c?_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _-'9:..:...
7
3. ~
karnaa
jebaan
lagaaunhaa
GRIl<'
JIHI
iI'1'eor
C!fu ad! iT I
Hello.
Preet
~<h!~>it7
!useen kallh kiththe see?
Where were you yesterday?
>IIRl 1IICf >it I
\{b
Sumee!
aseen ghar see.

We were at home.
98
'{b
Preet
lJHb
Sumeet
'{b
Preet
lJHb
Sumeet
'{b
Preet
PANJABI
Or<!.ro
~ ~ oil
Jil?
,tuseen savere kee kar rabe see?
What were you doing in the morning ?
H' Ii:mi ~ <!til Jill >;ffi ;a
Wil
main
gekh rabee see. bachche khed rabe san.
I was watching afilm. The children were playing.
~ U3't iii oil or<!
Wi ?
tuhaade pa!ee jee kee kar rabe san?
What was your husband doing?
~ OI'<J ii
Wil
uh kaar dho rabe san.
He was washing the car.
~ ~ ~
~? oil -am Jil ?
tuseen kiun puchch rabe ho? kee gall see?
Why are you asking? What was the matter?
H' iio ~ <!til Jil ~ H' m ~ ~ or<! <!til Jill H' ~
Ru <!til Jill
main bor ho rabee see !e main sabh paase taileefon kar
rabee see. main tuhaade baare soch rabee see.
I was feeling bored and I called {was calling] everywhere.
I was thinking of you.
\.RI lIT ~ c!H rn:iI' or<! fu<J' Jill
par saadaa taileefon kanm nabeen kar rihaa see.
But our telephone was not working.
.ro
mam
.ro
.ro
.ro
sabh
sabh paase
paase
taileefon karnaa
tuhaade baare
sochnhaa
m~
~
~ "CI"CR"
~.re
~
L!J~
'{b
Preet
shabdaavalee
~
Ii:mi
~
~
U3't
OI'<J
ii<!'
~
iio~
gall
kallh
savere
mam
gekhnhaa
khednhaa
pa!ee
kaar
dhonhaa
puchchnhaa
bor honhaa
Vocabulary
matter (f.) (literal meaning: talk)

yesterday
morning
film (f.)
to watch
to play
husband (m.)
car (f.)
to wash
to ask
to be bored, to feel bored
all, every
everywhere
direction, way
to call by telephone
about you
to think
abhiaas
Exercises
1. Word search
Four Panjabi words are hidden in the box. These words are kaar, sumeet,
kaUh and ghar. Find them by looking horizontally across each of the rows.
.re
Sumeet
99
WHAT WAS THE MAffiR?
"!!
HI
<r
<I
c:
<r
"8
11
"6
1'1
01'
'"
"6
2. Answer in Panjabi questions about the dialogue

a) lJHb oil or<! <!til Jil? sumee! kee kar rabee see?
Wi ? bachche kee kar rabe san?
b) ~ oil or<!
c) lJHb ? U3't oil or<! fu<J' Jil 7 sumee! gaa pa!ee kee kar ribaa see?
.ro
bolee baare
Language points
The present continuous tense (-ing)

The present continuous tense is generally used when an action is in
progress. In English it is often signified by adding -ing to the end of a
verb. In Panjabi, the stem, also known as the root, of the verb does not
change its form. But the auxiliary verb and the progressive marker must
agree with the subject. The progressive aspect of the verb, comparable
with -ing in English, is expressed through afu rahi the stem of ~
100
PANJABI
rahinhaa. It stands on its own as a separate word and should not be

attached to either the main verb (to . .. ) or the auxiliary verb. The
progressive marker changes according to the gender and number of the
subject.
For example: }f "" fu<:r <:P
WHAT WAS THE MATTER?
Masculine plural
~ >f' ail ~
luseen khaa rahe ho
Feminine plural
~ >f' <rolIlf' ~
lUseen khaa raheeaan ho
main khaa rihaa haan I am eating
}f main I (subject) (1st person singular,-masculine) + "" khaa (stem of the

verb Cf'i!' (to eat)) + fu<:r rihaa (= -ing) (progressive marker) (mascu-
oro rahi are as follows:
you are eating
you are eating
3rd person
M asculine singular
!u/fe<:! >f' fa<!' ~

uhlih khaa rihaa hai
he is eating
Feminine singular
!u/fe<:! >f' om ~
uh/ih khaa rahee hai
she is eating
line/singular) + <:P haan (auxiliary verb (am))

The forms of
101
Masculine
singular
Masculine
plural
Feminine
singular
Feminine
plural
M asculine plural
!u/fe<:! >f' .ro "'"

uh/ih khaa rahe han
they are eating
fu<:r
em
a.:fI
a-tilr
Feminine plural
rahe
rahee
raheeaan
!u/fe<:! >f' <rolIlf' "'"

uhlih khaa raheeaan han
they are eating
rihaa
The auxiliary verb also reflects the person, number and gender of the subject
and takes on the present tense forms of ~ honhaa as discussed in Unit 2.
1st person
Masculine singular
}f ""
fu<:r <:P
I am eating
main khaa rihaa haan

Feminine singular
}f ""
a.:fI <:P
Uses of present continuous

Sometimes the simple present (see Unit 4) and present continuous tenses
bec orne interchangeable with one another when the action is on going and
habitual.
Simpie present
}f~
I am eating
lIfR'I' "" em <:P
we are eating
lIfR'I' "" a-tilr <:P
we are eating
asee!! khaa raheeaan haan
1 >f' fa<!' '"
you are eating
1 >f' om '"
you are eating
loon khaa rihaa hain
Feminine singular
toon khaa rabee ham
-iii OR!
<:P
<:P main sakool vich kanm
I work in a school.
main sakool vich

kanm kar rihaa haan
I am working in a
school.
The present continuous tense may also be used in instances where an

acllon in the immediate future is being denoted, though it may not be
hap pening at the present time:
2nd person
Masculine singular
ORr.!'
nt continuous
aseen khaa rabe haan
Feminine plural
-iii
kargaa haan
main khaa rahee haan

Masculine plural
>.r>i
""
fu<:r ~
uh shaam noon aa
rihaa hai
He is coming in the
evening.
AI ess fannal but more common manner of this use of the present
continuous occurs if we drop the auxiliary verb. The meaning of the
sentence does not change. However, because the sense becomes slightly
less formal a change of fu<:r rihaa to f'a-<p rihaan by nasalising the ending
is required.
102
PANJABI
Examples:
5 WHAJ WAS THE MATTER?
The past continuous tense
~ il' fcroi
H' U'{ fcroi
uh jaa ribaan
mail! parhb ribaan
He's going
I'm reading
The imperative
The imperative is a fonn of the verb which expresses request, command
or suggestion. The imperative has two forms: formal and informal. The
formal imperative adds the vowel sound 'o'to the stem of the verb and the
informal uses the stem on its own. Here are two examples which illustrate
the formal and informal aspects of the imperative using the verb ~
sunhnaa, to listen:
(too!!) sunh
Ctusee!!) sunho
Listen! (you, informal)

Listen! (you, formal)
~ 100n (you) is generally used with children, close relatives, equals and
intimate relations while ~ luseen (you) is used as a respectful address
with elders or fonnal acquaintances or in references to more than one

person. The person and the tone of voice used to express imperative
situations determine the nature of the order or request. For example, an
imperative form in the 2nd person ~ luseen would denote a more
polite, formal request while an imperative using the 2nd person ~ loon
would reflect a more informal although authoritative order.
Was and were

The past tense of the verb to be ~ bonhoo is was and were. You hove
already learned that the auxiliary verb is formed with the verb to be. Just
as the present tense of to be becomes is, am and are, the past tense of to
be becomes was and were.
The pas t continuous tense describes actions which had continued to bappen be~are and after a particular time (in English was ... -ing and were ... ing). The past continuous tense follows the same pattern as the present
continuous except that the auxiliary verb takes ' the past form. The
progres sive marker (-ing) is followed by the appropriate forms of was and
were.
see is the most commonly used past auxiliary, although W; san
is also used for the plural. Both are neutral of gender and number.
Masc uline
singular
Masculine
plural
Feminine
singular
faU' >it
rib.. see
mlm<
,,,,hit
rahe san
rahee see
Singular
Plural
H'm
main see I was
lIfI'it
~m
loon see you were
~m
m ih see
~m uh see
Note that
he! she! it was feu
w;lm
he/she/that was ~w;lm
Feminine
plural
"'""" m<
raheeaan san
H'main I (subject) (1st person singular, masculine) + >I' kbaa (stem of the
verb >I'i!!' (to eat + faU' riboa (= -ing) (progressive marker) (masculine
singular) + m see (auxiliary verb) (was) =
H' >I' faU'
main kh.. ribaa see
I was eating
1st person
Masculine singular
H' iI' faU' >it main jaa rihaa see I was going
Feminine singular
>r iI' ;rol >it
Mascu line plural
"IJit'
Feminine plural
"IJit' iI' "'""" aseen jaa raheeaan we were going

>it
see
Here is the past tense of the verb bonboo ~ to be:
feu
103
iI'
..ro >it
main jaa rabee see I was going

aseen jaa rahe see
we were going
2rd person
Mascu line plural
S iI' faU' >it toon jaa rihaa see

S iI' ;rol >it toon jaa rahee see
~ iI' ..ro >it {Useen jaa rabe see
Feminin e plural
aseen see
we were
Mascu line singular
tuseen see
you were
Feminine singular
ih san/see
they were
uh san/see they were
msee can be used with any number, person or gender.
>it
iI' "'"""
you were going

you were going
you were going
!Useen jaa raheeaan you were going

see
I
II
104
PANJABI
t "" fa<r if
3rd person
105
loon khaa rihaa hain

kee loon khaa rihaa hain?
loon kee khaa rihaa hain?
you are eating

Are you eating?
~/feu ...
f<roo
uh/ih jaa rihaa

see
he was going
-.II <f "" fa<r if ?

t ~ "" fa<r if ?
Feminine
singular
~/feu ...
&it
uh/ih jaa rahee

see
she was going
Similarly. other interrogative pronouns can be used in turning statements

into questions such as ~ kiun (why), ~ kiven (how) and foi'>i
kitblhe (where).
Masculine
plural
~/feu ...
&i
uh/ih jaa rahe

san/see
they were
going
Feminine
~/feu ...
uh/ih jaa raheeaan

san/see
they were
going
Masculine
singular
plural
""'1m
<rn'tr ""'1m
viaakhiaa
Commentary
1. oIlj kallh (yesterday and tomorrow)

In Panjabi there is one word which means both yesterday and tomorrow
oIlj kallh. This may at fIrst seem quite confusing, but the sense in which
oIlj kallh is used in a conversation can be gauged from the tense of the
Negative sentences
verbs and the sense of the context. For example:
Generally. sentences are made negative by inserting 1'm1' naheen (not)

between the verb stem and the progressive marker.
Statement H' "" fa<r <r
Negative H' "" 1'm1' fa<r
What are you eating?
<r
I am eating
main khaa rihaa haan
main khaa naheen rihaa I am not eating
haan
In colloquial speech the auxiliary verb is often dropped in positive and

negative statements. A native Panjabi speaker may instead say: H' "" 1'm1'
fa<rl main khaa naheen rihaa.
main kallh ghar see

I was (at) home yesterday.
main kallh aa rabee haan I am coming tomorrow.
There is, however, a specific word for tomorrow - '!J"5CI bhalak - but it is
rarely used. The most common forms of signifying time are:
1Ii'M
oIlj
1R)ol/~
l.ICIii'
ajj
kallh
bhalak/ bhalke
parson
today
yesterday/tomorrow
tomorrow
day before yesterday/ day after tomorrow
You will see all of these forms used in later units.
Making interrogative sentences

An interrogative sentence is made simply by adding oil kee at the beginning of the sentence. The literal defInition of oil kee is 'what' which can
tum a statement into a question.
Statement
loon khaa rihaa hain you are eating
i "" fa<r if
Interrogative ~ ~ "" fa<r if ? kee loon khaa rihaa Are you eating?
hain?
If oil kee is inserted between the subject and the verb. the meaning of the
sentence will change. Note and compare the following sentences:
2. Panjabi women at work

In rural Panjab, women playa signifIcant part in the contribution to the
household economy. From helping in the fIelds to animal husbandry,
women playa central role in the rural economy. This has continued in the
diaspora, where Panjabi women have worked in factories in a similar way
to their male counterparts. The factories of the Midlands in Britain and
more recently Silicon Valley in California have employed Panjabi women.
In Britain these women have been at the forefront of industrial struggles,
the most well known being 'Imperial Typewriters' and the more recent
'Burnsalls' Strike'. The contemporary concentration of Panjabi women in
106
PANJABI
the textiles sector in sewing and stitching of gannents is a continuity with

the jobs they had on arrival. The daughters of these migrants are now
forging new paths in a wide variety of occupations and businesses, a
selection of which can be found in the book, The Golden Thread, by
Zerbanoo Gifford.
abhiaas
Exercises
Using the pictorial clues given, fIll in the blanks with the main verb stem
of the continuous actions being done.
a. -aiIa"
_ __ _
geelaa tainas (tennis) _ _ __
1 (loon) with
pff (lnseen).
a)
1 m-r trfur ora o.ft ~
toon sarnaan zaaiaa kar rabee hain You are
wasting your time
b)
1 c!H I'a!f n
o.ft ~? toon kanm kiun chadd rabee hain? Why are
you leaving work?
b.~~
c) ~ m qfu o.ft ~ loon theek kahi rabee hain You are (saying) right.
_ __
aV!aar khaanhaa _ _ _ __

>dI
lila
husband
ghar
kallh
yesterday
!!I 3. Change present continuous to past continuous
c.
1ihP i -aiIa" t.1;r>it --:--:-_ _

seetaa Ie geetaa panjaabee
Listen to the tape. Phrases have been given to you in the present continuous (i.e. am/is/are _ -ing). Change them to the past continuous (i.e.
was/were _-ing). The fIrst one has been done for you.
a. ~ c!H ora o.ft;j main kanm kar rabee haan I am working
~ c!H ora o.ft"R'l main kanm kar rabee see
I was working
b. pff oil
Y'I: aU ij? toseen kee puchch rabe ho?
What are you asking?
c. ~ oil ora aU <m ?uh kee kar rabe han?
What are they doing ?
d. ~
He is washing the car.
C!'CI ~
fu<J' U uh kaar dho rihaa hai
107
1. Change the informal sentences into formal sentences

Complete this exercise by replacing the subject pronoun
d.
l3B' f'at<!'8 _ __
mundaa kitaab _ __ __
DID YOU STUDY IN JALANDHAR?
109
..
ti8Ud
kee tuseen jalandhar

parhhe see?
Did you study in
Jalandhar?
Pavan Singh haan! meree bhaleejee gaa viaah see.

Yes! It was my niece's wedding.
~ MuI
Surjit Singh
~ MUI
Pavan Singh
~I
f'croi! afua 3' ~ ret JiI ?
vadhaaeeaan. kihrhe shahir Ion baraal aaee see?

Congratulations. Which city did the marriage party come
from?
3' ret Jill " ..alan ' 0 0 >Ii! Wil

~h maanchaistar ton aaee see.lakreeban 100 bande san.
~ l1'n~Acd
They came from ivi:mchester. There were about 100

people.
~MuI
Surjit Singh

how to express actions in the immediate past
how to express habitual actions in the past
about Sikh wedding customs
about kinship and relations
~ MUI
I!!l -am 'S'3' 'I >Il#l' mrn -are m
PI aae'<i81
gall baat I aseen landan gae see

Surjit Singh and Pavan Singh are friends and both belong to the Sikh religion. They are having a conversation on the phone.
~ MuI "Rfo >{I lIfOml ~ ~ ~ JiI ? H' ~ 1IRJ "I'fer Jill

Su rjit Singh sal sree akaal. !IIseen ai!Vaar kiththe see? main !IIhaade
ghar aaiaa see.
Hello. Where were you on Sunday? I came to your house.
1.1':?; MuI
lIfJiI' fi!"I mil' Jill .lIfJiI' ~ ~ JJt>iIa ~
Jill
Pavan Singh aseen ilh!!!e naheen see. aseen hafIe ge akheer landan
gae see.
We were not here. We went to London over the weekend.
-are
Was there any special occasion?
viaah kiven ribaa?

How did the wedding go?
"Iro"3" ~I
"3"A'I' cr.il >W 3
-.iIr ire
~I
Pavan Singh b.iliul ~uhnh~a. !IIseen kagee aao Ie viaah geeaan foto
dekho.
Excellent. Come over sometime and see the wedding
photographs.
tzll We went to London
~ MuI
oil ~ ~ Her JiI ?
Su rjit Sin gh kee koee khaas mankaa see?
~ ~ fu<J' ?
~
~
~
JJt>iIa
~ ~
~
JJt>iIa
Her
rn.n
~
~
afua
W?i ~Rca
30rcilsn
shabdaavalee
landan
aityaar
hafIe
akheer
hafIe ge akheer
koee
khaas
maukaa
bhaleejee
viaah
vadhaaeeaan
shahir
maanchaistar
lakreeban
Vocabulary
London (m.)
Sunday (m.)
week (m.)
end
weekend (m.)
any
special
occasion (m.)
niece (f.)
wedding (m.)
congratulations
city (m.)
Manchester (m.)
about, approximately
110
PANJABI
bande
kiven ribaa
bahu! subnhaa
foto
ka.!!ee
aao
~f<w
U!!3'~
or.iI
rti
l!J~
people (m.)
how did it go?
very nice, excellent (v.)
photograph (f.)
sometime
come (forma!)
abhiaas
Exercises
After reading the dia!ogue and/or listening to the audio tape, try to do the
1. Answer the following questions about Dialogue 1 in

either short or long form
a) ~ ~ ~ lll>ffiI fol'i JiI?
b) ""'" HOI' oil JiI?
c) ~ afua ~ ~ "I'l:iI JiI?
kihrhe shahir ton baraa! aaee see?
d) ~ ~ a",a'lax ~ @ 'RX?
viaah Ie takreeban kinne bande san?
-.it ~ 1'>'8 mr
m C5'6I 'It
~ ~
l'Ih 'F[l "IOt'I'!1
Pavan Singh
sa! sree akaa!. vaahiguroo .!!ee kirpaa naa! sabh kujh

theek thaak hai.
Hello. By the grace of God, everything is fine .
(pavan hands the wedding a!bum over to Surjit)

(pointing to one of the photographs)
~ reJl'3<iI ~ un ?
ih pursh Ie is!aree kaunh han?
Who are this gentleman and lady?
feu y<m
Surjit Singh
~ ~
feu H<I' T<!' 'I.a feu H<fI w'8'I 'II "IR'f ~ >fO!'?i fi:'e
<!ffR Jill
Pavan Singh
ih meraa bharaa hai ale ih meree bhaabee hai. aseen ikko

makaan vich rahinde see.
He is my brother, and she is my sister-in-law. We used
to live in one house.
pavan hafle .!!e akheer kil!!lhe see?
khaas maukaa kee see?
111
~ ~
(looking at another photograph)
oil feu ~ """ ;:il un ?

Surjit Singh
kee ih tuhaade chaachaa jee han?

Is this your uncle?
2. Translate the following into formal Panjabi
~ ~
<P ;:ill "IR'f '6I'5M fi:'e <roil fl;.;I% iliR Jill
a) Where were you on Sunday?

b) Where were you yesterday?
c) Where were you over the weekend?
Pavan Singh
haon jee. aseen kaa!aj vich haakee ikaththe khed.!!e

see.
Yes. We used to play hockey together in college.
~~
oiI~i!5tre~JiI?
Surjit Singh
kee !useen ja!andhar parbhe see?

Did you study in lalandhar?
~ ~
xtiI' ;:il H' gFalll'<J!!CI
Pavan Singh
naheen jee. main hushiaarpur parhh.!!aa see.

No. I used to study in Hoshiarpur.
~ ~
oil
t%l2 Did you study in Jalandhar?
l!hi'5 If'3' ~ ott ~ i!5trcJ l.f.t HI ?

gall baat 2 kee tuseen jalandbar parhhe
see?
Surjit Singh visits Pavan Singh in order to see the photographs of Pavan's
niece's wedding.
~~
Surjit Singh
l'Ih 'F[l "IOt'I'! ;:ill oil
<J'5 'I?
sal sree akaa! jee. kee haa! hai?
Hello. How are you?
Jili
Surjit Singh
~ fi:'e U!!3' ~ 'RX?

kee viaah vich bahu! praahunhe san?
Were there a lot of guests at the wedding?
~ ~
<P, feu re'a Wr feci'o Jill
Pavan Singh
haan, ih ikk changa. ikathth see.

Yes, it was a good gathering.
112
PANJABI
~ I;Is",'<;:m
.~
~
l'B' ~
O'C!
yoB
"'
"""ift
0l'ffiI
iiR'
~
fe'or
fu<io
shabdaavalee
Vocabulary
to live, to stay
blessings (f.)
everything
OK,fine
gentleman (m.)
lady (f.)
sister-in-law (f.) (brother's wife)
uncle (m.) (father's brother)
col/ege (m.)
to play
guests (m.)
one, a
gathering (m.)
abhiaas
Exercises

y<m
purash
man
istaree
guests
kaalaj
sister-in-law
2. Identify whether the statements are formal or informal

Tick the appropriate box.
ih meraa bharaa hai
This is my brother.
c)
reu}ffl """ ift un

ih mere chaachaa jee han
This is my uncle.
Formal
Formal
Informal
Language points
bolee baare
.The past tense
The past tense in Panjabi describes actions or states of condition which

have taken place at a particular time before the present one. Here we will
discuss three different constructions of the past tense: the simple past, the
remote past and the past habitual. As was shown in Unit 5, was and were
in Panjabi are expressed through the past tense of the auxiliary verb to be
m:- honhaa. The more common forms for the past tense, however, are m
see and 'An san. The appropriate form of the past of to be is determined
by person, number and mode of address (formal or informal). Here are
some examples to refresh your memory:
mundaa changaa see The boy was good.
munde change san The boys were good.
The simple past tense

The simple past tense is used when expressing actions or conditions
completed in the past. The simple past is formed by adding appropriate
endings to the stem of the main verb. The endings added to the stem reflect
the gender and number of the subject. To determine if the subject is I st/ 2nd
or 3rd person, you need to refer to the subject pronoun. Here, the verb 'to
speak' ~ bolnhaa, will be used to illustrate the various past tenses:
fuoi'o
reu H<r 8<3' U
reu H<I'I " ' U
ih meree bhabee hai

This is my sister-in-law.
~~m
t1S fi 'An
The fIrst one has been done for you.
113
b)
rahinhaa
kirpaa
sabh kujh
theek thaak
purash
istaree
bhabee
chaachaajee
kaalaj
khedrthaa
praahurthe
ikk
ikathth
l!J >lfI's>IrR
a)
Informal
Verb
~
Stem
bolrthaa (to speak)
85 - bol
Now note the endings added to the stem:

main
boliaa
I (subject) (1st person masculine)

spoke (simple past form of the verb 'to speak' ~)
114
PANJABI
115
The remote past
1st person
main boliaa
I spoke
main bolee
I spoke
Masculine plural
11' iifur
11'WI
>lfl'ft' iH
aseen bole
we spoke
Feminine plural
>lfl'ft' Wlr
asee!! boleeaan
we spoke
Masculine singular
Feminine singular
2nd person
loon boliaa
you spoke
Feminine singular informal
i iifur
iWl
loon bolee
you spoke
Masculine plural formal
2'il'iH
lUseen bole
you spoke
Feminine plural
2'iI' Wlr
luseen boleeaan you spoke
Masculine singular informal
3rd person
Masculine singular
~/fu<:r
iifur uh/ih boliaa
he spoke
Feminine singular
@U/fu<:r
WI
uh/ih bolee
she spoke
Masc. plural f.
~/fu<:r
iH
uh/ih bole
they spoke
Feminine plural
~/fu<:r
Wlr uh/ih boleeaan
The remote past in Panjabi expresses actions which occurred prior to the
present or the immediate past. The main verb used in the simple past is
combined with the auxiliary verb in the past to form the remote past. The
remote past tense is used when one is:
being definitive in a statement

emphasising a particular point
conveying the completion of an action
referring to the remote past
The form of the main verb follows the pattern of the simple past just
shown while the auxiliary verb reflects the appropriate forms of was and
were For example:
1st person
Masculine singular
H' iIfWlr >it
main boliaa see
I spoke, had
spoken
. e singular
Femmm
H'iRI'I>it
main bolee see
I spoke, had
spoken
Masculine plural
>lfR't' ii8 >it
aseen bole see
we spoke , had
spoken
. e plural
Femmm
>lfR't' am.r >it
asee!! boleeaan
see
we spoke , had
spoken
they spoke
Some verbs change in a more irregular manner in the past tense. You
will have to learn and watch out for them. Verbs such as ~ jaanhaa to
go 0RIi"i' karnaa to do and ~ lIenhaa to give take on irregular forms in
the past tense which do not derive from the root. Here we give the example
of how ~ jaanhaa to go is formed in the simple past tense. Note that
the forms are not affected by person, only by gender and number.
~
jaanhaa - to go (went)
Masculine
singular
Feminine
singular
Masculine
plural
Feminine
plural
.re
giaa
gaee
gae
gaeeaan
2nd person
Masculine singular
informal
iilfWlr >it
toon boliaa see
you spoke ,had

spoken
Fenu nine singular

informal
iiRl'l>it
loon bolee see
you spoke, had

spoken
Masculine plural
fo rmal
ii8 >it
!Usee!! bole see
you spoke, had

spoken
am.r >it
lUseen boleeaan
see
you spoke, had

spoken
. e plural
Femmm
116
PANJABI
3rd person
1st person
Masculine singular
re<J/~ ;m"".
Feminine singular
re<J/~
Masculine plural
formal
re<J/~
Feminine plural
re<J/~
J;.>;/m
m ih/uh boliaa see
amm
ih/uh bolee see
;m J;.>;/ ih/uh bole
she spoke,
had spoken
they spoke,
had spoken
san/see
am.r
he spoke,
had spoken
ih/uh boleeaan
san/see
they spoke,
had spoken
Masculine singular lliiffi!.m

Fern inine singular
II U!r.iI m
Masculine plural
llf>iI' mre
Ferninine plural
llf>iI'
U!r.iI m
loon boillee see
you used to
speak
~mrem
lUseen boille
see
you used to
speak
~~
luseen boilleeaan
see
you used to
speak
ih/uh boillaa see
he used
to speak
she used
to speak
Masculine plural
farmal
Fenurune plural
Masculine
plural
m...m
.retm
ere m/WI
ore'I>Jr
gaee see
gae see/san
gaeeaan see/san
Feminine
plural
m/WI
Past habitual tense - us ed to
see
you used to
speak
singular
we used to speak
loon bol!!aa see
Fenurune singular
in1iormal
Feminine
maseen boille see
Masculine
singular
main boillee see I used to speak
2nd person
Masculine singular ~ iiffi!.
in1iormal
jaanhaa - to go
main boillaa see I used to speak
~ aseen boilleeaan we used to speak
The remote past of ~ jaanbaa to go follows the same pattern using the
simple past form with the appropriate form of was and were.
giaa see
117
..
3rd person
In English used to expresses actions which occurred regularly in the past

but which no longer exist in the present. In Panjabi the past habitual tense
Masculine singular fl:.J/~ iiffi!.
is used in the same manner. For example:

main boillaa see
I used to speak
The components of this example can be broken down as follows:
II
main
I (subject) (1st person masculine)
iiffi!.
boillaa
speak (simple present form of to speak ~ b olnhaa)
see
was (s imple past of to be ~ bonbaa)
Note from the example that the past habitual tense is formed with the main
verb, which takes on the same form as in the simple present tense, and the
past tense of to be ~ b onbaa. Some examples fo llow.
Ferninioe singular
fl:.J/~
U!r.iI m ih/uh boillee see
Masculine plural
form al
WI/m
fl:.J/~
mre
Fern inine plural
fl:.J/~~
WI/m
ih/uh boille san/see they used

to speak
ih/uh boilleeaan
san/see
they used
to speak
Ano ther form of the past habitual uses the verb expressing the action in
theh abitual and the habitual forms of ~ bonbaa with the past auxiliary.
I used to go in this form is expressed in the following ways:
118
PANJABI
H' iI'i!' ~ JiI
main jaandaa hundaa see
I used to go
~ JiI
main jaandee hundee see
I used to go
aseen jaande hunde see
we used to go
aseen jaandeeaan hundeeaan

see
we used to go
"IRl ;M! ~ JiI

"IRl
~ ~
119
DID YOU STUDY IN JAlANDHAR?
Remote past
1st person
H' """
JiI
H' ?<til' iifBr JiI

main nabeen boliaa see
I did not speak!had not
spoken
H' iifBr ?<til' JiI

main boliaa nabeen see
I did not speak!had not
spoken
Habitual past
2nd person
! iI'i!' !!c' JiI

! """ jj;!I JiI
H' iifBr JiI

main boliaa see
I spoke!had spoken
H'''-JiI
main bolllaa see
I used 10 speak
H' ?<til' " - JiI

main nabeen bolllaa see
I did not use 10 speak
H' " - ?<til' JiI

main bolllaa nabeen see
I did not use 10 speak
loon jaandaa hun daa see
you used to go
loon jaandee hun lIee see
you used to go
#.l~JiI
luseen jaande hun de see
you used to go
Interrogative sentences
~~JiI
!Useen jaandeeaan hundee
you used to go
As with the other verb tenses in Panjabi. interrogative sentences are

kee at the beginning of
formed in the past by adding the question word
the sentence. Here are some examples of bow questions are made out of
statements in the past:
aan see
3rd person
feu/t<! iI'i!' !!c' JiI
ih/ub jaandaa bundaa see
feu /t<J """ jj;!I JiI ih/uh jaandee bundee see

feu/t<J ;M! ~ Jl?< ih/ub jaande bunde san
feu/t<!~
~Jl?<
ih/ub jaandeeaan
hundeeaan san
he used to go
he!she/they used to go
they used to go
these constructions.
Negative sentences
Negative sentences in the various past tenses are formed by adding mit
nabeen either before or after the main verb.
Simple past
H' ?<til' iifBr
main nabeen boliaa
I did not speak
Simple past
she used to go
You will come across these various fonns of the past tense in subsequent
units and there will therefore be plenty of opponunity to practice aU of
H' iifBr
main boliaa
I spoke
en
H' iifBr ?<til'

main boliaa nabeen
I did not speak
Statement
Question
H' ~ main boliaa

I spoke
oil H' iifBr 7 kee main boliaa?

Did I speak?
Remote past
Statement
Question
H' iifBr JiI main boliaa see

I spoke! had spoken
oil H' iifBr JiI 7 kee main boliaa see

Did I speak! Had I spoken?
Habitual past
Statement
Question
H' " - JiI main bolllaa see

I used to speak
oil H' " - JiI 7 kee main bolllaa see?

Did I use 10 speak?
120
PANJABI
viaakhiaa
Commentary
Panjabi families
Panjabi weddings are seen as social occasions and signify the coming
together of two families rather than of two individuals, as is traditionally
the case in modem western marriages. Kinship relations form a central
part of Panjabi society. Often families live in extended units with three or
more generations all living under one roof. In contrast to English-speaking
cultures, Panjabi has very specific terms for members of the nuclear and
extended family. Most kinship terms are determined by the paternal and
maternal nature of the relationship and whether or not it is a relationship
by marriage. Beware ... these are only half of the possible kin names you
may come across in conversation with Panjabis!
<re't
laaee father's elder

brother's wife
I"" bhooaa father's sister
~
phupharh father's sister's husband
':!ao pullar son
3'It!' bhaleejaa nephew
(brother's son)
bhaleejee niece
(brother's daughter)
rnm
l!J >lj fa "('R

Paternal
~
fi.ao
W
1riI
lJa'
!laa!laa father's father

!laa!lee father's mother
pitaa father
abbaa papa (father)
palee husband
bharaa brother
iiIt!' jeejaa sister's husband
"""
chaachaa father's
chaachee father's younger

brother's Wife
laaiaa father's elder brother
m...
Maternal
<Wi'
naanaa mother's father
<Wit
naanee mother's mother

maa!aa mother
ammee mother
H'3'
lI/'Ht
\.SO't patnee wife
h
bhainh sister
'riI bhaabee brother's Wife
mil
maasee mother's sister
>i'R'l'!
maasarh mother's sister's

husband
H'H'
maamaa mother's brother
younger brother
121
abhiaas
l-f'Hl'
Y'a"a't
w'il'
'ii'iiI
maamee mother's
brother's wife
pUllaree daughter
bhaaujaa nephew
(sister's son)
bhaaujee niece
(sister's daughter)
Exercises
!!:II. The family tree

Pavan is showing his family photos to Surjit. Read and/or listen to the
following passage on the audio tape. Then try to complete Pavan's family
tree.(~ O'H' kursee naamaa.)
fe<J
iiO' ~
O'H':
ire fi.ao M'l eo O'H ~ fRlII ~ ~ ire H'3' M'l eo O'H 1IRIli'I3 ire ~I
~ E fin ..ni un I H', iiO' lJa' J!<Itfu' fRlII ~ H<iI h ~ irel H<iI
'riI eo O'H ~ ire ~ ~ ire tif.t eo O'H ~ fRlII 51 H<iI \.SO't eo
O'H U<Rl'tn ire ~ ~ ~ E ..ni un, fu"o! l/iro- ~ fRlII ~ fu"o! th'al
~ ire I
- ,
,
122
PANJABI
ih hai meraa kursee naamaa:
mere pi!aa jee lIaa naam jogindar singh hai ale mere maalaa jee gaa naam
gurmeet kaur hai. uhnaan ge linn bachche han. main. meraa bharaa
sukhjee! singh !e meree bhainh kulgeep kaur. meree bhabee lIaa naam jagjeer kaur hai te mere bha!eeje gaa naam gurtej singh hai. meree patnee gaa
naam harleen kaur hai ale saade go bachche han. ikk pu!!ar. manjee! singh
!e ikk pU!!ree. balgev kaur.
123
b) ~ MIll M!'!t:re tq;!'

True / False
c) ~
ml pavan singh jalandhar parhhgaa see.
~ ~ W"I viaah vich bahu! praahunhe san. True / False
4. Construct negative and interrogative sentences

The first example is given.
mrn
I. <!'H
~
I
Raam landan rahindaa see.
Ram used to live in London.
Negative :
<!'H
mrn m:it ~ m I
raam landan naheen. rahindaa see.

Ram did not use to live in London.
mrn
Interrogative: oil <!'H

~
7
kee raam landan rahindaa see ?
Did Ram use to live in London?
mrn
2. ~ mS ~ ~
R W"I uh haf!e ge akheer landan gae san.
They went to London over the weekend.
2. Matching
Match the questions with their correct responses.
a)
b)
H'
uri~ ~
l1'nllAed m
main hafte ge akheer
maanchaistar see
H'
~1I/dm
main aitvaar ghar see
c)
H'
~mrnm
main kallh landan see
i) ~ ~ foi'ij
m7
!Useen kallh kiththe see?
ii) ~mS~~
foi'ij m 7
!Useen hafte lie akheer
kiththe see?
iii) ~ ~ foi'ij m7
!Useen ai!Vaar kiththe see?
3. True or false?
Indicate whether the following statements from the dialogues in the unit
are true or false.
a) ~ MIll uoiI ~ ml pavan singh haakee khedgaa see. True/ False
3. rR1' feoi'8 ~ >r.re m I aseen ikaththe tainas khedge see.

We used to play tennis together.
4. ~ ..r.r.ft ~ ~ m I uh panjaabee bolgee hundee see.
She used to speak Panjabi.
'Othlt{?
-aT ?
tuseen kee peeD ge?
What will you (have to)

drink?

how to express actions in the future
days of the week
how to teU the time
about repetitive and rhyming words
Mr Ali and Mr Malik are old friends. Mr Ali is standing outside his house
as Mr Malik happens to pass by.
~
lIRl'I
i'Rll'H "fffiIHt eft <m
'I'P! ~
MrAii
~Hf'5ol
i't! H'
MrMalik
ajj main naheen thahiraan gaa. main hahal vich haan.

eft if ~ ~ ill' 7
kee loon hUh aaven gaa?
ful'IB' >li'W1 H' "S6 ~ 111'1 ~ ~ UI ~ "!!lr ~
Mr Malik
f>mc'a lIRl'I
f>mc'a lIRl'I
MrAIi
~Hf'5ol
rnrr l5fuo' ...1H' C!'<m m
<PI
111'1
Mr Malik
~Hf'5ol
>JtR't
Mr Malik
aseen saare kallh paID vaje aavaan ge.
lIRl'I
inshaa alla. main zaroor aavaan gaa. kallh aityaar hai.

vaka! khuUhoa hove gaa.
wa ~ t.1H ~ ~ ~I
mil H' ~ ...1
MrAli
changoa phir. main udeekaan gaa.
MrAii
MrMalik
MrAIi
MrMalik
MrAIi
MrMalik
Hello! How are you?

Hello! I'mfine .
~
JJ(;re
"I'M'
i't!
~
asslaam alaikam. kee haal chaal e?

~ i'Rll'H1 H' ~ l5'OI <PI
vaalaikam asslaam. main theek thaak haan.
JJ(;re "I' M'I ;J'U S <ill
andar aa jaa. chaah choo pee.
~Hf'5ol
~!i~~~111'7
sunh! loon kinne vaje aaven gaa?
lIRl'I
II F.Ist!'c;81
gall baat 1 main udeekaan gaa
MrAii
MrAIi
MrAii
Mr Malik
MrAIi
tZl 1 I'll wait

I!l -ai'H l3'3' 'I H' ~ 'aI'
125
WHAT WILL YOU (HAVE TO) DRINK?
C!'<m
ful'IB'
>li'W
"S6
~
"!!lr
~~ .
>JtR't
wa
t.1H~
Come inside. Have some tea.

I'm sorry. I won't stop today. I'm in a hurry.
Will you come tomorrow?
Hopefully [lit. If God wishes). I'll definitely come.
Tomorrow is Sunday. There will be plenty of time.
Listen! What time will you come round?
We' ll all come tomorrow, at 5 o' clock.
Fine then. I'll wait.
shabdaavalee
udeeknhaa
andar
aajaa
ajj
thahirnaa
kaahal vich
inshaa aUaa
zaroor
vaka!
khullhaa
Jcinne voje
asee!! saare
paID vaje
Vocabulary
to wait
inside
come (informal request)
today
to stay
in a hurry
hopefully [lit. If God wishes)
definitely
time (m.)
open, plenty (v.)
what time
all of us, we all
five 0' clock
126
PANIABI
abhiaas
Exercises

Complete the sentences by filling in the blank with the correct Panjabi word.
a. A'
b. oil ~
c. ~
~ 111'
I'll definitely come.

Will you come tomorrow?
What time will you come?
111'?
111' ?
2. Arrange the sentences in the correct order

The order of the following sentences from the dialogue is mixed up. Can
you unscramble them by numbering them in the correct order?
Mr Malik:
~ chi >in ;;il ~ -atl

aseen saare kaUh panj vaje aavaan ge.
f'Hl:re<! Hf5or:
Mr Malik:
vaalaikam asslaam, main theek thaak haan.

B?I i fcffi ;;il
111' ?
sunh! loon kinne vaje aaven gaa?
i'Rmf "I5c!H1 oil U'5 -.r5 E ?
asslaam alaikam. kee haal chaal e?
>lIJil'
f'Hl:re<! Hf5or:
i'Rmf. A' m
15'C!
<PI
f'Hl:re<! >lI8'I:
Mr Ali:
f'Hl:re<! >lI8'I:
Mr Ali:
t%.l2 What will you (have to) drink?

Il!i!l-afu l:I'a' ~ ~ oft ~ -ijj ?
gall baat 2 tuseen kee peeo ge?
Mr and Mrs Malik visit Mr Ali's home. Mr Malik knocks on the door
and Mr Ali opens it.
f'Hl:re<! >lI8'I
Mr Ali
;:iI ...re,.; ~
l'!'fua ~ W'>it ;:ill
jee aaiaan noon bhaaee saahib 1e bhaabee jee.
(Mr and Mrs Ali exchange greetings with Mr and Mrs Malik)
~ <I'Q ;:ill 2R'l' oil tittr -at ?
Mrs Ali
1ashreef rakhkho jee. lUseen kee peeo ge?
fHHr.r >lI8'I
f'Hl:re<! Hf50r
~I
Mr Malik
shukreeaa. main chaah peevaan gaa.
fHHr.r Hf50r
Mrs Malik
A' ;ro ~
A' OR lW -aill
main ras lavaan gee.
111'1
127
WHAT Will YOU (HAVE TO) DRINK?
(Mrs Ali serves the drinks and then begins talking to Mrs Malik)
f'IiR';;! >lI8'I
Mrs Ali
f'IiR';;! Hf50r
Mrs Malik
f'IiR';;! >lI8'I
Mrs Ali
f'IiR';;! Hf50r
Mrs Malik
f'IiR';;! >lI8'I
Mrs Ali
f'IiR';;! Hf50r
Mrs Malik
oR' ~ -at ?
bachche kagon aaunh ge?
~ 94 fHct m ~ -atl
uh 15 mintaan vich aaunh ge.
oil ~ Ha 1"ffi ~ f.=>f ~ -ail 7
kee loon mere naal urgoo ftlam gekhen gee?
i'oI'u-3'I f.=>f ?
kihrhee filam?
''"'''d,<8l'
t ;;il
c'I ;;'I ~ ... au'!
~I
'anaarkalee' 8 vaje tee vee 1e aa rabee hai.
<P ;:ill
A' Bs<J ~ -ail I
haan jee. main zaroor gekhaan gee!
Mr Ali
Welcome brother and sister-in-law.
(Mr and Mrs Ali exchange greetings with Mr and Mrs Malik)
Mr Ali
Please have a seat. What will you drink?
Mr Malik
I'll have [drink] tea.
Mrs Malik
I'll have juice.
(Mrs Ali serves the drinks and then begins talking to Mrs Malik)
Mrs Ali
When will the children arrive?
Mrs Malik
They'll be here in 15 minutes.
Mrs Ali
Will you [would you like to] watch an Urdu film with me?
Mrs Malik
Which film ?
Anarkali [name of a film] is on television at 8 0' clock.
Mrs Ali
Mrs Malik
Yes. I'll definitely watch it!
III >.tae'<i81
shabdaavalee
...re,.; ?;
Vocabulary
jee aaiaan noon

bhaaee saahib
bhaabee jee
~ <I'Q;:iI 1ashreef rakhkho jee
~
peenhaa
OR
ras
51!'
lainhaa
oR'
kagon
when
fHct
Ha 1"ffi
minutes (m.)
with me
;:iI
1!l"iI l'!'fua1I'S'I ;:iI
mintaan
mere naal
welcome
brother (m.)
sister-in-law (f.)
Please have a seat.
to drink
(fruit) juice (m.)
to take, to have
128
PANJABI
to see, to watch
!!ekhnhaa
urgoo
anaarkalee
8 vaje
tee vee
~
lIIO'dot8l
t~
ch'l
Urdu (m./f.)
name of a classic Urdu film (f.)
8 o'clock
TV (television) (m.)
abhiaas
condition s in the future and means will. shall or would. As has been
explained with other verb tenses in Panjabi. the form of the future tense
varies ac cording to the number and gender of the subject. Here are the
ways in which -ill' gaa is formed (notice that the forms of -ill' gaa do not
change according to the person of the subject):
-ill'
Exercises
-~
gaa
gee
ge
-~
geeaan
-iii!
!!II. Questions to ask guests
129
7 WHAT W ill YOU (HAVE TO) DRINK?
masculine singular
feminine singular
masculine plural
feminine plural
The futur e tense therefore, as is also the case with the present tenses, is
Two guests, Mr and Mrs Malik. have come to your house for tea. Ask
them the following questions.
a) What will you have to drink?
b) Would you like to watch television?
c) Would you like to have juice or tea?
constructed by combining the main verb with the auxiliary ending, -ill'
gaa. The main verb in the future tense, however, does vary according to
the person as well as the number of the subject. In the first dialogue in this
unit, the verb~. udeeknhaa to wait was used in the future tense H'
~iII' main udeekaan gaa, I will wait. The example of C!C<'i' karnaa.
2. Word search
nants are formed in the future.
Three words children , Urdu and sister-in-law are hidden in Panjabi in the
box. Find them by reading horizontally across each of the rows.
CR!l'i' -
todoisn ow illustrated to show how verbs with stems ending in consoinftnitive form of to do CIa - stem
1st person
tf
\I
fi
'R'
l'/
C!
;0;
tit
or
fot
j:j
i!!
'i3
;0;
fe
11'
-at
<I'
Masc. sing.
H'ORrill'
main karaan gaa
I shall/will do
Fern. sing.
H'ORrili!
main karaan gee
I shall/will do
Masc. pI
>lIR'I' ORr
a5een karaan ge
we shall/will do
Fern. pI.
>lIR'I' ORr
aseen karaan geeaan
we shall/will do
2nd perso n
bolee baare
language points
Masc. sing. informal
t a-a--ar
The future tense
Fern. sin g. informal
In Panjabi, as in English, the future tense is used when one is making predictions about the future or referring to intentions, offers, or promises in
the future. The Panjabi ending -ill' gaa is used to denote actions or
loon karen gaa
you will do
ore'iIi!
toon karen gee
you will do
Masc. p I. formal
~..re~
!Useen karo ge
you will do
Fern. pI.
~..re~
!Useen karo geeaan you will do
130
PANJABI
W HAT W ILL YOU IHAVE TO) DRINK?
131
3rd person
ora ill'
~/fe<:J ora iliI
~/fe<:J
Masc. sing.
Fern. sing.
Masc. pI. formal ~/fe<:J
CRffi
-ai
uh/ih kare gaa
he will do
uh/ih kare gee
she will do
uh/ih karan ge
they will do
Another construction of the future tense occurs when the stem of the main
verb ends in a vowel such as ",-~ jaa-nhaa to go, ~-~ aau-nhaa
to come, t.iI-~ pee-nhaa to drink, and H-~ lai-nhaa to have. There are
generally two acceptable ways of forming the future tense with such
vowel-ending stems. The ftrst manner follows the pattern as given for
consonant-ending verb stems. The second manner in which the future
tense is often formed is by inserting ~ vavvaa after the vowel. There is
no significant difference between the two, although the >: vavvaa forms
often have a slightly more formal tone. Note these examples of the two
commonly used main verb formations in the future tense:
~tuseen, fe<:Jih
loon
you
you (formal) he/she/it
(informal)
H'main
I
we
(sing/informal) (plural/formal)
jaanhaa - to go , "' - stem
1 1:0
I~
jaae
;:n
aave
aavanh
ure
tfu!
peee
peenh
I:anh
;R'
iR
iR
jaavaan
jaaven
jaavo
jaave
jaavanh
~ aaunhaa - to come, 1)(' - stem
tire'
pee aan
peeen
..re
aao
aae
stem
1:0
(2)
til>:'
eevaan
peeven
peevo
~Ia inhaa - to have, to take,
t.iI=
peeve
peevanh
'5 - stem
(I )
~
lavaan
laen
5
10
lae
I lainh
(2)
~
m:l!
laven
lava
lave
lavanh
More forms of the imperative
l:!?
g"J'iI' ~
~
aaunh
loon sunh
listen (you, informal)
luseen sunho
listen (you, formal/plural)
The plural form of the imperative is used to denote a respectful tone when
addressed to a single person. To make the request yet more formal and
respectful, the English equivalent of please can also be added by use of
the honorific particle iii jee.
~
aae
'lit -
In Unit 5 the imperative was briefly introduced as a means of expressing

a request, order or command. The formal and informal uses of the
imperative were illustrated through the verb ~ sunhnaa to listen:
(2)
..re
t.iIr
~uh
(I)
~
>ri
aavo
lavaan
~uh
jaavaan
aaven
(I)
fe<:Jih
he/she/they
llfJiT aseen,
~
>ri'
aav aan
~ pe enhaa - to drink,
~/fe<:J CRffi ~ uh/ih karan geeaan they will do
Fern. pI.
(2)
>If'>:'
iii
sunho jee
please listen (you, formal)
Please in Panjabi is expressed in the phrase fcR!tr ere iii kirpaa kar ke .
By using this phrase, a formal request can be made more polite:
132
PANJABI
~ ~
aru!ar aao
forot.Io ora ii ~
~ kirpaa kar ke arular aao
come in
please come in
Politeness is also expressed by fonning the imperative in the future tense.
cit
~ ~
-ai til 7 kee !Useen sunho ge jee?
133
placed at the beginning of the sentence. However, other words for time are
IIlso appropriate when asking someone the time in Panjabi. Here are a few
commonly used phrases:
will you please listen?
The tone of the request can be softened with the word i.I'CJ' zaraa, just a
little used in combination with the infmitive form of the verb. The infinitive specifies the action of what is being requested. The colloquial sense
of the earlier request becomes ifa' ~ zaraa sunhnaa, have a listen .
With ~ Jlekhnhaa, to look the request becomes:
tRI' ~
zaraa lIekhnhaa
have a look
kee vakat hai?

kinne vaje han?
Ordinal numbers
In Unit 3 you learned the cardinal numbers from I to 20. To expand your
knowledge of numbers further here are the ordinal numbers.
~
U;;!:I
pahilaa
1I00sraa/lIoojaa
leesraaileejaa
chaulhaa
panjvaan
-R
chevaan
ll/'o>:I
sa!!Vaan
aththvaan
~/5"'
'""'"/-;fur
~
first
second
third
fourth
fifth
sixth
seventh
eighth
As you can see, from fifth onwards ordinal numbers are formed with the
ending --.;; vaan. Since ordinals are adjectives, they follow the same rules
of agreement as other adjectives. The endings of ordinals will therefore
agree with the nouns that they are describing.
pahilee vaaree
1I00jaa lIin
first time
second day
What time is it?

In English, time is expressed by the use of o'clock which refers
specifically to the position of the hands on the clock when telling the time.
Similarly in Panjabi, time is most commonly expressed through the use of
the verb ~ vaiinhaa which means to chime, to strike. When asking
someone the time, the same rules apply as when transforming statements
into interrogative sentences as shown in Unit 5. The word oft kee is simply
kee taaim hai?
What time is it?

What time is it?
(literally: how many times
has the clock struck?)
What is the time?
Therefore, when someone says that it is one o clock, the expression in

Panjabi would be:
ikk vajiaa hai
It is one
0' clock
The verb ~ vaiinhaa is formed in the present perfect tense here, literally meaning that the clock has struck one. Note that -.:fM>lr vajiaa is
the singular form as it agrees with the number one. All other times which
relate to the number one (such as quarter to one, quarter past one, half past
one) also take on the singular form .
T.i -.:fM>lr
dedh vajiaa hai
~ ft!'o! -.:fM>lr e paunhaa ikk vajia~ hai
w:' fu"or -.:fM>lr
savaa ikk vajiaa hai
It is halfpast one.
It is a quarter to one.
I I is a quarter past one.
As you will have noticed in the earlier examples there are terms in
Panjabi for each IS-minute sequence of time on the clock. One thirty and
two thirty, however, have specific names while all other times use w:'
savaa, Jl'V saadhe and ~ paunhe.
half past one = T.! dedh
half past two =
dhaaee
quarter past the hour;:: 'R1:' savaa
thirty minutes past the hour Jl'V saadhe
quarter to the hour = ~ paunhaa, ~ paunhe
134
PANJABI
All times relating to numbers greater than one use the plural form
Here are some examples:
1ril U<'>
,g ~ 1ril U<'>
m 1ril U<'>
It is two 0' clock.

!lo vaje han
It is a quarter to two.
paunhe !lo vaje han
It is three 0' clock.
linn vaje han
It is three thirty.
~m~U<'>
saadhe linn vaje han
-;j"CJ 1ril U<'>
chaar vaje han
It is four 0' clock.
'R':' -;j"CJ ~ U<'>
savaa chaar vaje han
It is a quarter past four.
panj vaje han
It is five 0' clock.
ilM1rilU<'>
i 1ril U<'>
che vaje han
It is six o' clock.
,g i 1ril U<'>
paunhe che vaje han
It is a quarter to six.
>fa' 1ril U<'>
It is seven 0' clock.
sal! vaje han
It is eight 0 ' clock.
i'o1rilU<'>
athth vaje han
?\' 1ril U<'>
naun vaje han
It is nine 0' clock.
It is ten 0' clock.
<!R 1ril U<'>
!las vaje han
~~1rilU<'> saadhe giaaraan vaje han It is eleven thirty.
baar-h-aan vaje han
It is tweive 0' clock.
""l'~<m
When the exact nature of the time is being expressed, it is also possible to
use other fanns of expression. Here are a few examples:
?r
?:'H
m! kalaas ikk vaje Ion

shuroo hundee hai
linn vaj rabe han
naun vajanh vaale han
The class starts at one

o'clock
It is just three o'clock
It is nearly nine o'clock
When the time of day needs to be specified, morning (~ saver),

afternoon (~ !lupabir), day (fEn !lin), evening (B'H shaam) and night
(<1'3' raa!) can also be used:
i 1ril B'H ~
~ ~ i'o~
at six o'clock in the evening

at eight o'clock in the
morning
~ ~ "ir.! 1ril !lupabir !le dedh vaje
at one thirty in the afternoon
at two o'clock in the
fEn ~ ~ ~
!lin !le !lo vaje
afternoon (day)
~ 1ril <1'3' ~
baar-h-aan vaje raal noon at twelve o'clock at night
che vaje shaam noon

saver !le athth vaje
Further usages and expressions of time will be explained in subsequent

units.
135
viaakhiaa
of~.
O!H'R f!!'a ~ if
~ ii
m ~ <!i U<'>
Commentary
1. Repetitive and echo/ rhyming words

The habitual use of repetitive and echo words is one of the many special
characteristics of Panjabi which make it such an expressive language.
Many words in Panjabi are repeated in the written and spoken forms to
add emphasis. Repetition occurs when the same word is repeated while
the echoing and rhyming of words occur through the use of two words
which sound similar. Here are some examples:
haulee haulee chalo walk slowly (emphasising slowly)
get away (showing intensity)
ue ue
hat hat
came from different
people
~ ~ if ffi;r !les !les !onlok aae
countries
(emphasis on countries
..re
to signify the many different
countries)
tea
[here the echo word l! has no
chaab choo
specific meaning other than for
emphasis]
miseries
and comforts
!lukhkh sukhkh
day
and
night
(all the time) [these
!lin raa!
words technically neither rhyme
nor are echo words. However,
their opposite meanings uttered
together gives the idea of
continuity.]
the whole truth
sachch sachch
(absolutely)
quiet
chupp chaap
Ul'I't Ul'I't.re
2. Days of the week

There are two words for day in Panjabi which are used to designate the
days of the week: fEn !lin and '='" vaar. If you want to ask someone what
the day of the week is today, there are two ways to ask:
ajj kee !lin hai?
ajj kee vaar hai?
What day is it today?

What day is it today?
136
PANJABI
The names of the days of the week are all masculine nouns. Some of the
days of the week are different in West Panjab due to the influence of the
Islamic calendar in Pakistan. The days of the week in Panjabi are as
follows ('shows the Islamic calendar days):
137
WHAT Wi l l YOU (HAVE TO) DRINK?
abhiaas
Exercises
Afler reading the dialogue and/or listening to the audio tape, try 10 do the
1. The imperative
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
tile '
~ *
Friday
!"ciaC:'d
BH' '
Saturday
Rfx'tId<?a
Sunday
m:a"' '
~
somvaar
peer
mangalvaar
bul!lli!hvaar
veervaar
jumeraal
shukkarvaar
jumaa
sanicharvaar
haftaa
aityaar
You are trying 10 convey 10 someone that he or she should listen to you.
llow would you form the imperative of ~ sunhnaa, to listen in the
following circumslances?
0) 10 someone
b) 10 someone
c) 10 someone
d) 10 someone
who is younger than you (informal)

who is older than you (formal)
10 whom you wish to show respect (formal, polite)
with whom you wish to use a mild tone of request
2 . What time is it?

Wrile the answers in Panjabi.
3
Other useful calendar terms are:

haftaa
saplaah
maheenaa
.!lin
saal
~
-. 6
week (m.)
week (m.)
month (m.)
day (m.)
year (m.)
I:J ~3
9
8
..
76 5
3 . Expressions of friendship
You will have noticed in Dialogue 2 that Mr Ali greets Mr Malik as

l'!'fu>;r b haaee saahih (brother) and Mrs Malik as W'Il'I n'I bhaabee jee
(sister-in-law). It is not uncommon to address people with whom you wish
to express closeness or affection with such tenns ordinarily associated
with kinship. In this example, it is quite clear that Mr Ali and Mr Malik
are not brothers, but their friendship is the basis for Mr Ali referring to Mr
Malik as brother. Since the relationship is primarily based upon the two
men, Mrs Malik is referred to as W'Il'I n'I bhaabeejee (as Mr Malik 's wife)
and not sister.
3 . The future tense

After reviewing the future tense section in the unit, express the fact that
you will have tea in Ihe following gender and number situations:
a) You are a singular male.
b) You are a singular female.
c) You are a plural male.

d) You are a plural female.
4 . Conversation
Suppose you have been asked to go to someone's house. Express the
following conversational phrases in Panjabi.
a) Yes, thank you.
c) No, I'm in a hUrry.
b) Yes, I'll come tomorrow.

d) Fine then. I'll wait.
vajaaunh gaa shauk hai. main uththon vadheeaa

sl!aar liaavaan gee.
mainoon sitaar
vajaauoh daa shauk hai
I enjoy playing the sitar
how to
how to
how to
how to
Iaspreet and Sirman are two sisters living in Yuba City, California. They
are plaruring a trip to India and are having a conversation with their father,
Mr Sandhu.
lUhaanoon bhaara! jaanh laee kinoe paise
chaabee4e han?
~ i f'RH<:ffi
Jl'Q 11/? 11k ('looo) u;re "lI'ffij ~ unl
Jaspreet and Simran saanoon ghatto ghatt (2000) go hazaar daalar
chaabeege han.
~ lOcr.!'
feno
~ ~ 111' ?
aine saare paise? lUhaadaa kharchaa innaa kiven

hove gaa?
flw til I ~ \13' U fa! HO ~

UI ~ fij' ~ ~ /Wori;i iIiIl
Jaspreet
'''''0' '..," 'II
Simran
Ha'tthI mg, AA il:RR U fq "3"U'7; ~ m lia >i8
;;r.;; Oil nuT
MrSandhu
..ml
--
mereeD dheeo, mainoon afsos hai k.i luhaanoon

genh laee mere kol aine paise naheen han.
ore, flw till H'3' til >i8 Oil "II!!'!"
Mr Sandhu
How much money do you need for going to India?
Jaspreet and Simran We need at least $2000.
Mr Sandhu
So much money? Why will your expenses be so
high?
Father,
you know that I am fond of playing the
Jaspreet
sitar. I'm going to bring a good quality sitar from
there.
... and I like travelling around.
Simran
My
daughters, I am sorry that I don't have that
Mr Sandhu
much money to give you.
Jaspreet and Simran Don't worry, Father. Mother has plenty of money!
shabdaavalee
,,(1'0 "!I'ffi1 ~ m fc!?i Oil ~ un?
Oil ?
~"".
' > . - " - - ........ -
... !e mainoon ghunmnhaa phirnaa pasand hai.
Jaspreet and Simran lUseen fikar naa karo, pi!aa jee. maa(aa jee kol
paise bahu! han!
express your likes and dislikes

express need, want, should, ought
discuss visas
negotiate a taxi ride
~ ~
-"
1-10
... <l'
~ fi:<;re '"
un !
[%11 I enjoy playing the sitar

1!!I-al'5 a'a' ~ ~ fHa 'd iiit1'~<t t!' Bol UI
gall baa! 1 mainoon si!aar vajaaunh daa
shauk hai
Mrea~
MrSandhu
fR>.RJn
Mrea~
MrSandhu
139
I ENJOY PLAYING THE SITAR
~ ? it.;!
pi!aa jee! lUhaanoon palaa hai ki mainoon sitaar
laee
kinne
~
chaahunhaa
lOcr.!' . kharchaa
11/? 11k ghatto ghatt
"lI'ffij
daalar
.;;;?i R'6 aine saare
pa(aa
sitaar
vajaaunhaa
shauk
fc!?i
Vocabulary
for, in order to
how much, how many
to need, to want
expense, expenses (m.)
at least
dollar (m.)
so much
to know
sitar (f.) (a stringed classical musical instrument)
to play (music)
fondness, enjoyment
140
PANJABI
~ l!' ijq vajaaunh !laa shauk
fir
uththon
vadbeeaa
liaaunhaa
ghunmnhaa
phimaa
ghunmnhaa phirnaa
pasan!!
afsos
kol
mere kol naheen
>:tiIr
flkar
dheeo
abhiaas
fond of playing, enjoy playing

from there
good quality
to bring
to go around
to travel
to travel around
like
regret, sorry
with, next to, in possession
not with me, not in my
possession
worry (m.)
daughters (f.) (vocative case: see
language points)
Exercises
follOWing exercises.
141
2. Match the statements

a. fi:ora '" ere
i)
b. >iIi'i,re tm ?
ii)
c. 11' >:tiIr fR<re ~ iIiI iii)
1Zl2 We want to go to
I will bring a good quality sitar.

Don't worry.
So much money?
Connaught Place
11'5 'S'3' ~ lIII'fI' CIC"i'C ~ ;:rl!;' iiI'ge1ri ui

gall baa! 2 aseen kanaat pales jaanhaa
chaahundeeaanhaan
Simran and laspreet have just arrived at the airport in Delhi. They have
approached the immigration counter where they show their passports to
the officer with whom they are having a conversation.
~ _
1#1' "IHCilor ~ rna ii' oro <ro'Ir ~ ?
Immigration Officer tuseen arnreekaa kinnaa chir ton rahi raheeaan ho?
W "IHCilor ~
Simran
aseen amreekaa vich janmeeaan see.
Jill
~ ~ ;hiIlltr>iI m' ~ U ?
~Immigration Officer tuhaanoon ainee changee panjaabee kiven
1 Crossword
Complete the crossword in Gurmukhi script using the clues given.
iIR\{b
\) a stringed classical instrument

3) expense
Jaspreet
2) US currency
4) to travel
aaundee hai?
fI:rcrt: ii;iI ~ ~ UI
saanoon siraf !l!orhee bahutee aaun!!ee hai.
fi!'o! iIn.tI U, _
Simran
ikk bentee hai, afsar saahib ...
~_
~oiIU?
Immigration Officer uh kee hai?

3)
/1)
l2)
...
Jl'i ire ~ fi!'o!
Simran
saade kol keval ikk maheene !laa veezaa hai. jee

kee tuseen saanoon !lo maheene rahinh !lee aagiaa
!levo ge?
4)
~ l!'
UI
~~~"e'I~~~?
tit oil 1#1' ~
fim Ha U.
rn:if UI
"IHCilor ii' ~
~Jill
Immigration Officer ih mere vass vich naheen hai. tuhaanoon veezaa

arnreekaa ton lainhaa chaahee!laa see.
142
fmlon
PANJABI
a ilRt{Io
~~~~
Jl'<I'
143
~ ~ ~I
Simran and Jaspreet phir saanoo!! ikk maheene vich saara kujh lIekhn haa
painhaa.
"Ii:J!<j
f#m ~
1If'I'I l.I'R
ar'liI ~ ~
<:'H'
UI W
>
Immigration Officer lIillee lie aas paas kaafee kujh lIekhanh vaalaa hai.
anand maanho !
Immigration Officer How long have you been living in America?
Simran
We were born in America.
Immigration Officer How do you know Panjabi so well?
Jaspreet
We only know a little.
Simran
Officer, one request...
Immigration Officer What is it?
Simran
We only have a one-month visa. Could you please
give us permission to slay for two months?
Immigration Officer This is not within my authority. You should have
obtained the visa from America.
Simran and JaspreetIn that case, we'll have to see everything in'a
month.
Immigration Officer There are plenty of things to see around De/hi.
Enjoy yourselves!
Jaspreet and Simran have cleared customs with their luggage and exit
from the arrport. They approach a taxi driver about travelling into the
centre of Delhi.
ilRt{Io
Jaspreet
Taxi driver
fmlon
Simran
201A'l<:'6'
Taxi driver
>lfl'I1' OIO'C \I8>r ire" ~ "'I ~ ~ OR ~ WI' 7

asee!! kanaat pales jaanhaa chaahundeeaan haan. toon
kinne paise lave!! gaa?
- - ~ i'i gufer I
siraf sau rupaiaa.
OIO'C \I8>r ~ JJ/'i a' fo!?oiI CcI U 7
kanaat pales havaaee adde 10!! kinnee lIoor hai?
aOlo1"" ;:ro Hre 5" UI
2'J'iI' l5'Io! fcroiI
>lfl'I1' JJia'a 0'aCc!l ~ fure!!

ffiIr fuU' U'I
Simran
~ ire" U 7
takreeban veeh meel lIoor hai. tuseen theek kihrhee

jag-h-aa jaanhaa hai?
-ire"
U 11 -3 ~ OR
-
asee!! amar raashtaree yuvak hostal jaanhaa hai par lOO!!

ziaagaa paise mang rihaa hain.
'---'-";::"
!OiR1C::'b'
ntiI' ntil'1 II rOlaofe",' lFtl>iI -.!'fRr UI 2'J'iI' E 'R'<:'d'\>lI1

~ a JlH'!'; >:'I ~ UI 2'J'iI' ire" e fol ntiI' 7
Taxi driver
nahee!! nahee!!. mai!! kiraaiaa vaajbee lIassiaa hai.

tuseen go savaareeaan ho !e samaan vee bahul hai.
!Useen jaanhaa e ki nahee!!?
ilRt{Io
iT,
Jaspreet
achchaa, kaahalaa na pao. samaan rakhkh gaddee vich.
Jaspreet
We want to go to Connaught Place. How much will

you charge ?'
Only one hundred rupees.
How far is Connaught Place from the airport?
It's about 20 miles away. Exactly where are you going?
Take us {we want to go] to the Internatiollal Youth
Hostel, but you're asking for too much money.
No, no. /' ve told you the reasonable fare . There are two
of you travelling and there is a lot of luggage. Are you
going or not?
OK. Don't be impatient. Put the luggage in the car.
Taxi driver
Simran
Taxi driver
Simran
Taxi driver
Jaspreet
or<JH' 1"i l.I I JlH'!';
<i'tI
-mn m l
... The language used in this dialogue with the taxi driver may seem a little infonnal
(or even rude) in the English translation. This is because informal speech is
generally used when haggling over the fare with taxi drivers in India and Pakistan
(see Uoil 2: Language poinls: Subject pronouns).
shabdaavalee
amreekaa
chir
kinnaa chir 10!!
janmnhaa
Vocabulary
America (m.)
length of time
since when,for how long
to be born
144
PANJABI
tm~
!l!orhee bahulee
benlee
keval
veezaa
aagiaa
vass
paasport
afsar
saahib
aas paas
kaafee kujh
anand maanho
chaahunhaa
sau
rupaiaa
havaaee addaa
kinnee goor
goor
veeh
meel
jag-h-aa
one hundred
rupees (m.)
airport (m.)
how far
far. distant
twenty
mile. miles (m.)
place. location (f.)
~~
aruar raashatree
international
yuvak
hostal
ziaagaa
mangnhaa
kiraaiaa
vaajbee
youth (m.)
hostel (m.)
>:'Ir.r
lIf'fwIr
>:"R
~
~
ll'futt
rl'I
cr;:'l~
~~
~
ii
('00)
~
~
fc!n1
sa
"I'll'
sa
~ ('10)
HRr
iI<If
fu!C'5
furt!.
~
foRrfer
~
~
JDf'1';
C!"lH'
ill!'
~
~
savaareeaan
samaan
kaahalaa
painhaa
rakhkhnhaa
gaddee
around, around and about
quite a lot. plenty

enjoy yourselves
to want, to need
too much
to request, to ask, to charge
rateJare . rent (m.)

reasonableJair. right
passengers. travellers (f.)
luggage. things (m.)
impatient. hasty (v.)
to act (to fa U)
to put
car. vehicle (f.)
Exercises
abhiaas
more or less, to some extent
request (f.)
only
visa (m.)
permission (f. )
authority. jurisdiction (m.)
passport (m.)
officer (m./f.)
sir (m.)
145
After reading the dialogue and/or listening to the audio tape. try to do the
1. Write in the correct word order

a. U tiil'I3'I ~ ~ tm ~
hai-panjaabee-bahulee-aundee-!I!orhee-saanoon
We only know a lillie Panjabi.
b. ~ "IJif <P ire' ~ 0ll'i'C
pales-aseen-haan-jaanhaa-chaahundeeaan-kanaat
We want to go to Connaught Place.
c.
2"'ff til 'e t!1 ~ ijj li<l'rn ~ oil lIf'fwIr

tuseen-jee-go-gee-gevo-ge-maheene-rahinh-kee-aagiaa
Could you please give us permission to stay for two months?
2. Translate into Panjabi

a. There are two of you travelling and there is a lot of luggage.
b. We only have a one-month visa.
c. Enjoy yourselves!
bolee baare
Language points
Pronouns in the oblique

In Unit 2 personal pronouns were introduced representing the English
equivalents of I, we, you, he, she and they. As with nouns, personal
pronouns also take on the oblique form when followed by postpositions.

The most commonly used postposition with pronouns is fi noon to as is
illustrated. Note that interrogative pronouns such as ik kaunh. who and
<it kee what are also affected by postpositions.
Singular
Oblique
Direct
if
I
you (inf.)
you (form.) 2"'ff
he/shelit
(near)
he/shelit
~
(far)
rev
main
loon
lo me
ih
to you (inf.)
10 you (form.)
to he/shelit
uh
to he/she/it
!useen
Hf!
3?i
mainoon
lainoon
luhaanoon
u'O
fi. ih noon
fuR fi is noon
uh noon
~fi.
us noon
~fi
rev
146
PANJABI
Interrogative pronouns
who
what
ik
oft
kaunh
to whom
fo!R
kee
to what
kis noon
kibnoon
141
pronouns followed by ~ noon. The first and second person pronouns are
changed to the appropriate possessive adjectives while the third person
pronouns ~oHow the same pattem of ~ noon as already shown. Here are
some exam pIes using the postposition 3' lon (from).
lst person
Oblique
Direct
aseen
to us
!useen
to you
~
(J'8
they (near)
JIfJIl
gAl
fuu
ih
to them
~~
they (far)
uh
to them
~~
we
you
Oblique
Direct
Plural
Interrogative pronouns
who
ik
kaunh
what
oft
kee
saanoan
!Dhaanoon
ihnaan noon
uhnaan noon
to whom
fc!mo;i ~
kihnaan noon
to what
fc!mo;i ~
kihnaan noon
The postposition f: noon is used in a number of ways. Generally. it directs

an action, state or object towards the pronoun or noun after which it
follows. Here are a few examples of how ~ noon can be used with
pronouns.
pauiaabee mainoon
thorhee bahulee
aaulli!ee hai
I know Panjabi to
saanoon mithiaaee
pasand hai
We like sweets. (literally:

sweets are liked by us)
loon kihnaan noon

dassiaa see?
Whom did you tell?
some extent.
H'
main
from me
we
JIfJIl
aseen
from us
2nd person
Oblique
Direct
you (inf. )
you (form .)
<ml tuseen
loon
from you (inf.)
~3'
from you (form.)
~3' !Dhaade lon
lere Ion
3rd perso n
Oblique
Direct
he/she/it
(singular, near) fuu
ih
from him/her/it
feH3'
is Ion
he/she/it
(singular, far)
uh
from him/herlit
~3'
us Ion
they
(plural, near)
fuu
ih
from them
they
(plural, far)
uh
from them
~3' uhnaanlon
Hilire ;;rnOj'j
0<J't
<l'l'i
-~
~~
;!'<J ~
There are many other postpositions which are also used with pronouns. 3'
lon, ~ naal, -.:om vaasle, ire kol and mil laee are some commonly
used ones which were introduced in Unit 4. The manner in which the
oblique is formed with these postpositions is noticeably different from
Hil3' mere Ion

Jl'ir3' saade lon
oft gAl Jl'ir

~~
JIfJIl
lW!
-~
O[t.r;!
. ~
3'~
mere kal aine paise

naheen han
uhnaan. vaas!e vee
chaah banhaao
kee iUseen saade
naal aavo ge?
aseen kaprhe ibnaan
lon lillareedaan ge
3'
ibnaan lon
I don't have that
much money.
Make tea for them too .
Will you come with us?
We will buy the
clothes from them.
PANJABI
148
Must, have to
In Panjabi, expressions of compulsion come in three fonns : an intention
to do something, a certainty about doing something and a strong sense of
compulsion about doing something. In each of these cases, it is usually the
infInitive of the verb which directs the action related to the situation.
Often ~ honhaa is used to give a sense of the present or past condition,
depending on which tense of to be is used. The direct form of the pronoun
is used in these cases.
H'
H'
~ ~ main jaanhaa hai I am to go/ I intend to go

~ l'iI main jaanhaa see I should have gone! I was to go/ I had to go
Strong compulsion is indicated by the use of the verb ill!' painhaa (to
fall). This gives a sense of habitual compulsion and is positioned after the
infmitive. Note that the infInitive behaves as the subject in many of these
expressions, and therefore the form of ill!' painhaa generally takes the
singular masculine form (in agreement with the inftnitive). For example:
Hii ua ~ ~ ire' ~
Use of the verb
mainoon har roz jaanhaa

paindaa hai
I have to go
every day.
Il6 ~ ~ ~
Il6 ~ ~ l'iI
should/ought
need/want
Should, ought ~ chaaheellaa as with all other verb formations,

changes according to the subject. In the case of expressions of should and
ought, pronouns followed by postpositions behave like objects (to meJor
me, with them). Therefore, in the case of someone who has to go somewhere, the form of ~ chaaheellaa must be in the singular masculine
form in agreement with the infmitive. Similarly, if the object is feminine
and/or plural, then the form of ~ chaahunhaa, as well as the infInitive would reflect this:
mainoon jaanhaa chaahee!!aa hai I should go

mainoon jaanhaa chaahee!!aa see I should have gone
Care must be taken to identify the object in expressions of ought and

should. In our earlier example, the pronoun served as the object, however
in the following examples the infInitive and the form of ~
chaaheellaa follow the gender and numerical nature of the subject of
obligation which now becomes the object, in the first case tea and in the
second books.
mainoon chaah naheen
peenhee chaahee!!ee
1l6;romft'
~
..rote'!
T<rllUa~
- ~ 0(ju1e1i1f
'U?i
I should not drink tea.
!Uhaanoon hor kilaabaan You should read

parhbneeaan
more books.
chaahee!!eeaan han
To want, to need
Expressions of desire or necessity are also formed

with ~ chaahunhaa. However, the verb is formed according to the
subject ~f the sentence. For example, in Dialogue 2 Jaspreet and Sirnran say
to the taxi driver, We want to go to Connaught Place. This is expressed as:
aseen kanaat pales
jaanhaachaahundeeaan
haan
cbaahunhaa
In Panjabi, expressions such as should/ought and need/want are generally

formed with the verb ~ chaahunhaa (to want, to need). These expressions use the infmitive followed by ~ chaaheellaa, which is the passive form of the verb ~ chaahunhaa. (The passive voice will be
explained in a later unit.) ~ chaaheellaa in the sentence Hi; ~ ~
mainoon chaaheellaa hai literally means it is wanted by me.-However,
the use of ~ chaaheellaa can have two different meanings:
149
We want to go to
Connaught Place.
Notice in this example that >lfl'iI' aseen and ~ <J' chaahunlieeaan

haan are in agreement with each other. Therefore, the subject we dictates
the form of to want. Here are some more examples of expressions of
desire and necessity:
oil ~ >lfHCllolo
~~~?
H<l'TcI'~
;$'~
kee !Useen arnreekaa

jaanhaa chaahunde ho?
Do you want to go
to America?
meraa bharaa parhbnaa

chaahundaa hai
My brother wants
to study.
As with constructions of should and ought the oblique form of pronouns

with the postposition ~ noon are also used in expressing need and want
with the passive of~ chaahunhaa. This may seem confusing but you
will be able to tell from the context of the sentence whether the speaker
means that they need or want something, or that they should or ought to
do something.
150
PANJABI
~ fifo! O!>fur ~ ~ mainoon ikk kameez
~~
cniI;;r
~~
Qj!
~
~ un
chaaheedee hai
un mainoon g~ kameezaan
chaaheegeeaan han
uhnaan noon paise
chaaheede han
I need a shirt.
I need two shirts.
They need money.
Infinitives in the oblique

The pr~sence o~ postpositions after nouns, adjectives and pronouns has
~en discussed ill previous units. You know by now that the fanTIs of
duect nouns, adjectives and pronouns are changed to the oblique when
they are followed by a postposition. The same is true for infInitives. In the
frrst dialogue, Mr Sandhu asks his daughters, 'How much money do you
need to go to India? ' In this sentence 'to go to India' is a phrase which
contams an infInitive followed by a postposition:
W'a3' il'l!
bhaara!jaanh laee
to go to India
The infInitive of the verb to go tI'l!' jaanhaa preceeds the postposition

laee .requITing the infmitive to be in the oblique. The oblique of the
infrrullve IS a shortened form which merely omits the vowel ending",. aa.
Therefore, ~ jaanhaa in the oblique becomes il'l! jaanh. The example
gIven of tI'l!' Jaanhaa IS that of an infInitive with a vowel-ending stem.
Other verbs such as ~ kliareellnhaa, ~ likhnhaa and ~
bolnhaa all have stems which end in consonants. These types of infInitIves also have shortened forms which omit the ",. aa ending making them
~ kliareellanh, fu>R' likhanh and ~ bolanh. Here are some
examples of infmitives in the oblique and how they are formed:
situations. For example, in Dialogue I, Mr Sandhu says tit# I Jlheeo!

which means daughters!. Another more formal setting might be in a meeting in which you wish to address the audience: R i ~ bhainho te
bharaavo (brothers and sisters). The manner in which the vocative case
is formed is quite similar to the plural oblique forms of nouns as shown
in Unit 4, though the vocative case ends with fi 0 and not ~ aan. When the
vocative case is used in reference to singular people, the noun takes on the
ending ~ e for feminine people and the ending",. aa for masculine people:
~I
mundiaa!
!
I
mundio!
bachchio!
kurhee-e!
kurheeo!
gos!o!
l:lfW
'Ii'fW
~I
~I
~I
The ending
He isn't ready [willing]

to give us money.
Time is needed for
travelling.
I have come to meet
afriend.
Vocative case
The vocative case is used when addressing somebody directly or as an
exclamatIon to someone. It can be used in both formal and informal
->:'8'
boy!
boys!
children!
girl!
girls!
friends!
vaalaa
vaalaa is added to nouns and verbs to give two main senses: the one
or ones or about to. The use of -~ vaalaa with nouns expresses a
relationship between the noun and the object or person being referred to.
You will recall in the commentary in Unit 3 that the vegetable seller was
called R"a1 .. '6' sabzeevaalaa and that earlier in this unit the taxi driver was
referred to as 2,,111 .. '6' taikseevaalaa. The ending ->:'8' vaalaa in these
examples has changed the role of the noun through the following pattern:
-aI
->:'8'
-vaalaa
the one
sabzee
vegetable
~
uh saanoon paise denh

noon !iaar nabeen
ghunmanh laee samaan
chaaheegaa hai
main gOS! noon milanh
laee aaee haan
151
taiksee
taxi
sabzeevaalaa
vegetable seller
->:'8'
eocmc'8'
-vaalaa
the one
taikseevaalaa
taxi driver
Here are ' some more examples of this type of use of the ending ->:'8'
vaalaa with nouns:
6:(;6<'8'
~
~
R''I1'''61
1lRI':'h'
i<R
laahaurvaalee aura!
pindvaalaa
paisevaale
saarhheevaalee
gharvaalaa
the woman from Lahore

villager
wealthy people
the one wearing the sari
husband
152
PANJABI
Note that like other endings or adjectives, the ending -~ vaalaa changes
accordmg to the gender and number of the persons or objects being
referred to.
The second meaning produced by the ending -~ vaalaa is about to or
on the point of doing. This is created when -~ vaalaa is used with the
oblique of the infmitive. The form resembles that of the oblique infmitive
(or shortened form ) used with postpositions presented earlier in this unit.
Here are some examples of how this meaning is constructed:
~~
iR!
<:'5
They are about to

vaale han
go to India.
main !uhaanoon chiththee I was about to write
likhanh vaalee see
you a feller.
Wi uh bhaara! jaanh
kurheeaan aaunh
vaaleeaan san
main ki!aab parhhanh
vaalaa haa!!
The girls were about

to come.
I am about to read
the book.
The ending -~ vaalaa used with oblique infmitives can also have the
same meaning as that when used with nouns such as re'>i ~ ~ iththe
rahinh vaalaa the one who lives here or ~ ore?; <:'5 kanm karan vaale
the ones who work or working people. Once you understand how to use
the ending -~ vaalaa , you will find it a very useful tool when referring
to people and objects as well as to actions that are about to happen.
viaakhiaa
Commentary
1. I like it!
Fondness is shown in Panjabi in a number of ways. Depending upon the
degree of liking and context, fo ndness can be expressed through:
.
~ pasawl means pleasing or like

iic! shank means fondness or enjoyment
~ laggnhaa means seems (e.g. it seems nice/bad)
Therefore,. expressions of fondness generally require the use of ~ noon in
order to drrect the feelmgs or emotions towards the person. A sentence
such a s I like ban~na: :"ould translate directly into Panjabi as Bananas
are liked by me. ~ OR; ~ Wi mainoon kele pasawl han, thereby
153
making bananas the subject and me the object. Another way of using ~
pasawl is in combination with 0Rf<"i' karnaa. The use of 0Rf<"i' karnaa
gives an added sense of habituality, such as I generally like bananas or I
always like bananas in H' ~ ~ ~ Ollre' <Ji main keliaan noon
pasawl karllaa haan. ~ laggnhaa (to seem) is a less specific word
which requires the use of a qualifying adjective such as good, bad, tasty
or ugly, in order to express how something seems. IT you were to say this
~~~
food is good one way in Panjabi to express this would be
!I"ari!' ih khaanhaa mainoon changaa laggllaa hai (literally, this food
seems good to me). Here are a few more examples:
reu
~1iw<:J~
?iic!u
>lfI'Il fi.ff'oriI (~)
~ or<:R <Ji
~~?;
~-~Wi
mainoon si!aar vajaaunh

gaa shauk hai
I enjoy playing the
asee!! mithiaaee noon
We like sweets.
sitar.
pasand karge haan
t3sveeraan uhnaan
noon changeeaan
They like the

pictures.
lagggeeaan han
2. Usefulness of Panjabi in South Asia

Despite the fact that Hindi and Urdu are the national languages of India
and Pakistan respectively, in practice once you leave the urban centres
regional languages come to the fore. Panjabi has a unique position in the
languages of North India and Pakistan, in that it has a large usage in
the urban centres. In Lahore and throughout much of Pakistan, Panjabi is
the language of the people and is spoken widely and understood almost
universally. Furthermore, in Delhi many taxi drivers, rickshaw vaalaas
and bus drivers tend to speak Panjabi (sometimes a few words may save
the passenger from being overcharged! ).
Taxi drivers are notorious in the sub-continent for overcharging and

haggling with customers. Even though many main tourist resorts and
public transport centres such as railway stations and airports now operate
a prepayment system, there are still many occasions where unsuspecting
travellers will be caught unaware. This has to be accepted as one of the
many facets of travel to the sub-continent and should not cause frustration
or anguish. On a more positive front, the fun of haggling, as you will see
in the next unit, is a must when shopping.
154
PANJABI
155
3. Use of vaalaa
3. Music in Panjab
Panjab is well known for folk music (as we shall see in Unit 16), however,
there is a long tradition of classical music in Panjab. The world-renowned
tabla player, Zakheer Hussain comes from the tradition of the Panjabi
gharana, which reflects a particular type of musical style and a particular
rhythmic form known as ~ kairvaa, which is an eight-beat cycle. One
other musical form which crosses over the classical and popular is
the Qawaali, made popular internationally by the late Nusrat Fateh Ali
Khan. The Panjabi Qawaals sung by Khan are some of the most popular
tunes throughout Panjab, and the elegant, poetic language is quite easy to
understand.
From the following equations work out what the words using the ending
-~are.
a)
=
-
b)
c)
H'l!W!TP"
.j
"""
,.,
[husband)
- , ...OY"
.0;;
fU;,
. driver)
[taxI
..
t6
'.' .:.~. :"Pl' vegetable vendor)
l-::,.-- -~ ~ .~.; :'
!El4. Listening comprehension

abhiaas
You are having a conversation with a taxi driver. Listen to the recording
on the audio tape and then answer the following questions.
Exercises
following excercises.

a) ~ ~ _ _ _
UI mainoon kilaab _ _ _ hai. I want a book.
b) ~ ~ _ _ UI mainoonjaarthaa _ _ hai.
c) ~
f1:!3'<'I _ _ _
;;!'
Be! UI mainoon sitaar _ _ _ yaa shauk hai.
I like playing the sitar.
2. Translation
Say the following English sentences in Panjabi.
a)
b)
c)
d)
I should go.
What does he want?

Daughters! What do you want?
Whom did you tell?
Should we go?
How many passengers?

Where are you travelling to?
How much is the fare?
How far is the hotel?
How much luggage?
Do you accept the taxi ride?
OUR CLOTH IS THE BEST!
157
mt oru3
~UI
H?;
saadaa kaprhaa sabh

ton vadheeaa hair
Our cloth is the best!
-mr ~ U tm 0ItIlI' mt i' AC' W
Slmran
mainoon is kaprhe lIaa rang pasand hai par kaprhaa is lon

motaa honhaa chaaheellaa hai.
.6t'Oe'd
'A'ir ~ mt i' trn'!' .:I i i AC' .:II ~ lI'il <it ~ erel
Shopkeeper
saade kol is Ion pallaa vee hai !e motaa vee. !Useen chaape
lIee chonh karo.
iIJ!\{Ia', ~ fcro;p ~ ~ ~ U, l'l'5 ; o'tHo ?
jaspreel, lainoon kihrhaa vadhere changaa laggllaa hai,
laal jaan neelaa?
fRHa;o;
Slmran
o'tHo 0ItIlI' l'l'5 oru3 i' trn'!' i,

B<JC!' UI
how to compare things

how to talk about your health
how to express actions which you can and cannot do
how to express actions which have already occurred
tzll Our cloth is the best!

I'!l 'ai'5 if'3' 'I l'I'lir CMI" m i' ~ U I
gall baat I saadaa kaprhaa sabh ton
vadheeaa hai!
Jaspreet and Simran have arrived in Delhi and are shopping in Karol
Bagh, a popular place in Delhi to buy ready-made clothing as well as
unstitched cloth. They are just entering a materia! shop where the
shopkeeper greets them.
leo w , h till J'I'<iI fu"ffi m WlJ' 0ItIlI' _ i' ~ UI

Shopkeeper andar aao, bhainh jee. saaree lIillee vich saadaa kaprhaa
sabh lon vadbeeaa hai!
iIJ!\{Ia'
~ ~ 0ItIlI' ~ U ftm 1!' i'M oi'H c>:'i! UI
Jaspreet
saanoon hapaaeevaalaa kaprhaa chaaheella;hai jis lIaa
ajj kallh ravaaj hai.
more ~ ere I II i! '''is ~
1!'
0ItIlI'
~ fa<!' :a-a
d"",A'a U ~ _ i' .:'tI ~ UI

Shopkeeper fIkar naa karo! main lOhaanoon uh kaprhaa lIikhaa ribaa
haan jihrhaa vadhere handbanhsaar hai ate sabh ton
- vadhdh vikllaa hai.
(The shopkeeper shows the girls some cloth pieces)
Jaspreet
tm
fcFol
.m "ffl' _
i'
fRHa;o;
Slmran
neelaa kaprhaa laa! kaprhe lon pallaa hai, par phikke rang
vaalaa sabh Ion snhnhaa hai.
feu 0ItIlI' m 1!' Hrea U ?
ih kaprhaa kinne lIaa meetar hai?
ICIi'ne'd
ft!'ot H .:tu
Shopkeeper
fRHa;o;
ikk sau veeh rupae lIaa meetar.

feu oiIHa' tIiFJ fuI'C' UI 1IfA'f
~ :'I ore'! ~ i
fuI'C'
Slmran
tI'
~ ofuaI tIiFJ
<J?;I
ih keemal bahul ziaallaa hai. aseen hor vee kaee

lIukaanaan Ie jaa chukeeaan haan ale uhnaan lie mukaable
vich lOhaadeeaan keemalaan bahul ziaallaa han.
g'CIC'ne'd
Hf! ~ U for II oiIHa' Ua uk mil' Old 'AOR'I
Shopkeeper
mainoon afsos hai ki main keemal hor ghat! naheen kar

sakll>a.
Shopkeeper
Jaspreet
Shopkeeper
Come in, sisters! Our cloth is the best in all of Delhi!

We want printed cloth that's in fashion these days.
Don't worry. What /' m showing you is cloth that is
durable and sells a lot.
I like the colour, but the material should be thicker than
this.
We have thinner and also thicker than this. Choose
whatever print you like.
Jaspreet, which do you like better, red or blue?
The blue is thinner than the red, but the light-coloured
one is the nicest.
Slmran
Shopkeeper
Slmran
Jaspreet
158
PANJABI
Simran
Shopkeeper
Simran
The price is too high. We've been to several other shops
Shopkeeper
I'm sorry but (that) I can't lower the price any more.
How much is this cloth per metre?
shabdaavalee
-aar
gukaangaar
kaprhaa
sabh lon vadheeaa
chapaaeevaalaa
jis
ravaaj
ajj kallh
gikhaaunhaa
jihrhaa
handhanhsaar
chalnhaa
viknhaa
rang
motaa
Oltr.!'
m 3' ~
fuR
~
I'M ~
f'tro;p
UeER'd
~
\I<re'
pallaa
chaape
chonh
kihrhaa
vadhere
laal
ril
~
f'cro;p
~
8'8
~
"'
fi:i'cr
~
fWi
t!'
fti'o! j'j
lika ?
>:m
cOm
iI<Ja' ~
ore!
neelaa
joan
phikkaa
snhnhaa
kinne gaa meetar?
ikk sau veeh
keemal
bahul ziaagaa
kaee
chuknhaa
Vocabulary
shopkeeper (m.)
cloth (m.)
the best
the printed one (m.)
which (oblique)
fashion (m.)
these days
to show
that, which
durable, hardwearing
to go
to be sold
colour (m.)
fat, thick (v.)
thin (v.)
print (m.)
choice, selection (f.)
which
more
red
blue (v.)
or
light, pale (v.)
nice, pretty (v.)
how much per metre?
one hundred and twenty
price (f.)
far too much
several
to be settled, finished
have (already) been
jaa chuknhaa
mukaablaa
vadhdh
ghatt
saknhaa
One hundred and twenty rupees p er metre.

and in comparison with them , your prices are very high.
!;,ClC'ne 'a
159
OUR e LOTH IS THE BESTI
abhiaas
competition
high
less, lower
can, to be able to
Exercises
After readmg the dialogue and/or listening to the audio tape, try to do the
Lin the cloth shop

You are in a cloth shop telling the sales person exactly what you are looking for. Ex press the following in Panjabi:
a)
b)
c)
d)
I want light-coloured cloth.

I want material that is thick and also durable.
The print should be in fashion.
The price should not be too high.

~
better
keema!
!:fO!"R!'
sabh lon vadheeaa
iZ' 2 What's the problem?

~ l3'3' =! cfI 30Ihl;: ~ ?
gall baat 2 kee takleef hai?
On their way back from the market place in Delhi, Simran and
~aspre~t
had some snacks at a roadside restaurant, commonly known as a dhaba .

On their way back to their hotel Sirnran begins to feel ill and has gone to
visit the doctor.
160
rorea
PANJABI
ijiI,
oil
y OUR CLOTH
b
l'i'R>
in:
fu>i'C! ~ ~ ufuH 1 oil ~
>I'Q'
JiI ?
lif'C n.:rr t.RI
~ ~ tilr
mw >Ii13 lll'it! Wil
....m
~I
dhannvaag.
Doctor
Simran
Doctor
Simran
Doctor
Simran
Doctor
Dear (daughter) , what's the problem?

I'm not feeling well (literally: my health is bad).
Do you have a fever?
Yes. I feel cold, I have a stomach ache and r m also weak.
Before falling ill, what did you eat?
I don't remember, but I like the corn on the cob here a lot.
Now I understand. People who come from abroad can't digest
the food here. Take this medicine, rest, alld stay away from
corn on the cob!
Thank you.
Simran
shabdaavalee
lakleef
labeeal
bukhaar
Vocabulary
Ui!H
~
>m'>!
araam
davaaee
1I111fs!'l'I
abhiaas
cold (f.)
to feel
stomach, belly (m.)
pain , hurt (f.)
weakness (f.)
ill, sick
before falling ill
memory, remember (f.)
corn on the cob (f.)
to understand!
comprehend
from outside! from abroad
Indian , Panjabi, home
digest
far!away
rest (m.)
medicine (f.)
Exercises
1. Write in the correct word order

II.
b.
c.
e ~ oil?
e ~ oil ~ ?
RHfsr
Ii'
hai lakleef kee?

hai lainoon kee bukhaar?
samajhiaa hunh main

Fill in the blanks with the correct terms from the dialogue. The English
has been given in brackets, although not necessarily in the correct order.
You :
trouble, irritation, bother (f.)

state of health, condition (f.)
f ever/temperature (m.)
baahron
gesi
hazam
goor
iIll
daaklar hunh main sarnajhiaa. jihrhe 10k baahron aaunde han,

uhnaan noongesee khaanhaa hazam naheen hundaa. ih lavo
gavaaee, araam karo, !e challeeaan ton goor ravo!
f'l:nreo
..ro;;
= Ii' ~I ~ 8c! ~ ~ Wi, ~ i; ~ 'R'
simran
bimaar
bimaar honh
Ion pahile
yaag
challee
samajhnhaa
n'I
mainoon yaag naheen par mainoon iththongeeaan challeeaan

bahul pasan!! han.
~n.:rr~1 ~~~, ~aRii~~so~
karnzoree
'II't!
daaktar bimaar honh Ion pahile loon kee kujh khaadhaa see?
f'l:nreo
thand
laggnhaa
pet
garg
II>fiIal
fIW<I
fIW<I ~
mainoon karnzoree vee haL
simran
161
e?
daaklar betee, kee lakleef hai?

f'l:nreo H<il ~ lffl'a el
simran meree labeeal kharaab hai.
rorea
oiI~~e ?
daaklar kee lainoon bukhaar hai?
f'l:nreo ur till iii; -& H'ar otiI e, lie ~ ~ e S iii; ~ >:l el
simran haan jee~ mainoon thand lagg rahee hai, pet vich-garg hai ale
rorea
IS THE BESTI
Dr:
lffl'a el (health)
meree _ _ kharab haL
oil __ ? (problem)
kee
hai ?
162
You:
Dr:
You:
Dr:
PANJABI
Ha_m _ u~~_.:Iul
(pain, fever, stomach)

mere _ _ vich _ _ hai ale mainoon _ _ vee hai.
~ _ _ u ~ __ l'I"il! <ro'I u ? (fever, cold)
!ainoon _ _ baite _ _ lagg rabee hai ?
<P n'I
haan jee
feu __ ~ ~ __ orel (rest, medicine)
ih
lavo !e
karo.
bolee baare
Language points
Comparison of adjectives
fuR a' / ~ liC' is toni naalon motaa
thicker than this

~ a' / ~ l.I<R!' us toni naalon patlaa
thinner that that
~ a'H a' l'!liI' U raam sbaam ton !anbaa bai Ram is taller than Sham.
~ vallhere and ~ ziaaliaa, which mean much or more are also

used when making comparisons, especially when the object or objects
being referred to are absent. The literal translations in Panjabi of better
~ changeraa and tallerl/onger
lanberaa are also occasionally
used in a similar manner. Note in the following examples how adjectives
such as tall are changed to comparisons such as tailer:
mra-
feu
feu
0Ilr.I' ;fur U
0Ilr.I' ~ U
~ 0IHa' l'!liI' I
0IHa'
OUR CLOTH IS THE BESTI
raam lanbaa hai

raam ziaagaa lanbaa hai
raam vadhere lanbaa hai
ih kaprhaa changaa hai
ih kaprhaa changeraa hai
uh karnraa lanbaa hai
uh karnraa lanberaa hai
Ram is tall.
Ram is taller.
Ram is tailer.
this cloth is good
this cloth is better
that room is long
that room is longer
In English the superlative degree is generally expressed with the ending

"st, such as tailest, biggest and nicest. In Panjabi the superlative degree
uses the words mr sabb, ~ sabbnaan, and 1'1'6 saare which mean all
163
or whole with the postpositions ~ naalon and a' ton, to give the over1111 sense out of all or of all.
The superlative' the best' in Panjabi would literally translate as out of all
the best in English:
"... a' ;Jar 0Ilr.I'
sabb ton changaa kaprhaa the best cloth
To say that something is even better or even taller, fu .:I bor vee, meanIng more and a/so, is used. Here are some examples of a variety of
different uses of comparison and superlative degrees:
fu~mr~
mu
When people or things are compared in Panjabi in tenns of quality,

size, number and price, there are no direct translations of the English
expressions 'good better best' or 'big bigger biggest'. Instead the
postpositions ~ naalon (than) and a' ton (from) are commonly used to
express comparison such as 'more __ ' or ' _ _ than'. For example:
~ l'!liI' U
~ ~ l'!liI' U
~ ~ l'!liI' U
8Ha 1'1'6
~
l'!liI' I
~ ~
>fi!' mr a'
!l"f"! ~ U
~~>fi!'fu
!l"f"! ~ U
.:I
saknhaa,
uh kurhee sabh
naalon chotee hai
ramesh saare bharaavaan
naalonlanbaa hai
uhnaan gaa khaanhaa sabh
lon suaag hundaa hai
uhnaan gaa khaanhaa hor
vee suaag hundaa hai
This girl is the

smallest.
Ramesh is the tallest
of the brothers.
Their food is the
tastiest.
Their food is even
tastier.
'can and can't'
You will recall in the flrst dialogue that during the bargaining over the
price of the cloth, the shopkeeper said to 5inuan and l aspreet:
H' oiIHa' fu life odI'

CRI
l'IOr.!'
main keema! hor ghatt

nabeen kar sakgaa
I can't lower the

price any further.
He expressed his inability (or unwillingness!) to lower the price by saying

I can't. In Panjabi 'ROr.!' saknbaa is used in combination with the stem of
the verb portraying the action which can or cannot be done. In this
example, the shopkeeper is saying that he can't (i.e. is not able to) lower
the price. Therefore, the stem of ure<!' ghattthaa (to decrease, to lower) is
used with the negative odI' naheen to give the expression can't lower.
Alternatively, if he had wanted to say I can lower the price, the negative
!roT naheen would simply have been omitted. The fonn of ~ saknbaa
is always in agreement with the subject. Here are some more examples to
illustrate how this construction is fonned:
aseen panjaabee bol
sakgeeaan haan
We can speak Panjabi.
164
PANJABI
"
"r ~ore
i'7-
kee !Useen kaUh

noon aa sako ge?
main gaa naheen
saklIee
cit a'Jil'
H'
n.:iI' Jrore't
Will you be able to

come tomorrow?
I cannot sing.
You should remember that ~ saknhaa never stands on its own

and therefore always requires the stem, even when giving a reply to a
question:
Question -
cit
011! fi
kee !USeen kallh

Can you come
noon aa saklie ho?
tomorrow?
If'
haan jee, main aa
Yes, I can (come).
Jrore't/"FIOR' If'~
Reply~
chuknhaa,
57
'already completed'
The stem of a verb followed by ~ chuknhaa means to have already

done or 10 have finished doing. This type of construction with ~
chuknhaa is formed in a fashion similar to that of'ROR:' saknhaa as just
described. ~ chuknhaa also cannot stand alone and requires a
preceding stem to indicate the action that has already occurred.
H' >t'l!Ol' <i
main khaa chnkaa haan I have (already) eaten.
~ if' l!Ol'
jasbeer jaa chnkaa see
~ 'R'61r ~ kurheeaan saareeaan
"'! ~ <Jl'I
k:i!aabaan parhb
lIflit' ' " if' !!iii <i
chnkeeaan han
aseen uththe jaa chnke
haan
lasbir had (already) gone.

The girls have (already)
read all of the books.
We have (already)
been there.
The relative pronouns f;ro;r jihrhaa and ii jo

The English relative pronouns that and which are used to form relative
clauses following a pattern which relates the relative pronouns back to the
subject, such as The woman who came today teaches Urdu. In Panjabi this
sentence would be constructed in a rather different manner: That woman
who came today, she teaches Urdu. In this example, that is the relative
pronoun and she is the correlative pronoun. Another example of an
English relative clause translated into Panjabi would be: Go to the shop
which (that) is closest. In Panjabi this sentence would be expressed as:
Which shop is closest, go to that one. In this example, which is the
relative pronoun and that one is the correlative pronoun.
OUR CLOTH IS THE BESTI
165
In Panjabi, the relative pronoun and adjective f;ro;r jihrhaa is used to

represent words such as that, which, those, he, she and who and changes
.ccording to the gender and number of the objects being referred to. The
relative pronoun it jo means whatever or whoever and is used when
referring to more abstract people and things. Often, the presence of the
relative pronoun in the English translation is simply understood. Here are
some examples of the ways in which relative clauses are formed with
f'IIUl!' jihrhaa and ii jo:
tI ~ ~ ofu!ou jo kujh !Useen kee!aa hai,

~l5lor~u
mr
~
~<Jl'I,~
~ mIH
n.:iI'~
ftroii
fi
f'IIUl!' r<!HI I'M
...re.r m, ~ 011!
n.:iI' >If' l'fcmo
Whatever you've done
mainoon theek laggllaa hai looks fine to me.

jihrhe 10k baahron aaunde [Those] people who
han, uhnaan. noon
come from abroad
khaanhaa hazam nabeen
can't digest the food.
hundaa
That man who came
jihrhaa aallmee ajj aaiaa
today will not be able
see, uh kallh nabeen
to come tomorrow.
aa sakegaa
Like other adjectives and pronouns in Panjabi, relative pronouns change

their form in the oblique. In the singular f;ro;r jihrhaa takes the oblique
form f;m jis and in the plural it becomes ~ jihnaan followed by the
appropriate postposition. Here are some examples of the oblique forms of
the relative pronoun f;ro;r jihrhaa:
"fJff
~ ~
1IRI
(The people) whose

house we went to
lie han
are from Rawalpindi.
JIS Janaanee noon
Ask the lady who
panjaabee aaundee hai,
knows Panjabi.
aseen jinnaan lie ghar
e m, ~ ~ ge see, uh raavalpindee
~ <Jl'I
M<WI'I "
~ ~ U,
iro " .ri
fHR i ~ m
~ ~ <qfcI U
f;m
More uses of
uh noon puchcho
jis noon pa!aa see
uh lIaa kasoor hai
He [who knew] was

aware; it's his fault.
fi noon
By now you should be beginning to feel acquainted with the significance

of postpositions in Panjabi. In Unit 4 simple postpositions were
introduced as they affect nouns and adjectives in the oblique. In Unit 8 the
IWO sisters Simran and Jaspreet illustrated in the dialogues some further
PANJABI
166
uses of the postposition ~ noo!! in expressing likes and dislikes, want,

need, should and ought. In this unit more uses of ~ noon have already
been exemplified in the second dialogue, in which Simran and the doctor
discuss health conditions. ~ noon literally means to and directs the
condition or state towards the person or pronoun it governs. It is used in a
number of different senses ranging from awareness and health to feelings.
Therefore, when the doctor asks Simran cit ~ ~ ~? kee tainoo!!

bu!illaar hai? he is literally asking Is there afever to you? Here are some
more examples of how ~ noon can be used in this sense:
~ ~ ~
mainoon bukhaar hai

saanoon thand lagg rahee hai
mainoon afsos hai
Iro fI @HR
uh noon umee"- hai
~ t!' 0<lT uhnaan noon pa!aa naheen
Ail ~ ~
mainoon zukaam hai
~ t!' ~ fq !uhaanoon koee pa!aa hai
~ f'ci'<l
?
ki ikbaal kiththe hai?
~ ~ ~ ~
sanoon bahu! khushee hai
"'" 53 ~ .rot e
~ "Ii:RJ:I ~
"u'B
viaakhiaa
I have a fever.
We are feeling cold.
I am sorry.
He/she hopes.
They do not know.
I have a cold.
Do you have any idea
where Iqbal is?
We are very happy.
167
2. Clothes people wear

There are various forms of dress worn by Panjabis. Perhaps the most
popular form is the salwaar kameez (shalwaar kameez in West Panjab).
'This form of dress is now ubiquitous in almost all of South Asta, but tt tS
most popular in Pakistan Panjab, where both men and women wear it.
Traditionally, women in rural Panjab would wear a flowtng skirt - ghagra
_ and a blouse, although this is a rare sight in contemporary PanJab.
Women may wear a sari for special occasions and Christian women often
wear dresses as a way of distinguishing themselves. Male dress was traditionally a turban with a flowing top shirt and a wrap called a lungt or
dhoti around the legs. However, western dress is increasingly popular. The
following pictures illustrate the various forms of dress.
Commentary
1. Parts of the body

'1/'>1
a
b
c
d
"""
1ju
~
- rna
'd"I
f
g
h
1II<fi!l';
~
stu
J
k
.-it
m
n
'Ih
iB'
ila
\hi
abhiaas
Exercises
168
PANJABI
169
1. Word search
3 . Write sentences in Panjabi
The following words are hidden in the 'word search' boxes below. In the
first box they are hidden horizontally and in the second they are hidden
vertically.
Express the following sentences in Panjabi using either !!OlC' chuknhaa

or ACIC' saknhaa:
~, ~, 0llS', !!6('rie'd,
i
ii
E
~
'I
faHoc,
c
or
~, '<fe, ~,
tit
oiIH3, d"cA'd
"'
lJ
oil
It)
b)
c)
d)
1.l
....
'Ii
t!'
t}
ir'
i)
Insert the correct forms of the relative pronouns ii jo, fir.:Jl'I' jihrhaa and
f'RR jis:
oil
}f
'3
lJ
'Ii
H
/'Ii
or
'iJ
}f
j;j
"c
al
1'1'
ijj
4. Relative pronouns
a)
li'
!!
li'
....
a
e
a
al
b)
e)
2. Talking to the doctor
I feel cold.
b.
d)
I have a
headache.
d.
I have a
stomach ache.
I have a fever.
."".
1If'eliIll/'R 1.l'f6(A3'ri hPlr i, ~ Ha< """ il

- - -- - aa!lmee ajj paakistaan giaa bai, uh meraa ehaaehaa hai.
The man who went to Pakistan today is my uncle.
~ 1.l3' i, ~ i! g'il
- - - - - n o o ! ! pa!aa hai, uh noo!! pueheho.
Ask the person who knows.
Her M ffiI
ar.re <In ~ ~ Rfua l.lJt.! ntil'1
- - - - - Iok pi!!d vieh rahinde han uhnaan noo!!

shahir pasand nahee!!,
People who live in the vii/age don't like the city.
Look at the pictures and tell how each person would respond in Panjabi to
the doctor's question: oil ~ i? What's the problem?
a.
Can you speak Panjabi?

We've already been there.
They have already eaten.
;p
3-
e
a
e
I can't come tomorrow.
~ wff ~ u ~ jffl m ~ il
- -- - - kujh !Usee!! ehaahunde ho uh mere laee theek hai.
Whatever you want is fine with me.
lOA DAY IN THE VilLAGE
~funM~
10 ikk
din pind vich

A day in the village
H'
m!
forRH
171
>R >!'ii,
H' f>nf'd
tid'
are'! ml
~ m ~ ~ " ~ 'i!'rel R'a'll

main har leisam ge khaanhe khaadhe par main birnaar ho gaee
see. phir main daaktar kol gaee ale us ne mainoon davaaee
dittee.
m, H' Tcred
Simran
~ a fcI
= ~ ~ tf for@' fcI >IIJll' >J/'n mr
~ ~ ~ ai fe<J """" ~ !4'H ~ a I
umeeg hai k:i hunh loon theek hain leion k:i aseen ali sar-h-on
gaa saag Ie millee gee rotee banhaaee hai. ih panjaab gee
khaas sugaal hai!
Aunt
Jaspreet
How was your tour of Delhi?

It was very nice. One day I went around Old Delhi. I saw the
Red Fort and Sees Ganj Gurdwara. That was the best day I
had. I also bought a sitar from Chandni Chowk market.
What else did you buy?
Aunty Ji, I bought clothes and shoes too!
Simran, what did you do?
I ate every type offood, but I fell ill. Then I went to the
doctor and he gave me some medicine.
I hope you're fine now since today we've made sarho!! @q.
saag and makkee !l.ee rotee. This is a speciality of Panjab!
til What else did you buy?

m, cit ~~?
gall baa! !OOD hor kee kujh khareediaa?
Aunt
Jaspreet
Aunt
Simran
Jaspreet and Simran have arrived at their relatives' house in Jalandhar after
their tour of Delhi. Their aunt is asking them about their stay in Delhi.
Aunt
I!l~ 'S'3' ~
T<l'iI r.rm e'I Ha ~ cro'I 7
Aunt (chaachee) tuhaadee gillee gee sair leiven rahee?
'RUiI cro'Il te'c! re... H' yCI'iI r.rm m >i/Hli 8'l'l'

r.iW ~ 'Iful ~ ola" ..'a' ~I tro re... m ~ ;jam
~I H' ~ ~ 'EIB'd ~ ~ >:'t ~I
bahul suhnhee rahee. ikk !!in main puraanhee gillee vich
>roo
Jaspreet
ghunmee. laal kilhaa ale sees ganj gurgavaaraa gekhiaa.

uh gin sabh Ion changaa guzriaa. main chaandnee
chaunk bazaar Ion silaar vee khareel!ee.
~
ire oil 0!1iI' ..elf"..,. 7
Aunt
Ymn hor k~ kujh khareel!iaa?
iIJIl.{b
Jaspreet
~
Aunt
til, H' ortf.t ..are i
B'al >:'t ~I
chaachee jee, main kaprhe khareege Ie junee vee

khareel!ee.
fmfa<o;, '! oil oiIa" 7
simran, loon kee kee!aa?
i >foil
Aunt

about Panjabi village life
how to talk about things you've done and seen
'i!' Jl'dI'
BI:1t!'<:m
shabdaavalee
Aa
sair
BUit
suhnhee
yCI'iI
yCI'iI
r.rm
fcRr
,jar
h
'EIB'd
~
mO!1il'
if'"
'Qd
puraanhee
puraanhee gillee
kilhaa
changaa
guzarnhaa
chaandanee
chaunk
bazaar
k!!areel!nhaa
kee kujh
kaprhe
junee
har
Vocabulary
tour, trip (f.)

nice, pretty (v.)
old (v.)
Old Delhi (f.)
fort (m.)
good (v.)
to be spent, to go by
moonlight
roundabout, circle, centre (m.)
bazaar (m.)
to buy
what else
clothes (m.)
shaes (f.)
each, every
172
PANJABI
fctm.f
<R! fctm.f
kisam
~ 1d har kisam lie khaanhe
lI<!
par
umeel!
~
kion ki
~fa!
Jf.f;!,lN
sarhon lIaa saag
ll'oiI 1!'1
makkee lIee rotee
banhaaunhaa
~
:>f'I'I
khaas
sugaal
~
:>f'I'I ~
khaas sugaa!
abhiaas
type
every type offood
but
hope, wish (f.)
because, since
mustard leaves (m.)
unleavened corn bread (f.)
to make
special
gift (f.)
speciality (f.)
Exercises
1. True or false?
a. """ i!RI{Io ~ fRH<!?; ~ r.re'\ 1!'1 fie ~ yo. cr.:fIJilI
chaachee jaspreel Ie simran noon lIillee lIee sair baare
puchch rahee see.
b. """ i< ~ ~ f'oroo fa! fu>lf'i!' ill'!' n.ff ~ ~
chaachee ne kurheeaan noon kihaa ki ziaallaa paisaa
naheen kharchnhaa chaaheellaa.
c. fRH<!?; iiRH OR! iil fuH'<! <JTe'I Jill
simran mausam kar ke bimaar ho gaee see.
True I False
True I False
True I False
2. Match the responses appropriate to the questions

a) ~ ~ cilll'S' "a1fe..' 7
i) ~ ~ cr.:fI
bahul suhnhee rahee
b) ~ fuH'<! ~
Jil 7
ii) H' <R! fctm.f ~ 1d >riI
loon bimaar kiun ho gaee see?
main har kisam lie khaanhe khadhe
c) r.re'\ 1!'1 fie fiR' cr.:fI7
iii) H' ortf.I ..are ~ !fiI >:1 ~
lIillee lIee sair kiven rahee?
main kaprhe khareege 1e ju!!ee
vee khareellee
d) r.re'\
~ cilll'S' ~ 7 iv) H' H'5 foRr lIS l'ilR iM ,!!de"'d'
loon hor kee kujh khareelliaa?
um
gillee vich tuseen kee kujh

lIekhiaa?
Passage: A day in the village

~: re'cf fu?; ft'hJ m
pairaa: ikk din pind vich
I,spreet and Simran have gone to their mother's family's village after
having seen their father's relatives in lalandhar. The following passage is
n page from laspreet's diary. She has written about the day that she and
her sister spent in the village.
shabdaavalee
28 June
main laal kilhaa ale sees ganj

gurQavaaraa gekhiaa
173
lOA DAY IN THE VILLAGE
Vocabulary
174
PANJABI
175
28 J...
is'
aseen ajj jaJandhar ho ke naanke pi!ld gaeeaan. saare saanODn piaar naal mile. soode
maamaa jee naaoaa jee 1e naanee jee ge kol rahinde han. uhnaan ne saanoon saaraa
\lfum .ret
lhr
pind 4ikhaaiaa. aseen taraiktar!e charhneeaan ale khe!aan vich ghunmeea<l!!. aseen
T<f<'i'
khooh le ruke. main khooh pahilee vaaree vekhiaa. siIIlT3n majhjh noon 4ekh ke dar
fi!"c!
gaee !e ikk gam daurh gaee. khooh fie naal ikk bandaa ganne fie ras ton gurh banhaa
rihaa see. shaam noonjagon asee!! vaapas aae taan maamee jee ne saanoon rolee
khuaaee. us ton baa-a-g vihrhe vich aseen oaanee jee kolan puraanheeaan kahaanheeaan
sunheeaan raat noon saariaa ne garam Qudhdh peetaa ale phir saUD gae. pind 4aa
t!H
b
>ii!'
-J/no
khel
khooh
pahilee vaaree
majhjh
darnaa
ikkgarn
gaurh
bandaa
gannaa
gurh
vaapas
!T'!
l;'1.Il'!
laan
&t
rotee
khuaaee
us lOll baa-a-g
vihrhaa
kahaanhee
gararn
gudhdh
saunhaa
maahaul
maahaul mainoon bahu! pasand haL
~ ~
f=p
or<l'iI
rc!Ii
t< rJ.t "" .tt "" '" de
w.re
lE('7>f;;!
land,field (m.)
water well (m.)
first time
buffalo (f.)
to be scared
immediately, at once
to run
man (m.)
sugarcane (m.)
brown sugar cake (m.)
return , back to
then
food (literally: unleavened bread
which is part of the staple diet of
Panjab) (0
to feed
after that
courtyard (m.l
story (0
warm, hot
milk (m.l
to sleep
atmosphere. environment (m.)
l!:I After reading the passage and/or listening to the audio tape, try to do the
1. Answer the following questions about the passage
P!a >Iffs>lf'R
O'nii M!
Ii.P>ro
~
~
~
abhiaas
Exercises
a. iIRt{hr .3 fRHan E li'l-i' ;:i! ~ ~ <If<re "'" ?

jaspreelle simran ge maarnaa jee kihnaan kol rahinde han?
b. f't!mr >ii!' ~ E ~
~ oil ~ fcR:r
?
jihrhaa bandaa khooh ge kol see, uh kee banhaa rihaa see?
c. &t ~ ~ lE('7>f;;! ~ ?i oil oitO' ?
rotee khaanh lOll baa-a-g kurheeaan ne kee keelaa?
d. i'i<! ~ 1.lf<m >rf'or' ?i oil tiIa" ?
8aunh Ion pahile saariaan ne kee pee!aa?
m,
naanke pind
piaar
milnhaa
taraiktar
charhhnhaa
mother's family's village

love, affection (m.)
to meet
tractor (m.)
to climb, to ride
176
PANJABI
i1'
i1'
i1'
i1'

ftt.J
khooh
~
fields
gannaa
bolee baare
Language points
The past tense

You have already been introduced to the simple past tense in Unit 6. Verbs
in the simple past tense were shown to agree with the number and gender
of the subject. To help you remember, here are examples of the verbs ~
aauDhaa (to come), ~ ronhaa (to cry), ~ bolDhaa (to speak), W
honhaa (to be) and ~ l1assnhaa (to tell) in their past perfect forms:
Masculine
singular
Masculine
plural
JJf'fur aaiaa
..re
aae
~ roiaa
6e roe
~ boliaa 85 bole
~ gassiaa ~ lIasse
Ufer hoiaa
W hoe
Feminine
singular
Feminine
plural
1lf'e1
lJf'e'Ir aaeeaan
aaee
lO
came
roee
mr roeeaan. cried
ii!l1 bolee >imr boleeaan spoke
"i!l:iI lIassee "i!'J:iIJl(i gasseeaan told
UtI hoee miIr hoeeaan happened
In the past perfect tenses in Panjabi, all verbs can be categorised into two
groups: intransitive and transitive. Intransitive verbs do not rely upon an
object to dictate the form of the verb. This literally means that the form of
the verb is unchanging except, of course, in relation to the subject of the
sentence. Intransitive verbs generally do not take a direct object.
Transitive verbs, are those verbs which do take a direct object, and are
more flexible. In such cases where an object is present, the ending of the
verb will agree with the object. In the examples given above, cried and
spoke are both intransitive verbs, meaning that the act of crying and
speaking can stand alone without the requirement of an object. Told, on
the other hand, can require the presence of an object such as he told me a
story with story being the direct object. The following examples illustrate
how the transitive verb is affected by the presence of a direct object:
A DAY IN THE VILLAGE

~ >I'Q'
~ >rQ
~ >rtiI
~ >I'tiIr
177
main kelaa khaadhaa

main kele khaadhe
main naashpaalee khaadhee
main naashpaaleeaan khaadheeaan
I ate a banana.
I ate bananas.
I ate a pear.
I ate pears.
You will notice that the first two examples both have the same object,
except that the first is singular and the second is plural. Therefore, >I'Q'
khaallbaa in the first example reflects the singular masculine nature of
banana and >rQ khaallbe refers to the plural masculine nature of
bananas. The third and fourth examples show a similar pattern for the
feminine object pear with >rtiI khaallbee and >I'tiIr khaallbeeaan
corresponding to the respective singular and plural forms.
The main point to remember when using verbs in the past tense is that
some verbs are subject inflected (meaning that they change according to
the subject), while others are object inflected (i.e. change according to the
object of the sentence). However, some verbs can be in either category.
There are transitive verbs which behave like intransitive verbs when there
is no direct object present, such as l'IHS1!' samajhDhaa (to understand)
and ~ parhhDaa (to read). There are also intransitive verbs which can
behave as transitive verbs, such as ~ kahinhaa (to say), ~
pu~aDhaa (to ask), and ~ lhukDhaa (to spit). However, there is
no convention for knowing when a verb is intransitive or transitive apart
from the nature of the verb and the presence of an object.
The 'agentive' postposition ?l ne

Nearly all transitive verbs in the past tenses are affected by the
postposition De ?l which directs the action of the verb towards the subject.
In usual circumstances ?l follows the subject of the sentence. However, in
the example i1' ~ >rtiI main Daashpaatee khaallbee, ?l De is
implicit and does not appear. The use of ?l De is illustrated in the table.
Note that for some pronouns in the third person, the use of?l De is optional
as is indicated in parentheses:
Pronouns in the ;; construction
Direct pronouns
1----=... -
In the ?l (ne) construction
H'
no change
main
lst
"
!#I'
no change
person !#I' ____.:..as:ce-'e.....
n_ _ _+---'--"--_ _ _---''''--''--==''------1
no change
2nd ~
lUsee!!
~
no change
person i
toon
j
178
PANJABI
3rd
feu (sing)
person feu (sing)
~ (sing)
~ (sing)
feu (fonnal, plural)
~ (fonnal, plural)
~ (sing)
~ (fonnal, plural)
ih
is
uh
us
ih
uh
kaunh
kaunh
~ De optional
~?i
?i ne required
?i
ne optional
~Ci'l
~ ibnaan (i\)
~ De optional
?i ne optional
~ uhnoan <?i)
?i ne optional
faIR kis Ci'l
fcr.:r1o; kihnaan (i\) ?i ne optional
In cases where no direct object is present or the direct object is already
followed by a postposition, the verb is made 'neutral'. The neutral verb is

always in the singular masculine fonn. Most commonly, the postposition
~ noon follows the object of the sentence, thus making the verb neutral.
Here are some examples of transitive verbs in the ii, De construction as
well as with the postposition ~ noon.
1l~ ~ C!kr
1l ~ ?; C!kr
1l ~ .;; C!kr
1l c."Jil.r'-~ C!kr
I cut the tree.

I cut the branch.
mainllarakha! noon katiaa

main taahanhee noon katiaa
main darakha!aan noon katiaa
main taahanheeaan noon katiaa
I cut the trees.

I cut the branches.
is grammatically masculine
~ is grammatically feminine
Here are more examples of the use of transitive verbs:

amar De kahaanhee sunhee
"PiO ?i fi<o; <m'iIfi amar ne linn kahaanheeaan
sunheeaan
"PiO ?i Bkr
amar ne sunhiaa
"PiO ?i ful'I cr<riI ~ amar ne is kahaanhee
Bkr
"PiO?i ~
<m'iIfi ~
Bkr
ih kahaanhee
~ De required
feu?i
ful'I <?i)
Amar heard the

story.
Amar heard three
stories.
Amar heard.
Amar heard this
noon sunhiaa
story.
amar ne ibnaan kahaanheeaan Amar heard these
noon sunhiaa
stories.
You will recall from Unit 8 that pronouns and nouns change to their
oblique forms when followed by postpositions. Taking the same
examples:
179
lOA DAY IN THE VILLAGE .
this story
changes to ful'I cr<riI is kabaanbee in the sentence

_
?i ful'I cr<riI
Bkr
amar ne is kahaanhee noon Amar heard this story.

suohiaa
This story in the English is identical in both examples. In Panjabi, however, this story in the fIrst example is in the direct fonn while this story in
the second example is in the oblique fonn.
Many verbs can fall within either category of transitive or intransitive

making the past tense in Panjabi less straightforward than, say, the present
or future tenses which are not reliant upon the object's relationship with
the verb. For instance, the verb Q(CIl';' karnaa to do and JIH'S'l!' samjbnbaa
to understand can act as intransitive verbs when not followed by an object
or can behave as transitive verbs when an object is present. The same is
true for",!", parbbnaa which can take the ?i ne construction when used
in the sense to read or can stand alone when meaning to study. Often, ?i
ne can be invisible, meaning that the sentence may be dictated by the ?i
ne construction but that it is simply understood. This, however, occurs
with only a few verbs, so you should be cautious when applying these
rules. The best way of illustrating transitive verbs with ?i ne is through
examples:
llIR1' fcrc!?;
~ ~
llIR1' 3'faot
ffirn
aseen kiran (f.) noon amritsar

vekhiaa
aseen taarik (m.) noonlandan
vekhiaa
We met Kiran
in Amritsar.
We saw Tariq
in London.
Note that the verb did not change in these examples even though the
gender of .the object does because of the presence of ~ noon. In the
following examples you will see how the ending of the verb in the past
tense corresponds with the gender and number of the objects:
~
Ci'l l!Il1'I' iii5 lfii
uhnaan ne bahu! kele They ate many bananas.

khaa!!he
!Useen ih kameezaan Why did you buy these
kiun khareel!eeaan? shirts?
II
PANJABI
180
!'orR '" rn -0- "R'E' oihr leis ne gaddee noon

#I 7
saaf keetaa see?
~ '" ii<!l ~ mm raam ne meree gall
samajhee
Who cleaned the car?

Ram understood what
I said.
Compound verbs
Compound verbs are formed when the stem of a main verb is followed by
an auxiliary verb. These constructions are very common in Panjabi and are
the equivalent of two verbs coming together in English such as in the
expression to go to sleep. In Unit 9 you leamed how to express can and
already through the uses of I'ICI'i!' saknhaa and ~ chuknhaa which,
when combined with other verb stems, form compound verb
constructions. In a similar way, other verbs are used as auxiliary verbs to
emphasise or give an added meaning to the verb stem. Whereas I'ICI'i!'
saknhaa and ~ chuknhaa have very specific meanings, this is not the
case for most other compound constructions which are less simple to
define. A helpful hint regarding compound verbs, however, is that the auxiliary verb loses its own meaning when it accompanies the stem of another verb. Often it is the context of the sentence and the meaning of the main
verb that will tell you about the emphasis that the auxiliary verb has added.
The most COmmon auxiliary verbs are ~ jaanhaa (to go), E<!' llenhaa
(to give) and ~ lainhaa (to take). When an intransitive verb is the main
verb, ~ janhaa (to go) is generally used to give the sense of
completeness or change. To show how the meaning of the main verb is
affected by the auxiliary ending, here are a few examples:
10
~
to come
i'i<!'
to sleep
>fi!'
sauohaa
khaanhaa
peeohaa
to eat
to drink
aajaaohaa
i'il! ~ saunh jaanhaa
~~
khaa jaanhaa
tiI~ peejaanhaa
>If'
to arrive
to go to sleep
to eat up
to drink up
The following sentences illustrate how these compound verbs with

jaanhaa (to go) can be used in sentences:
;p;jI flilJ
#I
}f "II'q'
3' >If' mil chaachee pind lon aa gaee Aunt had come from
.rn i'il!
~ ~
see
the village.
main baar-h-aan vaje sauohl will go to sleep at
jaavaan gee
12 o'clock.
___________________________I_8_1
>iIO' "ftf' #I fa uh ainaa bhukhkhaa see
He was so hungry that

he ate everything up!
lei uh sabh kujh khaa
hI>If' I
giaa!
fltlI'I "R'<I' !fq til billee saaraa dudhdh
The cat drank (up) all
~
~pe_e~g~a_ee
________________th_e_m_'_
~_.______~
~
mr !r.>'
Of the transitive verbs, the auxiliaries of ~ lainhaa (to take) and E<!'
denhaa (to give) are the most common. The effects of each upon the main
verb can be best described in terms of the direction of the action. ~
lainhaa tends to give the sense that the action is being done towards or for
the benefit of the performer while E<!' llenhaa indicates that the action is
being directed away from the performer. The difference between the two
can often be quite subtle:
feu
~ <l'tI8
Keep this book

(with you).
this book on the
Put
feu~llil ~
ih leilaab mez 10 rakhkh de
table .
<l'tI~
She reads Panjabi.
~ i/;:ra'I ~ ~ U uh panjaabee parhh
laindee hai
uh
chiththee parhb dendee She reads out the
crn~
~u
~
leiter.
hai
ih leilaab rakhkh lai
lainhaa and E<!' llenhaa, in addition to directing the action, also add
a feeling of completeness.
obi i'Iffi!'t
------------------------,
fB""f'main kanm jaldee kar

#I
liaa see
f'JIHa?; '" ffiI ~ simran ne jUllee khareed
mit
laee
JI'O!Cre'I ~ . t.tiI
davaaee de dillee
!crR't >:'5 '" J!H'1'i taiksee vaale ne samaan
r.n m <l'tI ~ gaddee vich rakhkh
dinaa
}f
$" aauohaa
ADAYINTHEVI=L~
~G~
E
OR!
I (had] finished the job

quickly.
Simran bought shoes.
The doctor gave
Simran medicine.
The taxi driver put

the luggage in the car.
The particle -~ ke
The particle -iil ke resembles the conjunction and in English. In English
two verbs can be joined by and such as in the case he came (home) and
182
PANJABI
ate. In Panjabi the first verb is followed by -~ ke to denote that the first
action occurred first. In this example, the literal meaning would be having
come (home) , he ate. Therefore, the literal meaning of -~ ke is having. In
the passage from Jaspreet's diary, you will recall that she says Simran saw
a buffalo and ran away. In Panjabi this would be translated as: Having
seen a buffalo, Simran ran away. Here are a few more examples of how
-~ ke is used:
fi ~ ~ ~
fi tffl
raajindar noon bulaa ke uh

noon gasso
Call Rajinder and

tell him.
~ !ali era ~ ~ URI kanm khalam kar ke loon

fi M'
ghar noon chale jaa
After finishing
work, go home.
~ ~ M' ~ ~
Go to the shop
and bring some
butter.
.re
filrIl
gukaan le jaa ke
makhkhanh liaao
-~ ke can be used with more idiomatic expressions as well. which are

often not' easily translated into English but which are useful ways of
expressing what might otherwise be lengthy sentences. Here are some
examples .of the usage of -~ ke in idiomatic phrases as well as in
adverbial expressions (i.e. expressions which describe actions) which will
help you to understand its functions bener.
Adverbial phrases
Q ire ~
jj;j ~
<fR
ire ~
agge chal ke
soch ke
hass ke
dar ke
from now on, in the future

after thinking
laughingly
being scared
Idi.omatic uses .of -i;l

~
i' U ~
W<!'
chandeegarh lon hoke

jaanhaa
Go via Chandigarh.
111' til ~ Hfi il'l! ~ pilaa jee ne mainoon jaanh Father purposely
o.:ft' ~
ke naheen gassiaa
didn't tell me.
fe'or URI n ~ Jl'i!' ikk ghar chadd ke saadaa The house after the
hai
next one is ours.
183
The particle -~ ke is also used when expressing the time of the day. You
will recall from Unit 7 that the verb ~ vajjnhaa (to strike, to chime)
is used to tell the time. The t'imes of quarter past, half past, quarter to, and
times on the hour which are regularly used were illustrated to you in this
unit. When you wish to show that the t'ime is a few minutes before or after
the hour, then the particle -~ ke is combined with ~ vajjnhaa.
Therefore, ~ ~ vaj ke means having struck. ~ f'l:;! vajnh vieh means
before the hour. The following examples illustrate how -iii ke and f'l:;!
vleh are used to express such times:
UtI
~ f'l:;!
<Jl'<
UtI
iii
flk Pani vajanh vich go mint
han
flk <Jl'< pani vaj ke go mint han
1I'<f ~ f'l:;! JJfl5'<P

fi:re
<Jl'<
1I'<f ~ ~ ~
fi:re
<Jl'<
baar-haan vajanh vich

athaar-haan mint han
baar-haan vaj ke
athaar-haan mint han
viaakhiaa
It is two minutes to
five .
It is two minutes past
five.
It is eighteen minutes
to twelve.
It is eighteen minutes
past twelve.
Commentary
Rural Panjab
Panjab's predominantly rural society has had a profound impact on the
development of the Panjabi language. On the one hand there is a great deal
of local diversity, such that dialects and pronunciations can change
over smail distances. On the other, there is a richness in the language
which comes from rural idioms. Conversations in Panjabi are often
peppered with these sayings and it is difficult to relate them without some
knowledge of village life. As with all rural settings, day-to-day life in a
village is dominated by the agricultural economy which is in tum related
to the changing seasons.
Panjab is renowned in the whole of India as the 'bread basket' of the
country. In the 1970s the region benefited enomaously from the
i.ntroduction of genetically engineered wheat seeds which resulted in
much larger crop returns. This phenomenon has been called the ' Green
Revolution' and resulted in Panjab having the greatest per capita income
of all the states in the Indian Union.
184
PANJABI
abhiaas
Exercises
1. Use the particle -'1 ke to express the sentences in

Panjabi
a) Having eaten, we all went to sleep.
b) Go to the shop and bring some milk.

c) After completing the task, go home.
d) Go to Amritsar via falandhar.
2. Insert the appropriate past tense forms

Write the appropriate past fonn of the verbs given to you in parentheses.
Remember the ruJes about transitive and intransitive verbs!
a)
W iffl
(>re')
main go kele ___ (khaanhaa)

b) If;i\ _
_ (~
bachchee _ _ _ (ronhaa)
c) ;wi! ;it ?i ~ CRril _ _ (~
naanee jee ne saanoo!! kabaanhee _ _ _ (sunhaaunhaa)
d) WC<lJa~ _ _ ~
main garakbal noo!! ___ (katnbaa)
1!l3. Responses in Panjabi

The following is a conversation between you and your aunt. You are
visiting her in London and she is asking you about your rrip to central
London today. Respond to her questions in Panjabi with the answers given
to you in English.
Aunt
You
Aunt
You
Aunt
~ ~ <it ita ~ <!til ?

!Uhaadee londan gee sair kive!! rabee?
It was very nice. 1 went to Trafalgar Square and saw Nelson's
Column. 1 also went to Buckingham Palace.
2R't ~ oft oiIO' ?
!Usee!! hor kee keelaa?
1 went to Oxford Circus and bought some clothes.
2R't oft ~ >ftI' ?
!Usee!! kee kujh khaadbaa?
185
Vou
Aunt
1 only ate some pizza.

#Hre fa ~ T>f ~
~I feu
e M' fa I'M rRf H1='I i

e ~ <it ~ ~ I
futlR '!Iri
umeed hai ki tuhaanoon bhukhkh laggee hai kiun ki ajj aseen

mach~hee Ie ;hips banhaae han. ih hai inglaind gee khaas sugaal!
4. Name the numbered objects in Panjabi

l. Water well
2. Buffalo
3. Sugarcane
4. House
5. Fields
II
Slmran
Booking clerk
Jaspreet
Booking clerk
The two of us want to go today. Will we be able to get

a seat inflrst class?
Do you want return or single?
Single. What time does the train leave?
The train leaves at eleven in the morning and gets you
to Amritsar at two thirty in the afternoon.
Okay, can we have [lit. give us} two tickets.
It is good to see new places. Here are your two tickets.
Thanks.
Best wishes for a safe journey.
F.ll:lt!'<::m
shabdaavalee
Juspreet
"
harmandar saahib
The Golden Temple

how to make enquiries and collect infonnation
how to buy train tickets
about the Golden Temple
Booking clerk
Slmran
Booking clerk
Qt
~l!'6
~
till Shan-e-Panjab
I!I CIi'5 lR 'I ~ Ut:ra
CRf<"i'
M!~
gall baat I shaane panjaab

Both sisters are at JaIandhar railway station early in the morning. After
visiting their relatives, they are now on their way to pay homage to
Harmandar Sahib, the Golden Temple in Amritsar.
~ tI'l!' 5iI "1m ~ -.t.JiI <Ii'itI foro:iI ~ 7
Iri' ~I ~ l!'6 ~ feR ~ ~ ~ orcre Wil
1IfR't' ~ i'n ~ ~ <:PI oil Jl'f;
ore'R ~ me
M! iI'i! -ail 7
oil ~ ~ kore ~ ~ wfe"o! triI -.iI 7
fe"o! triI -.ill ;h'I m >:iI ~ ~ 7
<Ii'itI mnra' >:iI ~ ~ ~, ~ .ret >:iI wr.! ~ ?;
~~t$'n'I~1
-1I/'r, ~ kcrc:' E ~I
~
~ -.t.JiI e ~I fu<J Wi ~ kcrc:'1
wr.!~
t$'~
8oY FC;fQS ~
!i!W feN
'*'
!l,,'r~ ~
Jaspreet
Booking clerk
5iI !i!W
~I
Which is the best train to Amritsar?

The Shan-e-Panjab [the pride of Panjab} . A lot of
tourists travel on this train.
gaddee
bahu! saare
sailaanee
safar karnaa
mil jaanhaa
baa-a-g gupahir
pahunchaa genhaa
surakhkhia! safar
shubhichaavaan
abhiaas
~I
187
THE GOLDEN TEMPLE
Vocabulary
automobile, train (f.)
a /0/, many
tourists (m./f.)
to travel
to get, /0 receive
afternoon
to deliver, to cause to arrive
safe journey
best wishes
Exercises
1. Identify the speaker

The following phrases have been taken from the dialogue. Identify who
said each of the phrases.
a) ~ l!'6 ~ feR ;h'I ~ ~

b) ~ tI'l!'
c) ~
d) ;h'I
'*'
"1m
orcre Wil
3' -.t.JiI ;h'I foro:iI
~ ;i-aiI ~ ~I
~ ~ 7
>:iI
e) ~ ~ ore'R ~
me M! iI'i! -ail 7
~ 7
PANJABI
188
a) 1IfR1' ;j il'i!' """ ~

b) U ~;mt ~~
feu fCcrei
f'R'tr
mr
~~
~ Wi ~
afuo
~
t%l2 The Golden Temple
>.!w:'
I!I -am ~ ~
""'"
~
cu:;;a:i~ E'
~ H'f<JSj
gall baa! 2 harmandar saahib
m JJS
~ ~ ~. <I'I-fi!'R til ~ ~ afuo " A'Fe>l!'

~. llIaMI'i ~ til ~ ~ ~ .. ", ..Fe",' ml
1'J:iV
tR
~ -eo ""'" ciI U ?

~
-eo ~ """" u: ~ -eo J:fci;;ol
~ ~ f; ~ lffiIl'o!@'f\;rootf;!ou ?
I'o!@'
~i
"R'<I' W;o ~- &er UI feu H<J'C!'i!'
-..rna-
fo!
aim ~ 1'< 8' ..;ofe'''' m l

8<I'a"'<3
1;6<1'
u fcroo ciIoan }ffi ~ """'" k
U JJS "R'<I' H'ire w:cm
UI
~ O!<I
l!<!J;ICI
im!
3' ftffl
~ Wi
"IIl'IfcIl'I'<it
~3'~WiI
Guide
Simran
Guide
Jaspreet
Guide
Simran
Guide
The town of Amritsar was fo unded by the fourth Guru of

the Sikhs, Ram Das, and the fifth Guru Arjun Dev had
Harmandar Sahib built.
What does the word Amritsar mean ?
The literal meaning is 'a pool of nectar' .
Why is the Harmandar Sahib called the Golden Temple?
Because the domes are covered in a lot of gold. This gold
was put on by Maharaja Ranjit Singh.
The continuous recitation of religious hymns gives peace of
mind and the entire atmosphere is heavenly.
That is why visitors come here not only from India but from
all over the world.
shabdaavalee
Vocabulary
silthkhaan ge
chaulhe guroo
shabir
vasaaunhaa
panjvaan
banbvaaunhaa
of the Sikhs
fourth Guru (m.)
city (m.)
to establish, to found
fifth
to get built
meaning
literal
nectar, holy water (m.)
pool (m.)
Golden Temple (m.)
golden
why
is said, is called
arm
lafzee
anmri!
Simran and laspreet are visiting the Golden Temple in Amritsar. They are
accompanied by a guide provided by the temple management committee.
189
THE GOLDEN TEMPLE
III J:l8e'o;:m
2. Rewrite in the correct word order
c)
11
J:fci;;o
sarovar
~~
harmandar saabib
sunahiree
kiun
kihaa jaandaa hai
kiun ki
gunbag
<:ra'I
M'
fcroo tf;!o 5
M'fo!
t<re
W;o
sanaa
5'ae'
n"aa:'Qe
laggnhaa
laggvaaunhaa
lagaa!aar
keenan
man
shaantee
genhaa
saaraa maahaul
savarag
vargaa
is kar ke
garshak
naa keval
balki
8<I'a"'<3
~
}ffi
"""'
W"
"R'<I'
H'ire
w:cm
~
fuR
O!<I
l!<!J;ICI
~ im!
"IIl'IfcI
w;'Ir
II JIffsJlftR
duneeaan
abhiaas
because
dome (m.)
gold (m.)
to be covered, laden
to get covered
continuously
singing of hymns (m.)

mind (m.)
peace (f.)
to give
whole atmosphere (m.)
heaven (m.)
like (v.)
that's why
visitors (m./f.)
not only
but also
world (f.)
Exercises
fo Uowing exercises.
190
PANJABI
1. Matching
II
THEGOlD~E~N~T~E~M~Pl~E__________________________~1~
9~1
With nouns
Match the questions with the appropriate answers.

RnJ
savaal Question
a) ~? ~
ott e 7
m7
c) ~ af<re fom ?< "A'Fe>lf' m7
d) ~ i fom ?< W;o 8dlde>lf' m 7
b) ~
I'!'futI fom ?< .."' ..Fe....
f'u>If'c! ~
~~
oiH~
javaab Answer
i) ~ ~
til ?<I
!i!i! ~
~~
~
ii) ~ ? ~I
iiifJm
iii) H<I'<!'M' ~ ~ ?<I
iv) ~ ~ til ?<I
to love
to like, to prefer
to work
to begin, to commence
to help
to try
With adjectives
to clean
to finish, to complete
to [u, to correct
2. Crossword
Complete the crossword in English using the clues given in Panjabi. Can
you figure out what the 'mystery word' is in the shaded boxes?
to close
, . W;o
to reduce, to lessen
'! . ~
~.
Here are a few examples to illustrate how conjunct verbs are used:
Cc!RO(
oiH ~ !i!i! ~ el Work begins in the morning.

[!i!i! UC' to begin is an intransitive verb formed with the noun oiH.)
8. ~
4.
af<re
2 H' ~ ~ O!<P ,,"I 1 will wait for you.
~ .~
bolee baare
Language points
Conjunct verbs
Conjunct verbs have meanings which are specified by the nouns or
adjectives that they include. Conjunct verbs are formed by combining
a noun or adjective with an infinitive (either in its simple form or as a
verb tense). For example, to clean in English merely requires the infInit
ive. In Panjabi to clean would require two words: R'l: (clean, adjective)
and ~ (to do, infinitive). The adjective specifies the type or nature
of the action while the infmitive directs the action. The most common
infInitives used in conjunct consbUctions are ~ (to do) and UC' (to be).
Here are some examples of common conjunct verbs using both adjectives
and nouns.
[Here ~ ~ to wait is a transitive verb with ~ as a noun.

This is an example of a verbal expression which is formed exactly
as a conjunct verb. However, the noun retains its own meaning and
sense.)
li<r fo;oru
'C~8 fo;;J
Ufer m 1 got married in 1964.
There are some conjunct verbs in which neither iiI"i3?i' nor ~ are involved.
to be visible
to come to mind
to bear in mind, to remember
8usative verbs
'!llIsative verbs are groups of related verbs which share a similar
III lining, but which differ in terms of who is carrying out the action. You
hllve already come across such related verbs in Unit 10, in the first
dlillogue when Simran says to Chaachee:
II
PANJABI
192
I ate every type of food.

In the diary passage in Unit 10, Jaspreet writes:
Auntfed us.
As you can see from these examples, ~ to feed and ~ to eat are
clearly related to one another. However, the difference lies in who the
agent or 'doer' of the action is. Not all verbs are grouped into causative
pairs. However, there are a large number of verbs which can be placed into
such groups. Causative pairs and groupings are formed by a pattern of
adding a suffix (or ending) to the stem of the verb as the action moves
further away from the subject.
to do
otdC:'~c;
~
~
to cause to be done
to cause to be done by someone else
to
kq'fe o
lIel'"
eecoQe'
~
\.rore'
~
il'iII'e'
t1dlc:'~ei
see
to be shown, to appear
to show
to make, to build
to be made, to be built
to have made or built (from/by someone else)
to cook
to be cooked
to have cooked (by someone else), to cause to be cooked
to wake
to awaken
The simple verb, or infrnitive, was explained in Unit 3 as the base of all
Panjabi verbs. To refresh your memory, the infrnitive of Panjabi verbs is
formed by the root of the verb plus the ending --e' or -"". By now you
should be familiar with the various tenses of the Panjabi verb. In addition
to being the base of all verb tenses, the infrnitive can also be used as a
noun. You will recall in the fIrst dialogue that the booking clerk says to
Jaspreet and Simran:
>R'
;icn'llli'5
It's good seeing [to see] new places.
193
THE GOLDEN TEMPLE
Notice that the infrnitive ~ is not the verb of the sentence (U-e' is the
verb) but that it is a verbal noun indicating an action (which behaves as a
noun) within the sentence. Here are a few more examples of the infInitive
as a verbal noun:
Waking up [to wake up] early is necessary.
Talking [to talk] too much doesn't
look good.
Reading [to read] is easy, writing [to write]
is diffiCUlt.
When the infInitive has an object, it will correspond to the gender and
number of that noun. Since the infInitive already has a masculine/singular
appearance with the ->If' ending, it does not change when the object is
masculine and singular. However, when the object is masculine/plural it
will take the ending -e and when the object is feminine, then the ending
changes to -~, -~ if plural. Note the following examples:
~ crcmt
~ ~
~ ~
~ ~
working (to work, to have a job)

reading (to read) books
cooking (to cook, to make food)
opening (to open) the doors
Like other nouns, the inftnitive is also affected by postpositions. The

ending of the infInitive in the oblique, therefore, changes to the shortened
form as discussed in Unit 8. Here are some examples of verbal nouns in
the oblique:
A' <l'5
iI'Uc! il'e ~
flm' -e fu"ii
to cause to wake
The infinitive as a verbal noun
11
flIra n.lhr I am not ready to go out yet.

Their coming here wasted my time.
Wcr mf
~ l'!'6
trfe>Jf' ~ hP>r
ute t!' Her n.iI' fHfu>Jf'
V'U
There wasn't an opportunity to drink
tea.
The passive voice

In English 'I said' is in the active voice (i.e. the subject of the verb is
directly carrying out the action) and ' it was said' is in the passive voice
(Le. the subject is on the receiving end of the action). The same distinction
1M81so true in Panjabi. The passive voice can be formed in two ways. In
Ihe first form the passive verb (the participle [see Unit 12] and the form
ur"R"e') agrees with the subject:
194
PANJABI
11
THE GOLDEN TEMPLE
195
~ f>:;j titr>iI iffi'I "W;iI 5 Panjabi is spoken in Ludhiana.

It is said that Amritsar is the city of the
foRr M'e' 5 fu ~
fI:i'>II O!' afua 5
Sikhs.
ci'l'! ~ H'<I' <N>f ora fur .rear By tomorrow all of the work will be don e.
India has one of the largest railway networks in the world. Trains may be
both the most luxurious and most uncomfortable way to travel in India,
but they are always entertaining. The fastest trains to Panjab from Delhi
are the Shan-e-Panjab and the Shatabdi. However, almost all trains
heading north from Delhi will pass through Panjab. There is also a train
called the Samjota Express which crosses the India-Pakistan border from
East to West Panjab at Attari.
The passive voice can also be expressed by using the postpositions ~ and
iffi' to indicate by whom the action was done. In this form the verb of the
sentence agrees with the object. Note the following examples:
~ ~ farr
~Ha~~m
iIRl3'I fuO' iit iffi' ~
O!t/
Ha
The cup was broken by me.

The chair was broken by me.
The mistake was made by father.
viaakhiaa Commentary
1. Railways
You will recall from earlier in this unit that causative verbs are groups of
related verbs. Active intransitive verbs and passive transitive verbs (see
Unit 10) can both be used to express the passive voice. For example, the
verb ~ to be made and ~ to make can both be used to give the
sense is/are made.
~fl!'iI~<m
~ fl!'iI ~ ~
>:Oil!'
Shoes are made here.
<m
Shoes are made here.
'like'
The postposition ~ is used when comparing objects or people with one

another in terms of quality, size, colour, etc. You will recall in Dialogue 2
that the guide described the atmosphere of the Golden Temple: H'U8
l1":QaI >:Oil!'
(the atmosphere is heavenly (lit. like heaven. ~ is
affected by the gender and number of the person or object being likened
to, so that the ending of ~ is masculine, in this example, since heaven
is a masculine noun. Note in the following examples how the ending of
>:Oil!' changes accordingly:
-a
feu
feu
~lI'hi1
>:<mI -a
~ O!'
1.I6lr ~ <m
HC!'i'> H'<m ~ ~ -a
~BB~~<m
~ 1:':'e'l >h >:<mI f>hiI
-a
This girl is like a fairy.

The girls are like fairies .
His house is big like a palace.
Those boys are like giants.
That medicine is sweet like sugar.
There are also other words for describing likeness in Panjabi: ftr.:r
(jihaa), ~ (vaangoon) and a<f (tar-h-aan). These words all appear in
this book.
2. The city of Amrltsar

The city of Amritsar is one of the central towns in the corridor to India
for those travelling by land to and from Central Asia. Amritsar is a cultural
and religious centre not only in the state of Panjab but also in South
Asia. Founded over 400 years ago, Amritsar has become the political
and cultural centre of the region and is the religious centre for the Sikh
faith. At the time of the annexation of Panjab by the British in 1849,
Amritsar was the largest city in Panjab. However, other larger cities
such as Lahore and Ludhiana have now surpassed Amritsar in terms
of size and economic dynamism since the partition in 1947. Today
Amritsar is still the most significant religious centre for the Sikhs, being
the home of the Golden Temple, and continues to be regarded as one of
the main tourist attractions of Panjab.
196
PANJABI
abhiaas
Exercises

a. f;ro;iI -ai'iI il5tre 3' ~
b. ~wa
__
c. ~ iO!' _
d. mra"'CJ
~~m
_
RI>it ~: '
M';ft ~ ~ iO!' mi
<ffil
12
~I
>:<ret' ~I
I!l 2 . Answer the following questions in Panjabi
how to write a letter

how to express how did it go?
how to talk about where you've visited
how to construct sentences beginning with
a. Who was the founder of the city of Amritsar?

b. What is the meaning of Amritsar?
c. Why is Harmandar Sahib known as the Golden Temple?
I!l 3 . Listening
You are standing at the ticket counter at Amritsar railway station speaking
with the booking clerk about your planned journey to Delhi. Listen to the
tape and converse with the ticket master by translating the English
sentences given to you.
_".-'...
itJ
.. ?;
'.
1111
Changing money
III ~ 1EI'a" '\ Q-R se8c'
gall baa! 1 paise badalnhaa
You
I want to go to Delhi today. Which is the best train to

Delhi?
Ticket master
iiic!R>{R _ 3' .rnt
~I ~
ilot
;:re. mi i:iH ~I H' M<IHl'i <1'1 Hfi ~ rn:if ~ tta

H' ..rn..n il'! I1ore' <1'1
lIfJit' >JtHCiIcr.o; <1'1 lIfJit' ;;l ..rn..n il'! "ROr.iIfI <1'1 lIfJit' fi?;
m:futi m lI'C!3" re'lor <1'1 ~ ~ m ~ ~ UI
H' I'M m~ 3' ~ "I'fer <1'1 illIfJit' 1.Ifu5
~ ;P lIfJit' fuoRi ~I "j!""R'f f'cni f'cni mill' ?
lIfJit' ~ Mal' M>r <ffil j!u'Ei f'croliI ~ _ 3' .rnt
J:IliRI
~ <ffil
You
Will I be able to get a seat in 2nd class?
Ticket master <I' til cit j!
~ fu"ct 1.I'R -;tt fcore ~ ~ ?
You
No, I want a return ticket. What time does the train leave
uoa
~?
~ ll'<re H' 1.Ifu5 ~ l!CI' Jill !!l! H' ~ ~

~ UI ~ ~ iO!' ~ ~ rn:ifl
from Amritsar?
Ticket master -ai'iI ~ 3' .rei ;;ii mr.il ~ ~ r.!'m JJ/'o ;;ii
~ t$til ~I
OK, give me one 2nd-class ticket.
if
Simran and Jaspreet are in the Air India office in Chandigarh waiting to
get their tickets confirmed. While they are there a German tourist. Paul,
strikes up a conversation with them.
.,
J:IliRI
ghar noon chiththee

A letter home
, I
Hl"i ~ _ _ _ ~ ~ ~ R'a' ~ _
You
Ticket master ~
lIfO ~ f~:r61
~ ~I
CI'3'
t!Rt{b
i:iH
~ ~
lIfJit' j!""U'i mJ
H' OR
~ <1'1
>r.!ffi!' ~ <1'1
CR!l'>'~U ?
ire iffi
~.~. B'ffi! <ffil
Hfi cit
.0
198
fmre?;
i:i5
tu!I{b
i:i5
PANJABI
~ fmI ~ ~I ~ ~ ~ oue H ~I reu ~ R>r "ill

iHi' ~ ~ ~ 3' furi!o ~ -~ 7
... a"' "iI<J'il; fmI eOl'(le'd i; ~ ~ "ill
~ ;:i;n <:'<iI- >If' m SI ~ "il 1'01 m 00 ijil
Paul
My name is Paul. I' m German. I don 't know any

English but I can speak Panjabi.
Simran
We are American. We can also speak Panjabi. We've
Paul
Jaspreet
Paul
Jaspreet and
Simran
Paul
Simran
Paul
Jaspreet
Paul
12
come to India for three weeks. We like it very much.

I have just come from Amritsar today. Had we met
before, we could have travelled together. Where have
you been?
We have seen many places. Which one did you like the
most?
I had already seen the Taj Mahal. Now I have seen
Harmandar Sahib. There is no comparison with
Harmandar Sahib.
We agree with you.
199
A LETTER HOME
"Rfmia"
R>r
sahima!
bas;!a1nhaa
kanm
sankhaa
umeeg
agree
to change, exchange
job, work, task (m.)
easy, simple (v.)
hope (f.)
again
poo
!J~
abhiaas
1. True or false?
a. tu!I{b
~ fmre?;
llfHCl'toro
<lO t! ~ ~ ~
>Jf'@'e't I
b.
shabdaavalee
vaapas
je
milnhaa
pahile
ikaththe
!aan
jag-h-aa
s;!ekhnhaa
mukaablaa
Vocabulary
o.:it'
iii" fOI<l' 1'01 illro tlfu5 ~ a"' ~ fl:ci'% ~I

~ hi i; >lR ~ ~ t.i'fPr a"' @uoi "
c. i!' i:i5 "

I want to change some money. I have US dollars. What
should I do?
Go to any bank. Get rupees by giving dollars. This is not
difficult to do [lit. an easy task}.
And if I want a higher rate than the bank?
... then you should ask any shopkeeper.
Thanks. My turn has come now. Hope we'll meet again.
Exercises
True f False
True f False
True f False
~ 1'01 reu ~ U<J1f HJTcRl "ill

d. tu!I{b ~ fmre?; " i:i5 ~
1'01 il ~ ~ ~ ~ 3' furi!o
~ ~ "il a"' m fmI sOl'(le'd ~ >!R" ~ "ill
True f False
iI':'>I
rom.
2. FiB in the blanks

a. i:i5 _ _ "il ~ ~ ~ _ _ o.:it' ~ t! ~ _ _ iRs "ROle' "ill
b. i:i5
tlfu5 ~ """ #11
c. tu!I{b, fmre?; ~ i:i5 -__ <lO 1'01 ufuHe-a H'fua C' ire! _ _
o.:it'l
d. i:i5 ll/'M <it
3' ~ >Jf'fur "ill
return, back
if
to meet
before
together (v.)
then
place (f.)
to see
comparison, competition (m. )
A letter home
1i.P>r6 f\.s'
ghar noon
chiththee
~ >f'Q' ;ii,
Rfao J{I
'lIOI'8
#HIe -a 1'01 am m C5'OI iii >lfJff fi!'i lCil <rl >lfJff Ii.1iJ m.r
#i~-~ HOI'O ~ ftfi ~ <If<re ~ "jftl Ii.1iJ ~ HOI' " ~
Jl'i1;
.'
PANJABI
200
l!Ii!<! ml re'o! <re1 fa'<" fu?; ~

'EI'Qa ~ cro'I ml ft!'>i "" a l'I'iit ~ "iii aae..all!li!<! ~ ;rel
~I >IfRl' m,..., ~ u' fo! ft!'>i ;;r..n Jlfa'el i ~ ~I >IfRl' =-i
mill!li!<! ~ ~ <ml >IfRl' ~ mfo! 2'R1' 'II'iJ 1WS-~I
l!Ii!<! ftI'Ira ~,
1.1 ~
12
201
A LETTER HOME
..m
Jlfa'el
8"aI'T!t{hr i f'>Il.rcrn
4 July
Dear Dad and Mum ,
Sat sri akal.
We hope that you are fine. We are happy here. We went to the village
and saw the house where you used to live . The people of the village
have shown us tremendous affection but it was very hot. Once, it
rainedfor three days without stopping. Our Panjabi vocabulary has
increased a lot by coming here. We are astonished to see so many
people and so much traffic. We have bought many presents for you.
We wish you were here with us.
Jaspreet and Simran
fura
fo!
~
HOr'l'>
~
8c!
ftI'Ira
fe>t~it
~
piaare
lei
khush
makaan
jiththe
10k
piaar
!!ikhaaunhaa
gannee
warmth
vaaree
letter home
a. i!>!t{hr i f'>Il.rcrn ?i 1i.t.i m oil ~ ?
b. re'o! ..m fa'<" fu?; mI'3'6 oil ~ cro'I m ?
Your loving daughters,
shabdaavalee
piaare
2. Answer the questions about Jaspreet and Simran's
With best wishes,
PJil aae'C;:6l
1. Complete the box
Vocabulary
dear, beloved (v.)
that
happy
house (m.)
where
people (m.)
to show
heat, warmth (hot, warm) (f.)
~_ - " - - fo!@' m,..., ~ <m?

c. ""'t'~ <r ,,,"<>0
_
d. i!>!t{hr i f'>Il.rcrn ?i ~ liT 1ft i 1i.a' 1ft
milal~?
1Zl2 Simran at the post office

I!!l <Ii'5 'a'3" ~ fm.ran ~ 3
gall baat 2 simran daakkhaane te
fe<J f;h;l "IH<Ilcr TtliI ~I
OIl M mieol "S'OI O'<ll' TtliI ~ n' <:Pre'! "S'OI O'<ll' ?
~ "S'OI- 0'<ll'1
}f
202
PANJABI
fuJ:! ~
' 1 ~ ~ fCorei ril
,q.n'lI~1
Simran
Postal worker
Simran
Postal worker
Simran
!; Q~i!"C;:6l
M5'I
~
~
lI'CI
~lI'CI
.rot'
~
~lI'CI
~
!II ~ t:r6
I want 10 send this letter to America.
Do you want to send the letter by sea or by air mail?

By air mail.
Put 12 rupees worth of stamps on it [the letter].
Okay. Thanks.
shabdaavalee
chiththee
bhejnhaa
samundar
daak
samundaree daak
raaheen
havaaee
havaaee daak
tikat
bolee baare
Vocabulary
letter (f.)
to send, to post
sea (m.)
mail, post (f.)
sea mail(f.)
via, by
by air
air mail (f.)
stamp (f.)
12
203
A lmER HOME
Present prefect
The present perfect tense in Panjabi refers to those actions which have just
occurred, such as I have eaten. It is generally used when one is concerned
with the present effects of something which happened in the recent past.
You will recall from Unit 9 that the verb ~ is used to express to have
already done or to have finished doing. The stem that is used with ~
represents the action in the present perfect tense that has already occurred.
The present perfect of >I'<!' to eat is as follows:
Masculine singular
Feminine singular
Masculine plural
Feminine plural
Masculine informal
singular
Feminine informal
singular
Formal masculine
plural
Masculine singular
Feminine singular
Formal Masculine
plural
Feminine plural
>I' i!O!'/ ~
>I' ~ <:P
W
>I' ;fat <:p
if
if
j >l' F/~if
I have eaten
I have eaten
we have eaten
we have eaten
you have eaten
j >l'~ if
you have eaten
~>I'~U
you have eaten
W>I'~<:p
reu/~ >I' i!O!'/~ I he has eaten

she has eaten
reu/~ >I' ~ I
he/has/they have eaten
reu/~ >I' ~ <m
reu/~ >I' ~ <m
The perfect tenses describe actions which have been completed.
she has/
they have eaten
Past perfect
The past perfect tense is used when the effects of an action in the remote
past is being referred to in the more recent past. In English to eat in the
past perfect would be expressed as had eaten. The past perfect tense in
Panjabi is formed similarly to the present perfect tense as just shown,
except thalthe present auxiliary verbs are used in the present perfect while
the past perfect tense is formed with the past form of the auxiliary verbs.
The following examples show to eat >I'<!' in the past perfect tense:
Language points
The perfect tenses
<:P
Masculine singular if >I' i!O!'/ ~

Feminine singular if >I' ~
Masculine plural
w>I'~m
I had eaten
I had eaten
we had eaten
204
PANJABI
Feminine plural
"IJ'iI' >I' ~ m
Masculine informal i >I' !!C!'/~ m
singular
Feminine informal i >I' ~
singular
Masculine singular feu/~ >I' !!C!'/~
Feminine singular feu/fro >I' ;roil m
Formal Masculine feu/~ >I' ~ W;
plural
Feminine plural
we had eaten
you had eaten
12
205
A LETTER HOME
<ro'iI ~ -.it i<it ~ <rol ? How was your tour of India?

~ fur>; ~ fa.:r ?
How was your day ?
~/f<:R:::r in these examples means outcome or conclusion. Therefore, this
she had eaten

helthey had eaten
sentence has the sense How did your trip to India go ? and How did your
day go? Notice that the form of ~ corresponds with the gender/
number character of the object being described, in this case i<it (trip,
tour) which is feminine. How did it go? is a colloquial phrase which you
will find useful when informally asking someone about their day or trip.
shelthey had eaten
The subjunctive
you had eaten
m he had eaten
The subjunctive mood (set of verb tenses) is commonly used when there
Compound constructions with~, ~ and iI'i!' can also be used to
express the present and past perfect, most commonly when there is an
object present. Notice the following examples:
if~>I're.ru
~l!~~~Mtlu
/ have eaten food.

He has given us a gift.
The present perfect continuous and the past perfect continuous are
expressed in the same manner as the present and past continuous tenses
except that an indication of time is used to denote whether or not the
action is in the perfect tense.
present continuous >rcn! U <rol U
present perfect
>rcn! ~ fur>; i' U <rol U
continuous
past continuous
past perfect
continuous
>rcn! U <rol
>rcn! ~ fur>;
m
i' U <rol
It is raining.
It has been raining for
two days.
It was raining.
It had been raining for
two days.
How did it go?

In Panjabi, how did it go? is expressed through the use of the continuous
form of ~. You have already been introduced to <rol/fa.:r as the
continuous tense form of ~ to stay, to live equivalent to the English _
ing. In Unit 5 Oeeta asks Sita: i cit "" <rol U'? literally meaning What
are you doing? The continuous form of ~ can have another quite different sense as how did it go? Although the form of ~ is in the continuous, the sense of the sentence refers to the past:
is a sense of possibility, vagueness or indeftniteness. When the exact time
or state of an action is uncertain, the subjunctive is used. The present

subjunctive is formed in a way similar to the future tense, except that
the -a!'/ -~/ -j/ -~ endings are left out. In English we rarely use the
subjunctive mood, but leamers of other European languages will be aware
of this system of verbal constructions.
if"'"
"IJ'iI' ;mre
torn:
~ij5
feu/~ ii5
feu/~~
The range of situations in which the present subjunctive is used can be

best compared with the future tense, as in the following examples:
Future
~
foffl .re;m ?
if~~
"IJ'iI' cit
~ ?
Where will she go?

I will say something.
What will we do?
Present subjunctive
~
foffl.re ?
if ~ q;:;
"IJ'iI' cit 0rcJffi ?
Where shall helshe go?

Shall/may I say something?
What might we do?
The examples of the future tense show that an action is to occur sometime
in the future while the present subjunctive gives a sense that an action may
206
PANJABI
happen. The past subjunctive expresses that an action might have

happened in the past, but that it did not occur. It is fonned in exactly the
same way as the present imperfect tense which you leamed in Unit 4, and,
unlike the present subjunctive, is affected by gender:
past subjunctive
H' CICre'/cnre'I
1lfJiI'~/~
CICre'/cnre'I
~~
fuu/~ CICre'/cnre'I
fuu/~~/~
The past subjunctive will be illustrated in the following section where

conditional sentences will be introduced. The subjunctive is also used
when there is a feeling of possibility, commonly expressed through
perhaps J.!'I'ec or it is possible U Jrcr.!' UI
J.!'I'ec ~~, J.!'I'ec 1'i' ~ Perhaps he' ll come, perhaps he won't come.
U Jrcr.!' U fa! .r.JlI'<JCI ~ It is possible that the children are outside.
More complex sentences can be constructed by combining the present
tense or present continuous tense to express the nature of the action in
question such as perhaps he might be coming in which coming is in the
continuous tense while the sense of possibility is expressed through the
subjunctive fonn of fu:- which is ~.
J.!'I'ec !:Ii ~ f'FI'tI <riJ ~ Perhaps the boys are learning Gujarati.
J.!'I'ec fir.r m ~ ~
Perhaps father might be coming.
The subjunctive is also used in a number of other situations in which
necessity, command or obligation are being expressed. Notice such
instances in the following examples:
U fa! 1lfJiI' ~ J:Iif jf fn.m'Ii! It is necessary that we leave on time.

~ ~ ~ fa! ~ ~ I
Tell him to be quiet!
Conditional sentences
Conditional sentences (i.e. where an action is dependent on a condition)
in Panjabi are fonned by using a sequence of it if and <Jf then . In English
conditional sentences also follow a similar pattern: if he comes, then I
12
207
A LETTER HOME
re
won't go. In Panjabi this sentence would be i'i ~

1!1' iJi H' ntit' ~
... 1. If the conditional action being referred to is in the future, such as in
this example, the verb tense of the if clause will be in the future. However,
when the action in an if clause is not definite or certain, it must be
expressed in the subjunctive mood. In the following examples both the
future tense and the subjunctive mood are used:
Future
i'i ~
re 1!1' iJi H' ~ 1!1'
If he comes (will come), then [' II sleep.
Subjunctive
i'i 1lfJiI' Jh >:iI fn.m'Ii! iJi

>:iIlIR! 1.IUii ~ ?
R ~ 1'i' fH5 iJi 'ClJ! cf.j
If we leave at 7 o'clock, (then) what time

will we reach home?
If you don't get a taxi, then catch a bus.
The present tense can be used in the if clause when the action being
referred to is in the past. In the fIrst dialogue in this unit, Paul says to
Jaspreet and Simran: i'i 1lfJiI' >mRl ~ iJi 1lfJiI' fuoi'iS >!I>& meaning If
we had met before, then we would have travelled together.
R ~ 1If'th!> iJi H' iR'

If he had come, I would have slept.
R ~ Rl Jri 1'i'8 ~ iJi ~ If you had been with us, we would have
)it.!' ~
enjoyed it more.
viaakhiaa
Commentary
Letter writing
Letter writing in Panjabi is similar to English. As Dear in English is
used, in Panjabi /i.ira (which translates literally as dear or beloved) is
generally used to address people who are relatively familiar to the writer.
For more fonnal letters /i.ira is often too intimate an address, so
~ (respected) followed by the name of the person or ~ m(Dear
Sir) are often more appropriate when writing to someone not known
to you.
Greetings (see Unit I) such as I'Ifa' li'l >lfOI'8, 1'>H'RCI'O and ~ ~
are commonly placed after the initial address on the line below, according
to the religion of the addressee. The body of the letter follows no specifIc
rules. However, a letter is generally concluded with the equivalent of the
appropriate endings such as fura 1'i'8 with affection, ~ ~ your
208
PANJABI
friend, ~ ik1fI your daughters (as laspreet and Simran finish their
letter to their parents), or whichever ending is fitting.
Doaba
12
3. Writing a postcard
You are writing a postcard to your friend Sonia about your stay in Panjab.
Some words are missing. Select the appropriate words from the hst to
complete the postcard.
laspreet and Sirmans's trip to lalandhar is no surprise when considering

the pattern of migration from Panjab. The doaba region of which
lalandhar is a central town, is the main area in India from which migration
has taken place. People from this region can be found in the four comers
of the world. In fact the doaba' dialect is what you are most likely to
encounter if you are learning and using Panjabi in the west. It is often said
that there is no family in the doaba without a relative in the USA, UK, Far
East or the Gulf.
- - - _ .;it
.mr '!l """"I 5la1 u.... '" __ >loT
;roT "51
H'
___ ~ m
abhiaas
Exercises
209
A LETTER HOME
__ _
~ -.jar
hi
""
To
'10
~ ~ ~
l5til'1 re'ii ... ~ 5la1 . - '" _ _
.'
"'" m
~I ;; _
fa>orC' Hi!'
;r.! "'" ~ _ _
_ _.
1. Write in Panjabi
Make the following statements in Panjabi according to the directions in
parentheses:
.~
a.
b.
c.
d.
I have eaten (singular/male)

I have eaten (singular/female)
They had spoken (plural/male)
He had been speaking for ten minutes (singular/masculine)
1!12. Ustening
Paul is at the bank changing some money. Listen to the dialogue between
Paul and the bank teller on the audio tape. Answer the following questions
about the dialogue:
ilH im ~ ~ ~ ,)j:j <Jl'> ?

i:i8 f<fii ,)j:j ~ ~ e ?
"I"t! ? ~ en e ?
en ~ ;!' ~ ore ~ 11k e w .:'tI ?

i:i8 ~ f<;ro;r ~ e 7
13
13
211
MARRIAGE CUSTOMS
shabdaavalee
viaah deeaan rasmaan
Marriage customs
>a<it
>f'fi.Ir
faaa"
Q
fuJ
tmr>r f'Hfur
illRa
!:f;jl
..nn
more about Panjabi marriage customs

how to tell the date and month of year
how to express sort of, rather
~
?ICni BF
eft!
Matrimonial
advertisement
viaah
sabandhee
The following paragraph is a matrimonial advertisement taken from a

widely read Panjabi newspaper in Britain called Des Pardes (Home and
Abroad). The parents of a young man have placed the advertisement in
order to find a partner for their son.
~ i' ~ ~ >mil >f'fi.Ir ~ ~ l're'I ~ ~ ;ij fuJ ~t

B;ra!'
f'Hfur, illRo,
!:f;jl ~ i ?ICni BF 'i!' ~t ~ 'i!'
eft! ~ ~ t ~ i ~ 'It Jre' ~I ~ 1.135'1, m, B<JiI, hrfca
~ ~, ~ fmit, mret ~ i ~ UiI.rot.?! ~I ~ i
1hH ..rtr or.!<!" -& HHS\! ~ UiI .rot.?! ~I ~ ;ij ~ '1~ Jre'
i' ~ 1'1' ~I ~ ~ in r.!'tt .re ilitl 38'or ~ ~ -& ~ ;ij
fuJ miTl Rtreor
Box number 2961 c/o ER trcreRl
..nn
tmr>r
1.135'1
r.n
F.IfualJ(3
mra't~
~
~
1hH
creer
1;'I./R
~
38'or
Rtreor
ora:
Respectable Hindu Khatri parents from Ludhiana seek suitable match

for their son. The boy is educated, a professional, genuinely handsome
and kind natured. The boy is 5 ft 8 inches tall and he is 28 years old.
The girl should be slim,fair, beautiful. a British citizen , educated and
professionally employed. Should understand Eastern and Western
values and be not more than 25 years of age . Photo returnable.
Divorcees need not apply. Contact: Box number 2961 c/o Des Pmdes.
palVante
icha!ree
maapiaan
rish!aa
yog
lorh
parhhiaa likhiaa
peshaavar
sachchee muchchee
suhnhaa
naram subhaa
kadd
umar
pa!lee
goree
shahireea!
vihaaree naukaree
naukaree
poorab
pachcham
kallraan
vaapas
bhejnhaa
!alaak
S"!!P arak
abhiaas
Vocabulary
respectable (v.)
Khatri (m./f.) (caste)
parents (m.)
(marriage) relation (m.)
suitable
require, necessity. wanted
educated (v.)
professional (m./f.)
genuinely
handsome (v.)
kind natured (m.)
height (m.)
age (f.)
thin, slim (v.)
fair, white (v.)
citizen (f.)
professionally employed (f.)
job. employment (f.)
east (m.)
west (m.)
values (f.)
return
to send
divorce (m.)
contact (m.)
Exercises
After reading the passage and/or listening to the audio tape. try to do the
1. Answer the questions about the passage

a. oft ~ ~)fil
b. oft B;ra!'
c. oft ~
fds ~ 7
tmr>r f'Hfur ~ 7
'10 J!'!J
i' 11k ~ 7
212
PANJABI
13
MARRIAGE CUSTOMS
2. Reply to matrimonial advertisement
m a>jf ~ fa.,J,,'a r3 ~ B'Iffl ml_1 feu WC' iW

~ ~ ill ~ 1iiliI ~ ~ ~ il r3 ~ lli'i >rii .re ~
8C!'3
The following is a reply to the matrimonial advertisement. From the

personal information given, decide whether or not the couple are a
suitable match (i.e. they have at least five of the qualities that were
specified in the advertisement). It's up to you to decide!
Box number 2961 c/o ~
3' li'illlf'llil 5;roiI HE! ~ mr <ffi _ I 5;roiI "FI"m!'I ~ l.Rl'!

~I "'!'I fmiI il 1.1<1 ~ l"KIT orettl ill FcJit .,f<Jal ...3 -~ ill ';;I<!>l
3 >hli -e'tr ~ mW<! ~ il r3 ~ c'I ~ ~t "R'W c'lill ~
ti:!'o! ~ U ~ ill
a -am ~ ~ t.hcJ
Darshana
Debra
gall baat saddaa pattar

Debra has received an invitation to attend a Panjabi wedding. SU;ce she
has never been to a Panjabi wedding, she has gone to her friend Darshana
to ask her what the ceremonies will be like.
Ho'I >rom M'htl ~ fW>rn "i!' Jl'"i!' tha rfer ill fW>rn ~t
1'IO':<iI i; ill Hi; HMft >!'i on< ornl
HMft ~ - <IJl>i ill ~ ~ ti'.r ~ HMft 6dl'@,,1.r
- I crel "a"<'f ~ -
~-r3~~m~-are#.!
~
~
Darshana
Debra
til A wedding invitation
Debra
Debra
Darshana
Debra
Darshana
3. Say or write in the correct word order

a. f.=a'I ~ il 5;roiI ~ ~ UtI ~
b. ~ Ire' ~ i; mroftr 5li c'I l"KIT
c. ~ .ft 5;roiI ~~- J!'5 ~ ~ ?;' 3'
d. HTor ~ "I'I'iiI !f;ft il
_ I ~ iar;p ~ _ I
Jl'"i!' tha ~ f'afi:Ir ~ il for i"6'I ;I'Q >:R ~I feu ail

<IJl>i il ?
.
i"6'I "i!' }fa"H"Ij il for 0131 "i!' ifoi h iii Rml M'<!'I feu Her lG.iI
~ mHI "i!' ii5 ill
feu ~ ~ fuffimu 5'ar.ft ill H' ~ ~ i'I'l! HE! ~ u'l
~:
f;!'H'I
_I
ail mil fe"F! <IJl>i m B'Iffl <'R _ ?

l"KIT, feu ~ >1foa"i HE! ill ~ 8C!'3 m
8C!'3 "i!' ail }fa"H"Ij il ?
213
PI F.Iae'<:8l
>rom
Jl'"i!' tha
HMft
~
~
<IJl>i
crel"a"<'f
B'Iffl
ml _I
-
My friend Jeeti's wedding invitation has come. The wedding

is on the 28th of January. Tell me something about mehndi.
Mehndi is a family custom. Girls put henna on their hands.
They draw different designs and wedding songs are sung.
Are men present during this ritual?
No. This isjustfor the women. Men are present at the baraat.
What is the meaning of baraat?
At the baraat the groom's relatives and friends are present.
This is a sort of small procession. The boy is on a mare and
in front are some musicians. The wedding party performs
bhangra (afolk dance of Panjab).
It's written on the invitation that the doli will leave at four
0' clock. What is this custom?
Doli means that the girl leaves her family's home to go to her
in-laws. This time is a happy and sad occasion.
This seems interesting. I look forward to going to the wedding!
shabdaavalee
sahelee
saddaa panar
mahindee
jaanhnaa
aapnhaa
parvaarak
Vocabulary
friend (f.)
invitation (m.)
henna (f.)
to know
one's own
family (relating to family)

custom, ritual (f.)
rasam
kaee !ar-h-aan different types
pattern , design (m.)
namoonaa
song (m.)
gee!
gaanhaa
to sing
214
E"li5
~
H3'H'II
PANJABI
sharunal
baraat
h:r
mallab
laarhaa
rishte!!aar
jibaa
jaloos
ghorhee
charhhnaa
vaaje vaale
jaannjee
bhangrhaa
iim
dolee
tumaa
H'l!'
fdF.iai!'d
fM<:r
~
lii3'!
"'F"
>rii ~
peke
fhaddnaa
sahure
iicr
maukaa
lillushee
ghamee
mel
lIilchasp
utsuk
h1;o
iIJ}{I
HH
~
l!J llffs1If'R
abhiaas
to be present, to join or participate

procession of the groom's relatives and
friends (f.)
meaning, definition (m.)
groom (m.)
relatives (m./f.)
sort of, rather
procession, parade (m.)
mare (f.)
to he upon, to ride
band of musicians (m.)
members of groom's wedding party (m./f.)
bhangra (m.) (style of Panjabi dance)
(see Commentary Unit 16)
ceremony (f.) bidding farewe ll to the
bride (see Commentary)
to walk, to depart, to leave
bride's family, bride's parents (m.)
to leave
in-laws (m.)
opportunity, occasion (m.)
happiness (f.)
sadness (f.)
meeting, combination (m.)
interesting
anxious, awaiting
Exercises
1. Match the questions with the correct answer

1. Hf'Um til 0Jl>i oil U ?
a. mru :n: i!i"i':<i! ~ U
2. mru r.nnre'1:>f ~ u ? b. ~ ~ ~ ~ Hfmft 6d1~"i1",; <Jl'i
3. ~ R"iI ~ E"li5
c. cr.iI ~ ~ n " l'I'if<! ire' i; iim foro-tM!'u
~u?
4. iim oil lTtiI u ?
d. ~ ~ ~ ~ fdJ:t3e'd B'H5 ~ ~
13
MARRIAGE CUSTOMS
215
Bhupinder Singh and Harjinder Kaur Panesar

cordially request your company at the wedding of their son
Manjit Singh
to
Kanwaljit Kaur
daughter of Gurbax Singh and Jasvir Kaur Kalsi, I1ford

on May 23 at the Sikh Gurdwara of North London
Baraat: 9:30 a.m. Anand Karaj: 10 a.m. Guru ka langar: 12:00
RSVP
The Panesar Family
23 Old Road, Edinburgh, Scotland
2. Answer the questions about the wedding invitation

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
~ ~ }fij fcffl ~ <Jl'i ?

cr.iI ~ }fij foffl' ~ <Jl'i ?
~ ~ ?<'Ii oil u ?
~ ~ ?<'Ii oil u?
cr.iI ~ H'f\.p)fI ~ ?<'Ii oil <Jl'i ?
~ ~ Ilfu<! R"iI ~ fcRr
8. ~ for;:r;fl ~ ~
a?
u?
h. ~ fo??!.r.t ~?
i. ~OI'OtI~~~u?
j. !S or ~ fo??! .r.t -.;<Ii ~ ?
bolee baare
Language points
Participial uses
A participle is a verb which is used to describe an object or an action.
Therefore, participle constructions in Panjabi can either be used
adjectively to describe nouns or adverbially to describe actions. You will
remember from the matrimonial advertisement that the boy is described as
educated. In Panjabi this was expressed as ~ fi!ftt>Ir. Both verbs ~
216
PANJABI
and ~ are combined in their perfect fonns in agreement with HlIOI'.

Similarly, the prospective girl was said to be educated, expressed as u;p
fmiI, also showing agreement with the object being described. Often,
the perfect fonns of ~ can also be used to strengthen the participial
expression. Here are some more examples of how the participle can be
used in Panjabi:
Adjective participles
Jl ~ ~ >iii otif >fi!'

~ &> tirer ~ ik' 5 ?
[ don't eat boiled eggs.
13
The opposite of f'tro>, in this sense, is 11"<1'. This is used to exaggerate

rather than dilute a description, such as in Unit II when the booking clerk
is telling the girls how popular the train to Amritsar, Shan-e-Panjab, is:
~ Jl'6 ~ feR ~ fore mre
<Jl'i A lot of tourists travel on this
train .
...re
The particle -f'tro> can also follow a noun in order to give the sense like.
Therefore, the noun preceding -f'tro> represents what the description is
being likened to. For example:
like a firecracker.
Who is that man sitting down
(i.e. seated)?
Mum picked up the scared girl.
When asking the question what sort of? or what is it like ? then foro is
combined with f'tro>.
Adverbial participles
~ ~ tirer ~ !'!""
fu<r
~ ~ "II'it' -.tor .re <P

amfore~~~~
what sort of house '

what sort of clothes?
m He was telling a joke smilingly.
Another use of the participle is in order to emphasise the on-going nature

or repetitiveness of the action being described. This can be done in two
ways: by repeating the verb in the simple present tense or by using the past
participle with a fonn of ~, both fonns agreeing with the subject.
We are tired from constantly studying.

As you go (along) the way, come and
see me .
217
MARRIAGE CUSTOMS
Reflexive adjectives and pronouns

In English myself and themselves are reflexive pronouns indicating that
the action is directed towards or belongs to the subject of the sentence. In
Panjabi the reflexive adjective "I'l2" means one's own and is defined by
the noun or pronoun being affected by the reflexive nature of the sentence.
Like other adjectives, it also changes according to the gender and number
of the object that it is describing as well as in the oblique form.
The little girl keeps on talking.
The particle f'tro>
~~urefore~5
~ ~ Tcl' 1'1'5 rfer 5
Ua Wo:! rtIiI ~ ~ UtI ~ 5
f'tro> is a particle which is added after an adjective in order to give it a

modest or diluted sense. In English the sense of a description is diluted in
a number of different ways, most commonly by using such words as
rather, sort of, quite, and the suffix -ish. The fonn of f'tro> is affected by
the gender and number of the noun being described and can therefore also
appear in the following fonns: firo'I, r.ro and ftro'II!.
rather a small house.
quite a small (amount).

an old-ish car.
He lives in his own house.
>If'lIiI>>r
oil or<r.iIr
<Jl'i
He has come with his (own) brother

Everything should be in its proper
place.
What do your (own) daughters do?
Reflexive pronouns, unlike reflexive adjectives, do not rely upon another

noun or adjective to be defmed. If you recall from Unit 2, pronouns were
introduced as naming words. The reflexive pronouns, in a similar way, are

also naming words which are used to represent a person. The most
common reflexive pronoun is llf'U which translates as by oneself. ~
which is borrowed from Persian, can also be used to give the same sense.
Note the following examples:
218
PANJABI
H' fe<:r ~ >Jf'I.I cr.:r ~

I will do this work myself
H' "R'CI' ~ Mil "",>Fe",' it
I have made all the food myself
~ ?! >Jf'I.I i!' iii ~ ...."f.,Ilf' She went and bought fruit herself
The reflexive adjective llf'UE' and the reflexive pronoun >Jf'I.I can be
combined to give another meaning: on one's own or without anyone's help
~ >Jf'I.I.
fo!cm
~ >Jf'I.I ~
tr.?I it
~ ~ >Jf'I.I ~ >IlT<I' J'IH5t!'
Kiron studies Panjabi on her own

(without anyone else's help).
it Sanjeev thinks highly of himself
meaning fraternity, is used to express situations of mutuality or

reciprocity with the postposition
to form among or between.
>If'UR,
r.:u
>If'UR
~ >If'UR
r.:u ~ ora em m
r.:u >hJ em Rr'i
We were talking among ourselves.

The children were playing among
themselves.
Finally, "I'll is used specifically with a group of people otherwise referred

to as W us. Therefore, the new meaning given by the reflexive pronoun
is let's or all of us.
let's go
13
219
MARRIAGE CUSTOMS
Months of the year

~
~
H'<!iJ
janvaree
farvaree
maarch
aprail
Hi!
maee
joon
julaaee
agast
satanbar
aktoobar
navanbar
gasanbar
~
1IfiJTR'a'
JI'3>re
~
~
~
January
February
March
April
May
June
July
August
September
October
November
December
The four seasons of the year in English are spring, autumn, winter and
summer which describe the weather of the period. In Panjabi there are
terms less influenced by English (as the months of the year) to denote the
seasons which, in Pakistan and North India, are quite distinctive.
...m
~
>rcI'I'I'a'
~
basant
garmee
barsaat
panjharh
J1<!e'I
sargee
spring
summer
rainy season
autumn
winter
2. Marriage customs
viaakhiaa
Commentary
1. What's the date today?

When asking someone today's date in Panjabi, you would say >lj';:r oil
This is different from asking someone the day or day of the
week, as explained in Unit 7 with the words ~ day and ~ day of the
week. 1J'<iI.tI literally means date and the reply to your question would be
a numerical figure of the date accompanied by the month of the year: >lj';:r
1Ofl5'q' ~ e. Today is the 18th of June. It is also not uncommon to use
ordinal numbers for the first three or four days of the month: >lj';:r ~ 'i!'I
~ <re'I.tI iI. It is the third day of the month.
1J'<iI.tI
e?
Panjabi weddings are lavish affairs with numbers of guests usually in the
hundreds, sometimes in the thousands, and large amounts of food and
decoration. Weddings are seen as social occasions and signify the coming
together of two families rather than of two individuals, as is traditionally
the case in western marriages. It is this aspect of Panjabi - and most other
South Asian - weddings that leads to them often being labelled as
'arranged' . Usually the families arrange the weddings of their offspring,
in that families are present at the meeting of the man and woman. There
is a huge variety in the process of arranging marriages from one extreme
where the man and woman do not meet until the wedding day (which is
rare in the diaspora) to a situation where the man and woman see each
other and make their own decision about whether they wish to marry or
not. It is this latter version that is more usual in the diaspora.
220
PANJABI
When families are involved in the selection of the partner, they take
into account a range of factors, such as those outlined in the advert at
the beginning of this unit. Alongside education and other social aspects,
the advert specifies a particular caste group, in this case Khatri. Caste
is a form of social grouping and organisation which is based upon
occupational traditions as well as kinship ties. Even in the diaspora, caste
affiliations are still adhered to and most advertisements of this kind carry
some sort of caste affiliation. Some common castes are Jat, Ramgbaria
and Brahmin.
The wedding ceremonies that we described in this unit are religionneutral in the Panjabi context and most Sikh, Hindu and Muslim weddings
share these customs. The actual wedding vows, however, are of a religious
narure and for Sikhs this is called the Anand Karaj, for Hiridus it is the
Vivaab and for Muslims the Nikab. For all Panjabis, however, weddings
are major social events and involve spectacles of emotion, family
participation and fmancial expenditure.
A common Panjabi wedding will involve a mebndi ritual, where the bride
is adorned on her hands and feet with exquisite patterns in dye. The groom
arrives on horseback with his relatives at the bride's house and the
wedding ceremony takes place here. The ceremony is followed by a feast.
The saddest occasion is when the bride is seen off at the end of the
ceremony. This is called the doli and often involves protracted crying and
sadness. Each of the events of the Panjabi wedding is accompanied by
music.
13
221
MARRIAGE CUSTOMS
Exercises
abhiaas
L Write a matrimonial advertisement

Prepare a matrimonial advertisement in Panjabi on behalf of the parents
of a girl giving the following information:
a. The parents are Sikhs living in London.
b. The girl is beautiful, educated and working in a bank.
c. The girl is 25 years of age and is 5' 3" tall.
d. The boy should be from a respectable family, be a British citizen and
professionally employed.
2_ Complete the sentences

Use the appropriate forms of"l'l2' and fH<:r.
a.
_ _ __ m, ~ ~I Give me a little more milk.

fuO' til n'5 llf'fer u'l I have come with my father.
H
c. H<nr
b.
d.
NrU 3 otit are'trl
foro ____ He! _ ?
My own sisters didn't go to

the wedding.
What sort of people were they?
222
PANJABI
14
Use the appropriate participle expressions.

~
~
a.
b.
c.
HlrcI'
q{j('ii ~
boiled eggs
(scared boy)
(educated boy)
oft fcRr lit ?
What did they say about me?
The following passage has been recorded on the audio tape. Listen to it
and then answer the questions in Panjabi.
nc,. ~ tfuiI E ~ t!' Ji't!' >ho >If'fer al ~
-A al nc,.
I.If<:niS are ~ ~ ~ j n.:it' iIIl'iIl #<J ~ tiIJIfI <IRH' ~
~ al feJll're't ~ "I'\liI ~ ~ ~ -are'! al
a. ~ t!' Ji't!' >ho for>! -A
t!'
uhnaan ne mere baare

kee kihaa see?
1!l4. listening
b. ~ for>!
Ha
a7
>If'fer a 7
c. oil nc,. ortn ~ ~ j iIIl'iI

d. ~ fermi! ~ 7
e. nc,. ~ ~ ~ iIIl'iI 7
a7
~t w;>:ciI

how to have a conversation about school
how to speak with a police officer and a social worker
how to use purpose clauses with so that
III I Did you meet my class teacher?

El -am ~ '\ ott ~ H6 ~ ~ fi fH5 "A't?
gall baa! I kee !useen mere shrenhee
adhiaapak noon mile see?
Mr Lall has just anended his son Ramesh's parents' evening at his school.
Mr Lall has come home and is talking to Ramesh.
til I oil 2R'f Ha ~ ~ ~ Ml "FiI 7

H' ~ j ' feH":' jij ~ ~ E ~ ~ >:1 f>ffur
\.I'll'
-.j,
"Fill
~ ~
Ha
..re oiI1'orU' "FiI 7
fm:I's E ~ ~ 1'orU' fo! 3" ura t!' ci>i 0RIl'> m H'

~u.sOlH'Rm~-UI
#<J AA ~ nUl acr.!'1 ~ E ~ ~ oiI1'orU' 7
~ ~ -1'orU' fo! <lila m ~ a 1.1<1 ~ >:a"3"t!' n.:it'l
~ ~ ;iait ~ l.Ilft!' n.:it'l
~ I ~ ~ m f'Hmo>3" crel'i'I ...ut;ft a "3" fo! i ~
~ il ~ iI'CIC"6
..r.rl
Ramesh
Mr Lall
Dad! Did you meet my class teacher?

Yes and apart from him [ also met your other subject
teachers.
224
Ramesh
Mr Lall
PANJABI
What did they say about me?

The maths teacher said that you were careless in doing
your homework and talkative in class.
Ramesh
Mr Lall
Ramesh
Mr Lall
He doesn't like me. What did the English teacher say?

He said that Ramesh has the ability but does not use it.
He does not teach us properly.
Anyway! You should study hard so that you get good
14
a. 'PI iI I O! /~ l'I' / H<!/>.{~/"'tI"'\lO! / ?; /Ht'! / R 1

b. ~<1 / R ?; /~ Wl / ~<t/ \/if t!/ ?; <TI
c. ~ ?; /",!~
/ ~ "
/ H <I?;~ / ~
,. ~
Vocabulary
~.
<!Ha
S. 11/0 t!'cYH
shrenhee
adhiaapale
3' feH":'
ton ilaavaa
sH
lIooje
~
lIICIt!'cYH
hisaab
ghar lIaa kanm
laa parvaah
gaalrhee
Iiaakal
vatlnhaa
lar-h-aan
parhbaaunhaa
khair
parhbaaee
taan k:i
gared
banhnaa
l'!'~
--'"
fi!"I'CI3'
~
O<!'
~
~
l.I:re'\
O"for
.,m-
>Il!l'i'
l!J J.. fslll'R
mazmoonaan
abhiaas
class (f.)
teacher (m./f.)
apart from, besides
others
subjects (m.)
maths (m.)
homework (m.)
careless
talkative
ability (f.)
to use
way, style
to teach
anyway
studies (f.)
so that
grade (m.)
to become
Exercises
After reading the dialogue and/or listening to the audio tape, tty to do the
1. Insert the missing vowels

The vowel signs in the following sentences are missing. Rewrite them
after inserting the vowels and joining the letters.
<II
Complete the crossword in English using the clues given in Panjabi.

18
shabdaavalee
/ 03<1t! /
2. Crossword
grades and can become a doctor.
PJI aae'c;81
225
W HAT DID THEY SAY ABOUT ME?
8.~
~.
l'!' lIO":'<l
,
r-
.1J
r-
r-
r-
r.
r-
r,-
r-
.1
r-
rrr-
r-
=am
2 Yes, officer
I!I ~ =! ui ;:it ))[GiRd R'fua
gall baa! 2 haan jee, afsar saahib
Sheela has been stopped by a police officer for using her mobile phone
while driving her car.
yfBlI
>IIl:RCI
yfBlI
>IIl:RCI
yfBlI
>IIl:RCI
yfBlI
>IIl:RCI
.mil iI'I, ora ft!c! trR "'l'I ..re ~ Haofut'! i:?; lit! ..re 0"
for ~ ~ ~ Jfoil
<J' i!'I ~ lI'f'mI
~ lIf\ICI'Q OR! aU ~I ~ i ora "nofe.,p Haofut'! ~ ;!I
~ ora?'i ~ ~ da..felf' ~"51
II ~ fuor fi.k m .~ ~ cro'I JiI
;rR1' ftm! t!l! fi.k 3' ~ OR! aU Jill ;rR1' ora 3' lI'Uc!
~ ~ ~ t'!'f'ei!fl! re.rel
>IIl:RCI JI'fua. fomtr OR! ~ feI:! .ret ~ 1ft OR! ~I
;rR1' ~ ;!I ~ oiIiI ~I fe<J o.r.i! kcre ~I ~
~ ~ ora- -e ~ iiB..re1 -
Police officer Madam, please pull the car over to one side and stop
using the telephone so that you can listen to me.
Yes, officer.
Sheela
226
PANJABI
Police officer You are committing an offence. } am charging you (lit . you
are charged] for using a mobile phone while driving.
Sheela
I was only using the phone for one minute.
Police officer You 've been talking for the last ten minutes. Please get out
of the car and show me your licence.
Sheela
Officer, please let me off this time .
Police officer You have broken the law. Here is your ticket. Please
produce your car documents within one week.
F.lae'ifo:81
shabdaavalee
>ital
fi!'c! tril
beebee
ikk paase
khathhnhaa
band
apraadh
gosh
gallaan
>qn'
~
"flIa'tI
~
~
~
fuI'! ~
is vaaree
maaf
kaanoonn
ulanghnbaa
kaaghzaa!
pesh katnaa
ila
or<'Jn'
l!J~
abhiaas
2. Loan words
Make a list of five words borrowed from English used in Dialogue 2.
1113 I am a
social worker
~ '1:1'3' :I -H' l=IH'i'I W:o! ui
gall baa! 3 main samaaj sevak haan
A social worker, Mrs Kaur, visits Kuldeep's house. She is following a
complaint that underaged children have been left unattended for long
periods in the house.
mil

~
law
.rn
w.;:
'"""
1II'e'I <1'1
;tl ~ ~I
fum;! ~ ~ f>:;j ~
>:'I U Jror.!' ~I <bf ~ ~ ..mi

"' ~ U<! ~ erel
feu j:ffi m ~ ~I if <bf mil' lis Jrore'II
~ mil flrea 5'i1
if """ iiifr;!a ora' -aill
Social worker
Kuldip
sOcial worker
Kuldip
Social worker
Kuldip
Social worker
ulanghnhaa
l"5't'!
~ OOM: wi ~ f>:;j fi!'c! f.... ofea t$iI ~I

oil U hi"!' ~ 1 oil if ~ l!R'r3 <bf ora io'I <1'1
<n'iI' ~ ~ >tr.rr ?; ~ lire ~ wka lis ~, <bf ~
~ ~ UI feu fi!'c! ';adri'" mom ~ Jrore'I UI
if 'I ~ """ <1'1 j:ffi 1.I3't !) ~ ~ <101 ~ ~ ~
beebee
documents
if HH'M W:c! <I' ~ H<r ml fHm1 ~ ~I feu H<r
~ or<nJ ~I if ~
wka "" MVI oil
~ 1
Exercises
227
WHAT DID THEY SAY ABOUT ME?
madame (f.)
one side
to stand, to park
closed, off
offence (m.)
charge (m.)
speech, conversation (f.)
licence (m.)
this time
pardon, excuse
law (m.)
to disobey, to break
papers, documents (m.)
to present, to produce
laaisains
w.;:
Vocabulary
14
Hello, I am a social worker and my name is Mrs Kaur.

Here is my identity card. I have come to talk to you.
Please come in. What is the matter?
We have received a complaint in our office against you.
What has happened? Have I done anything wrong?
You leave both of your children alone in the house and
go to work. This is a potentially dangerous situation.
I leave at 5 0' clock. My husband comes home at
70' clock. It is only a malter of two hours.
Anything can happen in those two hours. Either change
your hours of work or make alternative arrangements.
II
228
PANJABI
Kuldip
Social worker
Kuldip
I!'JI Rae'c;;;8l
This is difficult for me. I can't leave work.

Find a baby sitter.
I will try my best.
shabdaavalee
Vocabulary
social worker (m./f.)
identity card (m.)
against
office (m.)
complaint (f.)
samaaj sevak
shanaakhtee kaard
khilaaf
lIaftar
shikaai!
gilala!
kha!amaak
sathitee
fQot'fe3
llIffi1
J:t3d(")'Ci(
~
~
wrong
dangerous
situation (f.)
arrangements (m.)
baby sitter (m./f.)
to find
intzaarn
ii>iI f>reo
bebee sitar
labhbhnhaa
Exercises
abhiaas
1. Write or say in the correct word order

a. u' W:c! JlH'il }f
c. tI'fi
"f'
lire
b. ~
d. ~
cit iIi'H ?
m Ha feu !:JHC!5
2. Complete the sentences

Choose the correct word from the bracket to complete the sentence
according to the specifications of gender and number. Remember that the
verb changes according to the subject.
a. }f ~ mJ iIi'H ~ (.rei I rfer) u'l
I have come to talk to you.
b. }f ~ m:it n (ROr.!'I1 >rcR'}1
I can't leave work.
c. ~ ~ 3 (m! ;n I ;ffil ~ UI
You go to work.
d. }f l;I<I'l ~ (ORP iii I ORP oil)
I will try my best.
[masculine/singular]
[feminine/singular]
[formaVsingular]
[feminine/singular]
14
229
Language points
bolee baare
Purpose clauses
In Unit 7 infinitives in the oblique were shown to express purpose such as

fHm: "f'fer u', I have come to meet a friend. Another way of
express;g purpose is through the use of a" fct, so that, in order to. The
verb in the purpose clause is normally in the subjunctive (since the action
is often indefinite or uncertain).
}f ~ f;
m a" fct
~~.re
H' t!<!':'B' ~ ciI3' ma" fct
fRH<rn ?i
1'>ill't lire
Jli
mrcro ~ l.I'! fa<r e a" fct
ire ,,-rocHa'x f<:;j ~
Faaaeoa; mJ iIi'H OR! Jli
j';'
"f'
Simran took medicine so that her fever

would come down.
I closed the door so that the cat couldn't

come inside.
Imran is studying Urdu so that he can
speak with his relatives in Pakistan.
Compound postpositions
In Unit 4 simple postpositions such as f<:;j in, 3' from and ~ to were
introduced. Postpositions having more than one word are called
compound postpositions, most commonly using the postposition II of
Compound postpositions behave in the same way as simple postpositions
by requiring the words preceding them to be in the oblique case. Here are
some commonly used compound postpositions:
II lire
II fua
3' \.Ifu8
3' 8'lIIe
inside
above, upon
behind
below
before
after
llml
llsoa
near
about, concerning
llftl'i
ll1!ffl
II
-.:m
llm
-.iI~
ll~
II
'8'<Ja
3'~
3' f>ffiII da
ll~
for
for
in place of
opposite,jacing
outside
apart from
without
in spite of
Indirect speech
So far in this book we have focused on direct speech, when sentences and
phrases have been directly spoken or reproduced. Indirect speech occurs
when another action or speech is being reported or conveyed, such as in
English: She told me to call him , ~ ?i Hfi foroo fct ~ ~ ~. Indirect
230
PANJABI
speech in Panjabi is expressed with the particle fa that to denote what was
actually said or done.
Indirect speech is used when the verb of thought or speech occurred
before the thought or speech being conveyed.
H'
~ "f'\.I
~ ftf<rI
Rfuto fa H'
I thought to myself that I would
oil
definitely win.
tmifur ?< for.:r fa fu<J forO'>!
Jagjit said that this book is worth
~ ~ U
reading.
fcril ?< ~ t!'f'>lr fa fHRB l'I<lH' Someone told me that Mrs Sharma has
~ .rei <nil U
gone to India.
14
231
3. Listening
Sheela is telling her story to her friend Meena about how she was stopped
by the police officer for using her mobile phone while driving. Listen
to the tape and answer the following questions. You may answer the
questions with short or full answers.
~ or<! m f<tii "' otiI m?

b. #u f<t.oiI 'a 3' ~ ~ # ora otiI m?
c.
?< _
Q 'Fi';J ilI'8r ?
d. ~ ~ ~ ~
'& cit ora'I'i' ~ U ?
a.
a:t
When the speech being conveyed is a command.
#J! ?< ~ ?; for.:r fa -;fu cro

~ Jl'fuf ?; f<iu. fa 11/6 ~
-.J5 t!1?-
abhiaas
He told the children to be quiet.

I told everyone to go back home.
Exercises
1. Fill in the blanks with the appropriate compound

postpositions
a. >I'iJ' 11/6 >I ____ UI Our house is near the school.
b. f>il'5'IlI"ii
UI The cat is inside the box.
c. ~
~
d. ~
~ ~I
He will come after eating.
~ ire ~ UI
There should be something else
in place of the picture.
2 . Match the pairs
4. Alphabetical order
Rearrange the following words into alphabetical order, considering only
the first letter of each word.
\.I'tI'
'i!'OIc:<J
ri
sit
fuwa
CR!'R
f'5ri;Io
c!H
fH<ma'
'E[iI
m=
The following eight sentences need to be joined with '" fa. Match the
correct pairs of sentences with one another.
a)
H' ~ >R oihr
b) lIfRl~~~
c) ~nm~~u
d) ~
nm H';w
i)
"'fa
ii)
... ~nm~>foi
... ~ ~ 'I'i' "I' >foi
iii) ... ~ ~~
JlCire
iv) ... lIfRl _
"
15
15
learn about the Vaisakhi festival

be introduced to Panjabi poetry and music
express to allow
I!l The Vaisakhi fair

~~ii5'
vaisaakhee daa melaa

The following extract is a news report from the BBC Asian Network
reporting on the events of the Vaisakhi festival in Binningham, UK.
H' n'I!! iI. ~ mil :)"" ....a .. tI'dO( i' fai:i<re
ii>.I Old am <PI fuJI Jl'8 ~ eo ~ "'" gH tI'H 1'm
HO'fur il' faU' ~I I'M 5'iIIt!' ~ ~ ~ afua ~ l.'/i!'9'I 50!
tN ire unl ~ H' lore til ?; 1.l'I'Pr ~ for ~ ?; HH' m
iar faU' ~I - H6" "I'lf<!' il'e Mkn wt! r faU' ~ I JI'S mil fe<J ~ ~ <it
~eo~~1
Jl'8
eo ~
I'm Neelu and I'm reporting for BBC Radio from Handsworth
Park. The Vaisakhifestival this year is being celebrated with a
'bang'. It seems today that all the Panjabi people of the city
have come here. I have just asked Uncle how he feels about the
fair.
I am remembering my village life. For us this is a happy
Uncle
festival of harvest.
Vaisakh is also the first month of the Panjabi calendar. Well,
Neelu
Auntie, why have you come here?
Auntie Vaisakhi is the birthday of the Sikh nation. The religious
procession is due to arrive where we are standing. In front of
the procession young people are playing gatka. It is followed by
the installation of the Guru Granth Sahib.
I am going towards the langar hall. Look! Jalebeeaan,
Neelu
pakaurhe and many other things are being served by volunteers
free of charge. Please allow the children to have langar first.
Young Auntie Neelu! I wil/ go on the rides after I've had langar. There
boy is a lot of entertainment for the children.
OK, son. Apart from the rides, there is also an exhibition.
Neelu
Bhangra is about to begin. Now, please excuse me. To everyone
from BBC Radio, happy Vaisakhi!
Neelu
Vaisakhi
u?
m.r i' ~ ~ ~ 8"lI'I mft ~I -hr:r BS m,
ui Hi; ~ ~I Jl'far ?; ~ I ~ I >ill -.re ~

<it -...:ret I -
vaisaakhee
... i'i'5 ~ l.'/i!'9'I

~ 1I/'M ~ re
ic'1
ffilI' ~I
In this unit you will:
233
VAISAKHI
~ ~ ~I
Q"I'it til, ~
-
fu!l, ~ fl:f>I ~ eo t!i'i fu<o; ~I ~ "IJif tIW <P, f i ~

oitaa'n Mk >:'5' ~I ~ ~ ~ llf3C!' ;a oi unl fvi iITd
-are.. <it R<:"a'I ~I
-H' ~ ffiIra <m ~ il' am <PI ~I ~, ~ "Ii Ua are'!
-.iI;;r W:?a J:!l:"3" ;;a'O' oi unl >ffuIi ~ ffiIra ..mre it.! ~I
n'I!! "I'it I H' ffiIra rcrc! ~ "I">R # ~ ilI'l >ffuIi ~ ~
mil >1!!3' ~ ~I
shabdaavalee
ii>.I
~
HH'
gHtI'H
~
~
il'e
Mkn
~
~
pesh
vaisaakhee
melaa
dhoom dhaam
manaaunhaa
garshak
puchchnhaa
pe!ldoo
jeevan
fasalaan
kataob
Vocabulary
to present
Vaisakhi, one of the Sikh festivals (f.)
fair (m.)
bang, pomp and show (f .)
to celebrate
participant, visitor (m./f.)
to ask
of the village, vii/age-like
life (m.)
crops (f.)
to cut
234
PANJABI
liuhaar
vaisaakh
iH
kaum
janam gin
khalonhaa
nagar keertan
ga!kaa
khednhaa
guroo garanth
w;li
felo;
mre oitooo
;jJij'C!'
~om
~
~
~
~
iiaa~c;i
~
savaaree
langar
sevaa,daar
mufal
vartaaunhaa
chaknhaa
jhoote
manparchaave
numaaish
vallo!!
vadhaaee
>ffl'
l!J~
abhiaas
celebration,festival (m.)
one of the Indian months (m.)
nation, community (f.)
birthday (m.)
to be stood, to stand
religious procession (m.)
a Sikh martial art like fencing (m.)
to play
Guru Granth; Holy book of the
Sikhs (m.)
installation (f.)
community kitchen (m.)
volunteer (m./f.)
free
15
235
VAISAKHI
2. Identify the appropriate answers

The Vaisakhi festival is associated with:
village people
candles
harvest season
Sikh religion
the new year
3. True or false?
Langar means community kitchen.
Guru Granth is the holy book of the Sikhs .
Gatka is a group dance.
Nagar Kirlan is singing.
True / False
True / False
True / False
True / False
to serve
to take, to consume
rides (m.)
entertainment, enjoyment (m.)
exhibition (f.)
on behalfof
congratulations (f.)
Exercises
1. Answer In Panjabl
Answer the questions in Panjabi in either full sentences or in short form
answers. The answers to the questions can be found in the dialogue. The
first one has been done for you.
a. What is the name of the radio presenter?
iIR CRr.J' eo ?;'Ii ~ ~I (full sentence) or ~ (short answer)
b. What is the report about?
c. What are the main things associated with the Vaisakhi festival?
(name two)
d. What is being served in the community kitchen?
e. What is the name of the game being played in front of the procession?
f. What are the main activities taken place at the Vaisakhi fair?
(name any two)
I!I Folk song: My spinning wheel is of many

colours
5c!m: ~H6'~
10k gee!: charkhaa meraa ranglaa

The following is a traditional Panjabi folk song. Listen to the song on the
tape while reading the verses of the song.
236
PANJABI
""'" H<I' ~ f>:;! Wi ;iIr >l>I'

~ if ~ wt! oro' ire ;rail ~ ~
;rail ~ tiIfur '" feR ~ ~ ~
~ ~
fire c'I
f>:;! 1<
l'I'
C;IOr
>J/'>ilr c'I
~ ~
;iIr feu ;rail ;iIr >l>I'
~ ~ ~ O'U" ~ ~ lJ'OiI ~
~ f>ffi 1lIRl cit ~ ~ ~ ~
iHi tito ~ l'I'8 ~ ~ ~ ~
~ if ~ wt! oro' ire ;rail ~ ~
15
~
~
"F.iIJ;r
~
t>I
seenaa
tito
rarhkanhaa
raahaan
jhaaknhaa
peer
manaaunhaa
<r<P
PJ~
I see your face in the mirror work of the spinning wheel

Continuously looking does not satisfy my eyes' desire
The studded nails of this spinning wheel prick my heart
Day and night I keep watch on the road for your return
Without you, what kind of Vaisakhi am I to celebrate?
For your return I pray to a hundred holy men
and bow my head at many holy places
Oh! I remember you, when I look at the spinning wheel
~ aee'ii;81
""'"
~
i=il'I'
lftI
~
shabdaavalee
charkhaa
ranglaa
sonaa
mekh
ve
Vocabulary
spinning wheel (m.)

colourful (v.)
gold (m.)
nail (f.)
subjunctive particle
vall
vekhnhaa
sheeshaa
gisnhaa
mukhkh
mitnhaa
bhukhkh
My spinning wheel is of many colours, studded with gold nails

Oh! I remember you, when I look at the spinning wheel
237
VAiSAKHI
telcnhaa
towards
to see
mirror (m.)
to be visible, to be seen
face (m.)
to finish, to vanish
hunger (f.)
bosom , heart (m.)
to prick. to rub against
roads, routes (f.)
to stare, to look at
holy man (m.)
to pray, to believe
to bow down
Exercises
abhiaas
After reading the folk song and/or listening to the audio tape, try to do the
following exercise.
Answer the questions (yes or no)

My spinning wheel is many-coloured.
It is studded with nails of gold.
I remember you whenever I look at it.
These nails make me suffer in love.
H<I' ""'" ore'! ~ >:'l'!' UI

feH f>:;! Wi ;iIr >l>I' ~ miIr unl
- ....
~ l>I' ~ fura ~ ~3"'''''''''''';i!m~,.,.;.r unl
I
238
PANJABI
bolee baare
Language points
15
239
VAISAKH I
i iitrs n.rr ~ h
~ ~ ll;rIiI n.rr re -ail
'II';!
<r.!
<r.!
Relative-correlatives
You have already been introduced to the most common relative pronoun,
fi::Jmr which means that (see Unit 9 for a review of how sentences with
relative pronouns are formed). Relative-correlatives are relative pronouns
which are paired with their correlating counterparts. The correlating
counterpart of the relative pronoun f'iro3- can be either
or ~ (that
... which). In English, the sentence I will go when he comes contains only
one relative pronoun when. However, the same sentence would be
expressed in Panjabi as when he comes, then I will go with the relative
pronoun when and its correlative then. There are a number of such
pairings, that can be used to indicate place, time, quantity and likeness.
For example:
You won't learn good Panjabi until

you go to Panjab.
(lit. As long as you don't go to
Panjab, until then you won't learn
good Panjabi.)
~~~orei@l~ The more you work, the more money
ill'i
O!H' ~
you can earn.
(lit. As much work as you will do,

that much more money you will
earn.)
reu
Relative
Correlative
f'iro3f'iro3-
who, which
he , she, it, that
who, which
reu
he, she, it, this
tre'
when
then
;h! <r.!
as long as
fiR'
in such a way
The subjunctive particle
You will recall from Unit 12 that the subjunctive mood is used to indicate
uncertainty or indefiniteness. The particle ~ is associated with the endings
of the subjunctive mood. It is not, however, uncommon to see the particle
~ on its own, particularly in poetic language and songs. It can appear as
part of the verb in the subjunctive or on its own in the phrase or sentence.
In the passage of the song ;rat(' H<I' ~ the particle ~ occurs at the
beginning of the second line:
we crcrI
until then
~ }f ~
in that way
as many, however much
tm
that much , that many
as many, however much
this much, this many
The vocative case, as you learned in Unit 8, is a projection of an address

to someone similar to the English oh! or heyL ~ is a colloquial form of
address in friendly and informal situations.
ftnl
where
there
ftnlllfR'l'
<P f;j ll;rIiI iil'I'I Panjabi is spoken where we live.
~ ~
fiR' pff ~ ij
f'iro3-
<IRa"
8Vc! no F
Y'i
<r.!
lIfR'I' crcrI 11
~~~
(lit. Where we live, Panjabi is

spoken there.)
We'll do as you like.
(lit. As you like, that is the way we
will do.)
Ask directions from the man who has
been to Lahore.
(lit. The man who has been to
Lahore , ask the way from him.)
(Oh!) I remember you.
Theverb~
The verb ~ has occured a number of times throughout the units so far.
In Unit 9 Sirnran asks Jaspreet about the cloth: ~ f'<;rmp ;;tre ~ ~
~ 1, Which one do you like belter? In the second dialogue of Unit 9
Simran says to the doctor: >Iii til ~ cro't ~, I am feeling cold. The basic
definition of ~ is to be applied to, however it can also carry slightly
different meanings. In the fIrst example it means to seem or to appear and
in the second example it has the sense to be struck. In fact ~ is used
in a wide range of situations and it is therefore always necessary to take
the context of the sentence into account. Here are some examples of these
different, yet related, senses of the verb ffiIR:>:
240
PANJABI
"
VAISAKHI
241
hecn a growth in media output. In most big towns and cities in England,
The child will feel cold.

I like living in America. (lit. Living in
America seems good 10 me.)
The house was on (lit. slruck by) fire.
~ to mean time taken or to cost
~~~~m5'ai~?
~ ~ -eJ! f>k 5'ai
fe'q kore m f<t.il ~ ~ "" ?
How long will illake 10 gel 10

Amritsar?
It only took me ten minutes.
How much money does one ticket
COSI? (lit. il take)
~ following an oblique infinitive

In this case, its meaning changes to give the sense 10 begin.
lI'C!B ~ ~
Ii' obi !iTS are<'i ~ m

~ ~ 8'ar fO! 1'1'6 .m e
""
II began 10 rain.
I was aboullO begin work.
He began 10 Ihink Ihal everyone had
left
Oblique infinitives with ~

Th~ general use of ~ in compound constructions was discussed in Unit
9. Cl!' can also be used with oblique inimitives to give the meaning of 10
aI/ow 10 or 10 permIt. Sunilar to the way in which ~ changes its meanmg toto begin when following oblique infmitives, ~ with the oblique
infinitIve also changes its meaning.
~
- ?;
-
>iIe6 ..-..... " '"

.,
ftr ttl ~ ~ ~ ~
Lellhe dog come inside.

om Falher did nol aI/ow me 10
f'lh'I
drive Ihe car.
@U~>ffl"
=
~ >i'<J<! ~ .,., " " They aI/ow their child 10 play outside.
viaakhiaa
Commentary
1. Media
There are many opportunities, living in the West, to interact with Panjabi
speakers and to hear the language being spoken. In particular there has
and the major cities in North America, there are radio stations which either
produce programming totally in Panjabi or have specific Panjabi language
programmes. In Toronto, Canada, a mainstream cable television charmel
broadcasts six hours of Panjabi programming every day. GeneraUy, most
l alellite and cable TV charmels catering for a South Asian audience will
have some Panjabi programmes in addition to Hindi/Urdu, Gujarati and
Bengali programming.
Much of the programming on these TV charmels is taken up with films.
The Indian sub-continent produces more films every year than
Hollywood. Bombay (Mumbai) is the centre of the Indian film industry
and to mark this fact it is affectionately caUed ' Bollywood'. However,
regional fIlm makers are also very significant in the overaU production
and consumption of cinema in South Asia. In fact the Telegu film industry
matches - in terms of number of fIlms produced - that of Mumbai.
Despite the presence of large numbers of Panjabi actors and directors - in
fact the Kapoor family has dominated Indian films over the last forty
years - the Panjabi language film industry is not well developed in East
Panjab. The majority of Panjabi language fIlms are produced in Lahore
(also called 'Lollywood') and are high in action but low in quality, both
cinematicaUy and in terms of language use. However, there are a few
films to be recommended which are useful to watch in order to pick up the
language. These fIlms are available in any South Asian area in England,
Canada and beyond. Wherever a South Asian community is settled, there
is always an outlet for videos and,more recently, cinema halls showing
films from the sub-continent.
2. Poetry
Panjab is renowned for folk poetry, particularly for the tradition of Sufiinspired poems. Poetry flourished in medieval times with poets such as
Bulleh Shah and Warish Shah making indelible implants on the social
consciousness of the Panjabi literati. In the modem period, Bhai VIr Singh
and Arurita Pritam are two poets worthy of mention. Poetry is popular
primarily because of its sung form. The folk song given earlier in this unit
is a good example of a form of poetic verse. Much of this music has
become professionalised and Panjab is the foremost producer of folk
music in India and Pakistan.
242
PANJABI
abhiaas
..
Exercises
_ ....
~"i!
'8Ol ~
16 panjaab de
After reading the dialogue and/or listening to the audio tape try to do the
10k naam
Folk dances of Panjab

In this unit you have learned about relative--{:orrelatives in the language
pomts sectIOn. Fill m the blanks with the appropriate relative--<:orrelative
parrs.
a. _ _ ~
~,
_ _ fu""H
~ ~
The person who runs will win the prize.

u, _w 0RJi -&i
We will do as you like.
c. _
2Jl'I' ~
t1M'>iI >mI #ttl ~
Panjabi is spoken where you live.
about the folk dances of Panjab

about experiences of the Panjabi diaspora
b. _ _ 2Jl'I' ~
phrases of choice
u, _
d. _
if
"I'ti\, _
til
>If'6'H
r fw>r
When I took the medicine I felt relief immediately.

Complete the sentences in Panjabi with the appropriate expressions of to
allow to. The fIrst one has been done for you.
a. ~ fi >iRa (~ ~ Let him come inside.
b. ~?;
Let the dog go out.
c. ~ ~-Let me drink juice.
d. >init
fi c1 <:'I
Allow the lady to watch TV
3. Write sentences using the verb ~

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
It takes fUteen minutes to get to work.

How much does one fIrst-class ticket cost?
I am feeling hot.
It started to rain.
We were about to go out.
1111
Folk dances of Panjab

am tra' "I t1i:rl3 -e 5cr no;:J
gall baat 1 panjaab de 10k naach
It is the end of Mr Singh's Panjabi class. He has taken all the students to
a cultural programme in the Southall Community Centre to see a range of
folk dances. As they enter the hall they hear the sound of drums and see
the dancers.
Uira '" ffi! "'" teo \l' .ro <J?f.! ;< ~ ~ ure.r III
~ ill ~ "Ire fAa;: Oa rnff Ri' R5 ~ ~ ~ ~ III
iri "C'fIo!"!I "el"I' ~ ~ <J?IIT<r ~ "'" ~ ,.".,lll ri' 2R'I' Uira
iI' >r<Rl ~, 11Il1I' i!!>I mri!! ~I
oil fR<R: lji teo ~ <J?< ?
~ ;;wi! m 11Il1I' lJfpr mil JiI it fII'tIo ~ mil Jill ~
>IIr ~ l!8 f>m ,."., III i!!>I I fII'tIo li!!! ~ ,."., ~I
~ N'3 fe'O! ~ ~ lIIiI' <rdI ~ >d riI ~ it 'I>fiI' _
<rdI ~I
"" iet ~ _ m ~I lOI'Ci, >oN' ~ I
~ lji ~ it
~
244
PANJABI
16
245
FOlK DANCES OF PANJAB
Oe
iii'
pair
sagon
fell
riW'
!Iii
feet (m.)
but also
heart (m.)
to dance
folk verse couplets (f.)
nachchnhaa
boleeaan
modern
ajokaa
raised, born and bred
janmpal
~
youth (m.)
~
naujuaan
composition (f.)
~
rachnaa
lffl M' l'i' lffl manno jaan naa manno believe it or not
international
>I/ira <rJre<iI amarr aashlaree
times (m.)
~
zamaanaa
women's fo lk dance (m.)
f'IIi'qo
gidhdhaa
te'I>II'
..r.r.r
Mr Singh Those boys on the stage are peiforming bhangra, a folk

dance of Panjab. They are wearing sparkling, colouiful
clothes. They are carrying long wooden poles in their hands.
David
One man is carrying a big drum.
Mr Singh With the beat of the drum , it is not only the feet but also the
heart that starts dancing.
The verses of bhangra are old fashioned. I like the new,

modern songs which are composed by young people born
and raised here.
Mr Singh Believe it or not, bhangra has become an international
dance. Whether you are in Panjab or abroad, you can always
see bhangra.
Jane
Do only boys peiform bhangra?
Mr Singh In the old times, bhangra was for the boys and gidha was
for the girls. Now everything is mixed up. Look! The gidha
has started.
David
One of the girls is playing a small drum and the other girl is
tapping the small drum with a spoon.
Everyone is in high spirits. Come on, let's dance.!
Jane
Jane
shabdaavalee
10k naach
chamkeelaa
rangQaar
daang
dhol
vajjnhaa
Vocabulary
folk dance (m.)

glittering, shining , sparkling (v.)
colouiful
long wooden pole (f.)
big drum (m.)
to be played, to be beaten
~ ~
NV
i!roiI
~
ral mi!nhaa
vichchon
dholkee
vajaaunhaa
charnchaa
maamaa
charhh!lee kalaa
IJ llIfB''''R
abhiaas
to be mixed
from within
small drum (f.)
to play (music), to beat
spoon (m.)
to hit, to tap
high spirits
Exercises
1. True or false?
~iI>fflmh;r~~mm
b. ~ I; tro m ~ 8'R m; fH<riI ~ ~ ~ i! m;
c. ;ma;i~A'~m;
d.
h;r >l/Or i!
True /False
True / False
True / False
True / False
2. Write or say the sentences in Panjabi

a. I like hhangra.
b. I like bhangra more than gidha.
c. Whether you're in Panjab or abroad, you can see bhangra.
d. Come on, let's dance!
PANJABI
246
3. Try to identify the items from the descriptions given
in the dialogue
a.
c.
t%l2 Avtar's life story

I!l ~ ~ ~ 1II<:3'C! tfl ~ or<riI
gall baat 2 avtaar dee jeevan kahaanhee
Two men, Avtar and Tarlok, are sitting on a park bench in Vancouver
enjoying the sunny day. Avtar is reminiscing about his family's history
and how he came to settle in Vancouver.
oil ~ ~ ~ f;:;J or.iI fifm JiI fc! "I>iI' feR lIHa f;:;J ~
<ffiI oro ti>:I ~ ? il<I' tr;R';!' ~ ~ " ' " ~ !it ~ T<I3't ~
farr 3 ~ ~ ~ in f'i!'>r farrl Ha i!'<! "i!' iIOH f i m'erl
iR' ~ ~ ~ <J' r.r.!l .ret iR iIftR BS ~ ~ Jill il<I'
"i!'"i!' lIIi!'6 ~ f;:;J >.rH5 ~ iii ~ "I' farrl
oil 3<!' iIOH ~ m'er JiI ?
~ ~I J!'i ~ " "" "" "i!' ~ tiW ~, mi 1.1' iii il<I'
"="
,t.,
"i!'"i!' ~ !f'i farrl fi:a

f;:;J ~ "i!' ~ ~ farrl ~
Ha fu3' ill ~ W; 3 >r6 tre>:'<! ~ i!!I'tIa =' fu"i'l ,i,. iIOH
i!!I'tIa m'er Jill

"i!'"i!' ill ebre
Ha
3,
~ ~
a $ .re .re, il<I'iIOH _
,t" f;:;J Irs D' iii "I>iI' \Ifu5 ~ .re ~ fi:a ~ "I' .re,
feR "i!' >m!>I feu ~ fc! <JJiI'

~ 3' ;m't j!a 3' """
- - ill
_
'!"~ <Ie
<J'I "" ~ il<I' re.. "'"' farr 3, R "I>iI' ~ 3' ca <J', fI!'ij
"I'UiI ~ or;:'! 3, >MiH ~ ~ ~,
~ f;:;J fc!R ~ ~ .re i!', R ~ R ~ W
"fHa'tor, ikl n ikl "I'lR" .rn..n It.!- ?i'; fHH ore aI"
"" ~ iior ~ <In fc! iitiI "i!' ~- 7<' 11/6 "i!' 7<' ""'" "i!' I
feu """" Y'= 3, ~ R'al ~ ~ ~, ~ m oRl ar ,
16
247
FOLK DANCES OF PANJAB
Avtar Did we ever dream in our childhood that at this age we

would be living in Canada? My great grandfather joined the
army during the time of British rule and he was sent to Malaysia.
My grandfather was born there. When he returned home , the
struggle for independence had started. My grandfather joined
the Gadar Party and came to Vancouver.
Tarlok So, were you born in Canada?
Avtar It's a long story. Our forefathers have been to many places flit.
our forefathers drank water from many different places]. After
a while, my grandfather returned to Panjab. Then in 1947 Panjab
was partitioned. At that time my father was in Lyallpur and the
whole family had to go to lalandhar. I was born in lalandhar.
Tarlok My grandfather went to East Africa to build the railWays. My
birthplace is Uganda. In 1971 we left everything and went first
to England and then came to Canada.
Avtar This means that you have been uprooted from Panjab for a long
time.
Tarlok Yes. But even though we are far away from Panjab, I am now
happily settled {lit. my heart has been applied or fixed]. There are
quite a lot of our own people here. The atmosphere is just like
Panjab.
Avtar Go anywhere in the world, whether it's Canada, England or
America, and you will meet a Panjabi person.
Tarlok But wise men say that immigrants belong to no one place.
{Proverb: the dog of a washerman belongs neither at home nor
at the washing place.}
Avtar This is an old proverb. Now the whole world belongs to you.
God will watch over you.
Mse'C8l
~
~
l.IlIl!'t!'
~
iii
R3'I
nnli
shabdaavalee
jeevan
bachpan
parhQaa\!aa
raaj
vele
fauj
bhaItee
janam
Vocabulary
life (m.)
childhood (m.)
great grandfather (m.)
rulership, kingdom (m.)
period, time (m.)
military (f.)
join
birth (m.)
248
PANJABI
pat1nhaa
~
azaa~ee
;R ~
ja~o jahi~
~
;R azaa~ee laee
~
ja~ojahi~
to return
freedom, independence (f.)
struggle (f.)
struggle for independence
...
wm
249
abhiaas
Exercjses
1. Name four countries mentioned in the dialogue
gha~ar
mutiny (m.)
iRO \l'cre'I
gha~ar paartee Gadar Party (f.) (an anti-colonial
political movement in Panjab in
the early 20th century which had
strong connections with Vancouver
because of the large number of
exiles from Panjab who went there)
5w
lanbaa
long, lengthy (v.)
c:a"foriJI;
vadkkiaan
ancestorsJorefathers (m.)
.r.r
iliaan iliaan
each and every place (m.)
~ \I' i,i
samaan paa ke after a while, after some time
murhnaa
~
to turn around. to return
~
batvaaraa
division, partition (m.)
~~ eest afreekaa
East Africa (m.)
yoogandaa
Uganda (m.)
'.ifh'
ilnHlIImI'i'i
janam asiliaan birthplace (m.)
ukharhnaa
~
to be displaced, to be uprooted
ft!5~
~il laggnhaa
to feel at home, to be settled, to live
happily
~
~
koee na koee
some one or another
~
siaanhaa
wise, mature (v.)
~
dhobee
washerman (m.)
kunaa
dog (m.)
<ft'
1IR
ghaat
place where clothes are washed on
the bank of the river or canal (m.)
>If>I'i!
akhaanh
proverb, saying (m.)
bhalee
look after, watch over
iRO
16
2. Answer the questions

Answer the following questions in Panjabi either in short form or in full
sentences. You may lift the answers from the dialogue.
Wi' ~ ruR f<:;J 1Ii'5' OR! ..ro <10, ~ i! <'i'H oil

i! -..i! '" ili'H foffl iirer >it 7
c. oR' lI= '" trei:'a' ~ furr, >If':3'6 '" fu3' foffl >it 1
d. ~ '" ili'H _ _ foffl 5 1
e. ~ >Ii! oil orfm! <10 7
a.
b.
<10
>If':3'6
3. Give the reasons why Avtar and Tarlok's families

migrated to each place
i! ~ iii ~ fo!f ~ >it 7
i! """ iii ~ fo!f ~ >it 1
c. ,t89 m >If':3'6 i! JI'6 ~ t: ~ fo!f
d. ~ i! """ iii """" ~ fo!f ~ >it 7
a.
b.
>If':3'6
>JP:3'a
bolee baare
ftI'>t' 1
Language points
Future continuous
The future continuous is used when an ongoing action in the future is
being described, similar to the usage in the English sentence I will be
going . This would be expressed in Panjabi as H' N' fa<J' ~ .... The future
continuous can also be used in situations when the on-going action in the
future was not certain at the time of contemplation. For example. at the
beginning of the second dialogue. when Avtar says to Tarlok oil R"'E: or.!!
~ >it for "IRl' Wiir
..ro ~ iii 1. Did we ever dream that we would
be living in Canada? In English the uncertainty of the sentence would be
expressed through the use of would rather than will. In Panjabi the future
continuous tense can be used for both types of situations.
oro
PANJABI
250
In previous units you were introduced to both the present continuous tense
and the future tense. The future continuous tense can be most simply
understood as a combination of the present continuous and the future
tenses. Notice in the following examples how the future continuous
combines the two tenses:
Future tense
Present continuous
Future continuous
Future tense
Present continuous
Future continuous
>r~.
>r iI' firoo ut

>r iI' firoo iP:'
>IfRI' ~ i
>IfRI' >I' .ro ut
>IfRI' >I' .ro iP:' i
I will go
I am going
I will/would be going
We will eat
We are eating
We will/would be eating
The continuous action in the sentence takes the present continuous form
such as in these examples with going represented through the stem iI' and
eating with the stem >1', and with the appropriate forms offiroo. You should
have noticed that the auxiliary verb that comes at the end of the present
continuous tense does not appear in the future continuous. Instead, the
verb ~ is in the future form with the respective -. endings.
Phrases of choice
In English, phrases of choice are expressed through such words as either
... or, neither ... nor and not only ... but also. In Panjabi there are similar
types of constructions to express choice most commonly using the following:
ri' ... ri'

~ ...~
?;' ... ?Ii'
.... fJI<Il:' ... Jli'
"' . .....
either ". or, whether or not

either ... or, whether or not
neither ... nor
not only ... but
may or not
16
251
Some examples of these words in use:
ri' pIT ~ R ....

fu"iI ~~
~,
>r
;!'i "R'i i'i'5 rt? ;!'i ~

~, lWO mr.iI ~
i'i'5
Whether you go or not, I will stay

here. (lit. Whether you go or whether
you do not go, I will stay here.)
Whether you come with us or
(whether you) go with them,

you'll have to get out quickly.
"R'i ii5 .... ~ un .... CI'iIIi.1 ii We have neither books nor paper.
50! .... fl:!a;: ~ 3' ~ un People come not only from India,
but from all over the world.
JW wal ~ 3' ~ un
You
mayor may not agree but this
~",o'~fuu~mr3'
is the nicest place.
~ii
ii<!'
U 111' and "Fit ill'

In colloquial Panjabi, the verb ~ is often expressed with the ending -111'
when there is an added emphasis. The ending -. merely indicates
definiteness or confirmation, and must agree with the number and gender
of the subject that it is referring to followed by the appropriate present
form of~. In Unit 3 Jane and Henry went to the sweets shop with Mr
Singh. Jane asked the shopkeeper oil m 0H0iIn ma 31, Is there anything
salty? This question is general in nature. If Jane had wished to put further
emphasis on the defInite availability of something salty, she could have
said: oil m 0H0iIn ma 3 ~ i! 1, Is there anything salty (available) ?
The shopkeeper could have then replied ut iii, 3 ~ i!; Yes, there
(definitely) is. Note that the feminine singular form is used (-~ ) in
agreement with ma, although in the shopkeeper's response the subject is
omitted as it is simply understood. Since 3 is only used in informal
speech, the auxiliary verb ~ also appears in its informal form, hence i!
instead of 3.
When one wants to express the same type of defIniteness in the past,
then "Fit (was) is followed by the ending -. Again, the number and gender
of the subject will determine the ending of - . Some examples are as
follows:
~ ~ fR>ffln 1IIl! "Fit lIit>or
Jaspreet and Simran were (definitely)
at home.
pit' ;!'u ;rt.I "Fit i

You (certainly) were quiet.
You will come across 3 and "Fit frequently in spoken colloquial
conversation, though rarely in the written form.
252
PANJABI
viaakhiaa
Commentary
Folk music
Folk music is an integral part of cultural expression not only in Panjab, but
in the three Panjabs: East Panjab in India, West Panjab in Pakistan and the
Panjabi diaspora allover the world. In fact, music is one of the main
factors that links Panjabis across religious, national and caste divisions.
Bhangra music, in particular, has come to prominence in the last twenty
years in the west. The picture of the two boys on the cover of this book
actually shows the traditional costume of bhangra dancers. This active
and incessant dance music form is a vital part of a global expression of
youth culture as well as a particular link between des (home) and pardes
(abroad) for many Panjabis.
As we saw in the previous unit, there are many other musical fonns from
Panjab which focus on the relationship between music and poetry which
are less related to the robust dance style of bhangra and more to the flIn1
music and ghazal (ballad) form. A wide range of Panjabi music from
westemised dance music to slow ballads is widely available in the South
Asian shopping centres of London, New York, Toronto and Melbourne.
abhiaas
Exercises

Complete the sentences (verbally or in written form) with the help of the
vocabulary given. The fIrst one has been done for you.
a.
Iri;re ... for.r"I' <In.... 0I'lJIiI itl

We have neither books nor paper.
b.
JI'3;re ... _ _ _ <In.... _ _ _ itl
c. JI'3;re...
<In. ...
Iri;re...
<In. ...
d.
tm5'
pencils
i3iiW1
radio
0!'tiI
itl
itl
exercise book
>i<ffi' bottles
water
watches
16
fOLK DANCES Of PANJAB
253
2. Say or write the sentences in Panjabi

a. >Iii i ... >Iii. fe<J iIijf ~ itl
Believe it or not, this place is beautiful.
b. Not only is this book long, but it is also difficult.
c. Not only do we like bhangra, but we also like gidha.
d. Whether you live in Panjab or abroad, you can see bhangra.
e. You mayor may not agree, but Vancouver's atmosphere is just like
Panjab.
3. Tick the boxes which correspond with Tarlok and

Avtar's respective life histories
APPENDIX 1
Velar
Consonants
KEY TO EXERCISES
Palatal Retroflex Dental Labial
Unaspirated
or
;J
"l:
tl
Aspirated
>f
11
lS
II
Unaspirated
ijT
iI
is
<!
II
Aspirated
11/
1:1
'Q
lIi
0:
"l:
?;
}j
Voiceless
>f
1;1
Jl
:;:
Voiced
ill
Voiceless
Plosives
Reading and writing
Voiced
Nasals
Fricatives
if
Flapped and Tapped

sounds
Aspirate, semivowel and liquid
;I
<J
1iI
"
8
0:
roan
Lesson 4 Exercise 2 a. f'<h: b. fcI'8 c.

Lesson 5 Exercise 2 a. mtt
b. fltm c. m Lesson 6 Exercise 2 a. ~ b. mI'i' C. f1'; Lesson 7
Exercise 2 a.!o b. lJ6 c. ~ Lesson 8 Exercise 2 a. m! b. n c. jja
Lesson 9 Exercise 2 a. h
b. '"""'" c ...... Lesson I 0 Exercise 2 a. ;a.
b. ~ c. 1ii3' Lesson II Exercise 2 a. ~ b. f'>IR c.!iIl Lesson 12
Exercise 2 a. ~ b. >!tr c. u'f
Unit 1
Dialogue 1 exercises
APPENDIX 2
1. a. True b. True c. False 2. a. }ffio ,.; ilf';:;r ~I meraa naan devid hai. b.
"""" oil "">i ~ 7 luhaadaa kee naam hai? c. ;r..,. oil ,.; i! 7 leraa kee naan e?
Comparison of tongue positions
1. a. l>i'R!I'>! R!o!H1 asslaam alaikam. b. """" oil "'" ~ 7 luhaadaa kee haal
hai? c. oil \IQ>:'6 l5'tor ~ 7 kee parvaar theek hai? 2. a. 2 b. 3 c. I
End exercises
a. Pronunciation of t and d in English. Tongue against the teeth ridge.

b. Pronunciation of ~ I and <! !t. Tongue against the base of upper
incisors.
c. Pronunciation of t! t and 11 d. Tongue against the back hard palate.
1. 1st line, 2nd letter; 3rd line, 1st letter; 5th line, 4th letter 2. a.~
namas!e b. >riIo!H l>i'R!I'>! vaalaikam asslaam c. I'If<r >p rom sal sree akaal
3. a. """" !uhaadaa b. ;r..,. !eraa c.;r..,. leraa 4. You: I'If<r >p roml }ffio "">i
___ ~, """" oil "">i ~ 7 sa! sree akaal. meraa naam _ _ hai. tuhaadaa
kee naam hai? You: >'l' l5'tor ;il ~ foR ~ 7 main theek haan. tuseen kiven
ho? You: <hi ~I rabb raakhaa.
PANJABI
256
KEY TO EXERCISES
257
Unit 2
Unit 4
I. a. False
Gujarati
I. b. oft feu >iR: lftft ~ 7 kee ih seet khaaJee hai? <I' ill, lftft ~I haan jee,
kbaalee hai. c. >l' ~ <1'1 main adhiaapkaa haan. d. ~ oft ~ ~ 7
luseen kee kar!:le ho? 2. a. >l' ~ ~ af<t.!o <I' main vee barmingham
rahindaa haan. b. >l' r.ret ;r <I' main dillee Ion haan. c. ~ oft ~ ~ 7
!useen kee kar!:le ho? 3. 1. c 2. a 3. b 4. e 5. d
b. False
c. True 2. Jeevan - Panjabi John - English Ram -
1. Ashok: <I' ill, >l'
<1'1 haan jee, main ashok haan. Mrs Sharma: ila'
lito! ~I meraa haal theek hai. Kiran: n.:if, lRI >n' ill fiffl n.:if <:ml
naheen, mere maalaa jee iththe naheen han. 2. a. >l' f;;r.rn <1'1 main kiran
haan. b. oft ~. ~ 7 kee tuseen ashok ho? c. ~ fiffl n.:if <:m uh i!h the
naheen han. 3. 1. Panjabi 2. English 3. Class 4. Mrs Sharma 5. Hindu
U'8
End exercises
1. are, hai, ~ 2. a. oft ~
~ 7 kee tuseen ashok ho? b. oft ~ f;;r.rn ~
7 kee tuseen kiran ho? c. >l' f;;r.rn <I' main kiran haan d. ~
~ uh
ashok hai 3. a. ~ hain b. <I' haan c. <:m han 4. 1st line 2nd letter 3rd line
I st letter 4th line 2nd letter
Unit 3
1. a. False b. False c. True d. False e. True 2. ~ karelaa _
filii bhindee ilI'I gobhee ~ tamaatar ~ matar
shalgam
a. True b. True c. False 2. a. ila' <'i'H <--J ~I meraa naam
hai. b. >l' <--J <1'1 main <--J haan. c. >l' <--J ;r <1'1
main L---> Ion haan. d. >l' <--J af<t.!o/ <If<t.!l <1'1 main <--J
rahinQaa/rahindee haan.
I.
<--J
End exercises
1. a. True b. False c. False d. False 2. a. Mrs Sharma b. Mrs Khan
c. Dr Singh 3. a. direct b. ohlique c. direct d. oblique e. oblique 4. b. ilcit>lI'
itI"I' JI m ~ <:ml mereeaan beteeaan sakool vich parhh!:leeaan
han. My daughters study in school. c. 2U'i ....r.t f<;ffl <Ifff.! <:m 7 tuhaade
larhke ki!h!he rahinde han? Where do your sons live? d. oft ~ !3i tlil'>iI
aR <:m 7 kee uh munde panjaabee bol!:le han? Do those boys speak
Panjabi?
Unit 5
1. miththaa, bitter, ~ 2. a. feu ~ ~I ih !:Iukaan hai. b. feu ;hit ~

ih changee !:Iukaan hai. c. feu ~ ;it ~ ~I ih mithiaaee !:lee
!:Iukaan hai. d. feu ;hit ~ ;it ~ ~I ih changee mithiaaee !:lee
!:Iukaan hai.
~I
End exercises
1. a. WZ' chotaa b. 7hr vaddaa c. itt chotee d . .r.n vaddee e. WZ' chotaa
f. 7hr vaddaa 2. Mr Singh: samosaa, pakaurhe, bhindee Jane: samosaa,
laddoo, pakaurhe Henry: rasmalaaee, bhindee, gobhee 3. a. ~
iI'Hl' gulaab jaamanh b. sa;:'! barfee c. RilJIo SamOsaa d. uti pakaurhe
4. a. ~ ~ uhnaan !:Ie b. lRI mere c. >I'iI'II' saadeeaan d. ~
tuhaadeeaan
1. a. ",m, S' oft '"" am ~ 7 namasle, loon kee kar rahee hain? b. >l' il>I'
_ &it <1'1 main jebaan lagaa rahee haan. c. >li<ire >rill <n<:tf'<I n.:if 'It!' firo'l
mainejar saadee lan!illaah naheen vadhaa ribaa. 2. 1. machine 2. work
3. salary 4. pockets 5. time 6. needle
1. 1st line 2nd letter 2nd line 1st letter 3rd line 3rd letter 4th line 2nd letter
2. a. !!'ffir 1imH ~ &it Jill sumeel mam !:Iekh rahee see. b. -.t@ ihJ .ro >11<1
bachche khed rahe san. c. !!'ffir '" '"" ora ;j firo' Jill sumeel !:Iaa patee kaar
lIbo ribaa see.
PANJABI
258
End exercises
I. a. i!'it' ,.,.. ;;rfenr CIa <!i jjl !Useen samaan zaaiaa kar rahe ho. b. i!'it' m.
~ 1h <!i jj ? !Useen kanm kiun chadd rahe ho? c. i!'it' 15'tor 0Ifu <!i jjl
!Useen Iheek kahi rahe ho. 2. palee, house/home, oil! 3. b. i!'it' oil >J- <!i
>it ? !Useen kee puchch rahe see? What were you asking? c. ~ oil CIa <!i
w; ? uh kee kar rahe san? What were they doing ? d. ~ O!'itl uh
kaar dho ribaa see. He was washing the car. 4. a. -aihP ~;;r., am 51 geelaa lainas khed rahee hai. Geeta is playing tennis. b. !iiS'6 ~ >I' fa<J' 5 1
avlaar khaanhaa khaa rihaa hai. Avtar is eating food. c. >ihr ~ -aihP tliI'>it
>Is adtr m<1 seelaa Ie geelaa panjaabee bol raheeaan han. Sita and Geeta
are speaking Panjabi. d. ~ fc!3'tI "'! fa<J' 51 mundaa kilaab parhh rthaa
hai. The boy is reading a book.
I. a. ~ """ >itl pavan landan see. Pavan was in London. b. ~;it rnH't
>itl pavan gee bhaleejee gaa viaah see. It was Pavan's niece's wedding . c. ~ maanchaislar Manchester d. ~ ' 0 0 @ lalaeeban
100 bande about lOa people 2. a. i!'it' ~ f;;ffl >it 7 !Useen ailYaar kiID
IDe see? b. i!'it' oil! f;;ffl >it ? !Useen ka1lh kilhthe see? c. i!'it' ~ i! >OOa
f;;ffl >it ? !Useen haf!e ge akheer kithlhe see?
;!' ~
1. ~, woman ikathth, gathering ~, praahunhe ~, college ....n,
bhaabee 2. a. informal b. informal c. formal
End exercises
l.
~
Gurmeel
iifWa
Jogindar
I
~
Sukhjeel
,-
Jagjeel
Pavan
Unit 7
Harleen
kinoe vaje 2. 4. 2. 3. I.
I. a. i!'it' oil tiI i 7 !Useen kee peeo ge? b. oil i!'it' ~ >:l i!ti i 7 kee !Useen
lee vee gekho ge? c. oil i!'it' <m ~ i "' ;ro 7 kee luseen ras lavo ge jaan
chaah? 2. lSI line l sI lener 3rd line 3rd lener 5th line 2nd lener
End exercises
l. a. i ~ loon sunh b. i!'it'!!! !Useen sunho c. i!'it' !!! iit !Useen sunho
jee d. iRI' ~ iit zaraa sunlmaa jee 2. 1. <!R ~ m< gas vaje han 2.m
.;I m< dhaaee vaje han 3. ~ ~ m< paunhe che vaje han 4.
>l/'l5 .;I
m< savaa athth vaje han 5. -.' ~ m< baar-h-aan vaje han 6. >fa- .;I m<
sal! vaje han 3. a. H' ;ro tiR' lJI' main chaah peevaan gaa b. H' ;ro tiR' ~
main chaah peevaan gee c. lIfR'I' ;ro tiR' i aseen chaah peevaan ge d. lIfR'I'
;ro tiR' 1l'1>li' aseen chaah peevaan geeaan 4. a. <I iit, ~ haan jee,
!!hannvaag b. <I, oil! H' - ' 1I' haan, kallh main aavaan gaa c. n.it H' 01'<18
ffi OOa """ n.it

W;I uh haf!e ge akheer landan naheen gae san. oil ~ ~ i! >OOa """
W; 7 kee uh haf!e ge a!illeer landan gae san? c. lIfR'I' ~ ~ n.it ~
JIll aseen ikaththe lainas naheen khedQe see. oil lIfR'I' ~ ~ iGi! >it 7
kee aseen ikaththe tainas khedge see? d. ~ tliI'>it n.it >I8;iI ~ >itl uh
panjaabee naheen bolgee hundee see oil ~ tliI'>it >I8;iI ~ >it 7 kee uh
panjaabee bolgee hundee see?
e
e
l. a. ~ zaroor b. oil! kallh c.
Unit 6
259
KEY TO EXERCISES
Balgev
I. I. fiI3'e silaar 2. B'fRI daalar 3. ~ kbarchaa 4. j'e,.. phirnaa

2.a.2 b.3 c. 1
260
PANJABI
I. a. ~ >r.ft ~ .t.rtft ~ ~I saanoo!l Ihorhee bahulee paujaabee aaun
gee hai. b. "1m' or= ui!R ire' ~ u'l aseen kanaal pales jaanhaa
chaahundeeaan haan. c. iii cit ~ ~ }{<ft;i a1'm! ~ rfar>Jr ~ iii jee kee
luseen go maheene rahinh gee aagiaa gevo ge. 2. a. ~ ~ ~ u jf R>!'n
>:'I ~ ~I Iuseen go savaareeaan ho Ie samaan vee bahul hai. b. >I'1i 'R!
~ ft!'ol }{<ft;i ;!' -.:1i.!' ~, saade kol keval ikk maheene ~aa veezaa hai.
c. """" >R I anand maanho!
261
KEY TO EXERCISES
If>R'
~, meraa sir gukhkhgaa hai. c. ila il<: for.! """ ~, mere pet
vich garg hai. d. >I!! ~ ~I mainoon !1ukhaar hai. 3. a. }f <i'! ><til' ""
Rir.!'/RO/;;'h main kallh naheen aa sakgaajsakgee. b. cit ~ .t.rtft ilB ~
6? kee Iuseen paujaabee bol sakge ho? c. "1m' 1.If'uit ~ iI' ;tal u'l aseen
pamle uthlhe jaa chuke haan. d. ~ 1.If'uit >j' ;tal "'" uh pamJe khaa chuke
han. 4. a. fiImr jihrhaa b. f;m jis c. firo3 jihrhe d. if jo
Unit 10
End exercises
I. a. ;rtiI;;'t chaaheegee b. "iJ'tiRo chaaheegaa c. ~ vajaaunh 2. a. ~ ~
cit"iJ'tiRo ~? us noon kee chaaheedaa hai? b. titfI, 1l'"O'l'; cit"iJ'tiRo ~? dheeo
!uhaanoon kee chaaheegaa hai? c~a fcro,..; ~ >ii? toon kihnaan noo~
gassiaa see? d. cit ~ ire'"iJ'tiRo ~? kee sa~oon jaanh;a chaaheeg;a hai?

3. a. 1IRJ ~ ghar vaalaa b. ~ ~ laiksee vaalaa c. mr.iI ~ sabzee
vaalaa 4. four Ashoka Holel Rs50 agreed 10 miles none yes
I. a. True b. False c. False 2. I. c 2. b
3. a 4. d
I. a. """ iii jf ....., iii 'R! naanaa jee!e naanee jee kol b. ~ gurh c. or.:rtI>JII
~
kahaanheeaan sunheeaan d. ~ gudhdh 2. pind, village '4'1, waterwell vihrhaa, court yard la, khe! .,.., sugarcane
Unit 9
I. a. ~ r.Foi ~
"iJ'tiRo ~, mainoon phikke rang gaa kaprhaa chaaheegaa hai. b. ~ >reo >IS ~ 0Mi' "iJ'tiRo ~, mainoon molaa ale handhanhsaar kaprhaa chaaheedaa hai. c. i'i! <i'! j! <I':'il ~ ~ ~ ~I-ajj
kallh ge ravaaj gee chapaaee chaaheegee hai. d. ;;fh.a ~ /'i;TI'i!' ><til' ~
"i!'dRl1 keema! bahu! ziaagaa naheen honhee chaaheegee. 2. vadheeaa,
good ~, vadhere ;;fh.a, price mukaablaa, comparison mr 3' ~, best
;!'
0Mi'
I. a. cit ~ ~? kee !alcleef hai? b. cit ~ >nta ~? kee tainoon bukhaar
hai? c. ~ }f ~I hunh main samajillaa.-2~ You: ~-!abee~ Doctor:
~ !akleef You: ire pet, """ garg, ~ bukhaar Doctor: ~ bukhaar,
til" thand Doctor: ~ gavaaee, "I6'H araam
End exercises
I. Horizontal: 1st line 1st letter 2nd line 2nd letter 3rd line 1st letter
4th line 3rd letter 5th line 2nd letter Vertical: I st column 3rd letter 2nd
column 2nd letter 3rd column 2nd letter 4th column 1st letter 5th column 1st letter 2. a. ~ til" """'" ~, mainoon thand lagggee hai. b. il<r f>rn
End exercises
I. a.
>j'
it "1m'
j!j'
RI khaanhaa khaa ke aseen saun gel b.
fq /'8>Irt gukaan!e jaa ke gudhdh liaa! c. ~ ~ OR! it
~ jf iI'
it
1IRJ ~ ;R! iI't
kanm khatam kar ke !OOn ghar noon chale jaa! d. mnre u it ~ ~I

jalandhar ho ke anmrilsar jaao! 2. a. >ril khaal!he b. ~ roee c. ~
sunhaaee d. orkr katiaa 3. You: ~ R!liI ~I >r cd '",dld ~
(dIl!'I/far) >IS ~ ;!' 0!'8H ~I }f ~ Om! >:'I {dIl!'I/far)1 bahUI
suhnhee rahee. main taraafaalgar sakuar (gaee/giaa) ale nailsan gaa
kaalam gekillaa. main bakingham pailas vee (gaee/giaa). You: >r jjj"Riaa
RaO!R (dIl!'I/far) >IS ~ 0!lI3 ~I main auksford sarkas (gaee/giaa) ate
kujh kaprhe khareege. You: >r ~ UI;;r >j'Q'1 main keval peezaa khaal!haa.
4. I. '4'1 waterwell 2. >lV majhjh 3 . .,.. garroaa 4. "'" ghar 5. la khel
Unit 11
I. a. f?O!c "'!iI b. HRt{I3 c. f?O!c "'!iI d. fRHa>< e. HRt{I3 2. a. "1m' i'i! ire'
~ u'l b. ...:tor ~ ~ ;hit
-.k ~I
C. fe;] "" ~ ~ ~I
262
PANJABI
263
KEY TO EXERCISES
Dialogue exercises
1. 1. b 2. d 3. a 4. c 2. 1. gold 2. dome 3. visitors 4. world 5. city

6. guru Mystery word: Amritsar
1. a. 2 b. 1 c. 4 d. 3 2. a. Edinburgh b. Ilford c. Manjit Singh d. Kanwaljit

Kaur e. Gurbax Singh and Jasvir Kaur Kalsi f. North London g. May 23
h. 9:30 a.m. i. 10:00 a.m. j. 12:00 noon
End exercises
1. a. """ tIir>I b. ~, H'il c. lllir.ft, 1I'>fa' ? ~ d. U 1'6<1' ~, lrit,
'l!l! <rH "'" b. 1I'>fa' ? ~ c. ~ ;; Wol'i'llr m'er U 3. You:
}f I'iI r.!'m ~ (~ <PI m< 'if "-it r.!'m
.ret ai'a'I fcr.:rs'I
You:
ail ~ >tfr.r OIH'R m. me: f\.re .re ijftl You: ><tiI', ~ ~ fcore
;rtiI;iI UI 'If>pma 'if .r.tt
~ 'iIffi!t
You: .rr, ~ ft!'OI >tfr.r OIH'R -.it
~ 2. a.
fcore
u?
u?
~I
End exercises
I. Matrimonial advertisement ihr?; m. afu .ro flt'tI H'ftIJ>II -.it 53aiI 8tI
1'e>.!3 -.it ffiI UI 53aiI -.it ~ ~~ >1'8 -.it U lII3 oI'c 5' 3" UI 53aiI !!<lit ;; "'!'l
fB>it UI ;r.;r m. obi ""'" UI """" ~ ua>:'6 ?, ~ >.If,,"' .... '="" lII3
f!rooa'I ?ioRft ;; l'i'lIr ~I 2. a. fi!U' b. ~ c. ~ d. r.ro 3. a. ~ m!
b. lif'a>Jr m'er c. ~ faf'>Ir 4. a. ~ b. ifu'I ? c. ><til' d. ~t Ml'O:<I't e. ~
~ ;!tor <IJI>i >!'i ~ ;r,j;tt U
Unit 12
Unit 14
Dialogue exercises
1. a. False b. True c. False d. True 2. a.
c. R1'mia', !:fcl"ffi' d. 'If>pma
iI6HO, ~, t?;r.it
b.
O'H
>l'm!
Letter exercises
1. lagaa!aar, continuously fur6, dear khush, happy ~, garmee ~,
instance 2. a. ~ .. ~ HOI'O ~ fiffl ~ ~ H'3' Mr <Ifff.! ~
b. 1re>.I c. "I'I'-.it ;; ~ "l}3 U d. "l}3 ~
!!ail <PI c. ~ >i5 ~ lml d. ~ "" f>k 'if >i5 1'6<1'

;ma $~ gil <ttl "IHiitc!>; 3. fur6
uf'a>fire
~ Qae'iii61 ~ ai ~
1. a. }f
>j'
1=I'fua
1. a. lI'tl' iii I ail ~ >re >.{it ~ ~ fH5

? b. ~ ~ ;hft d<f ~
><tiI'1 c. ~ u:re't m. f'Hm<o 0I<ll'it ;rtiI;iI UI 2. 1. teacher 2. Ramesh
3. homework 4. maths 5. careless
I . kaanoo!lll .mil, madam 0I'lIr.!'a', kaaghzaa! maaf, pardon ~, to disobey 2. mobile phone officer licence minute car
End exercises
~ <PI b.}f
ml 2. "5. >iIR. ;ma
>j'
800
m ""
Unit 13
Exercises to matrimonial advertisement
1. a. Yes b. Yes c. No 2. Not a suitable match! 3. a. 53aiI f.:<:r<!l ?ioRft ;;
>I'llit U<!it ;rtiI;iI UI b. >n!'6l !Ji!' ~ ~ ~ -.it ffiI ><tiI'1 c. 53aiI -.it ~
~~ >1'8 if >ftr "" ~I d. """" R';ft !f.jI "!!'I'" UI
u?
1. a. }f l'!>!'n iRcl <PI b. aill11'8

c. t.!re 8tI reu !j>.IOI5 UI
End exercises
1. a. ~ ?iii b. ~ . . , c. if S"lR! d. -.it"" 2. a. 2 b. 3 c. 4 d. 1 3. a. i!l:08 b.
f}k c. ><til' d. CI'iIIiI'a' ilR ...". <II' 4. ~, f'eIRo, ro-, obi, OIH'R,
'0
~,
siI, ~, lI'tl', >!'i, ~, f'H<:Jn.I, ~, ~, >.{it
.,
264
PANJABI
TOPIC VOCABUlARY
Unit 15
1. b. ~ >lw c.1. :mW ""'" 2. ~ iii>! '" Hl<H f'i!lo; d. ~ >IS ~
e. UOI' f. 1. ~ 2. R;p 2. village people harvest season Sikh religion
the new year 3. True True False False
English
Transliteration
Parts of the body
sareer de ang
I'Rik1
>roa =' 5'j JIll
Face
baan
pithth
gaarhhee
sareer/jisam
chaa!ee
kann
akhkh
moonh/chihraa
unglee
pair
vaal
hathth
sir
godaa
Ian
muchchaan
moonh
gargan
nakk
modhaa
dhidd/pet
gal/galaa
jeebh/zabaan
gand
.ro
1. a. firolr, ~ b. ITR', ~ c. fiffl, ~ d. n', ~ 2. b. >roa =' ~ c. ~

? d. ~ ~/~ 3. a. <h< 3 =' mit ,~ f>k ~ Ul'il b. ft!'or
0I5'R
tr.re mit foli< 1)il ~ Ul'i ? c. ~ ~ HT.!l al d. """" ~ B'aill e. "fR1'
Arm
Back
Beard
Body
Chest
Ear
Eye
Folk song exercise

Yes
No
No
No
End exercises
Unit 16
1. a. True b. False c. False d. True 2. a. >t.'; R;p ~ al b. >t.'; R;p ~
".;;' ~ ~ al c. N ~ tli!'>l iI' >I'Ua-~, R;p ?tf ~ ~td. "I'll nru',
?>"im!1 3. a. drum b. long wooden pole c. spoon
1. Canada Uganda Malaysia England 2. a. ~ 3 ~ b. H5a'tr
c. ~ d. ~ e. ilSI '" -;ftr '" "'" '" '" 1IR '" 3. a. ~ for ~ :!rI
Jml b. ~ for ~ iIRQ ~ m. ,..,.., ~ e Jml c. forll' for
tli!'>l '" ~ ~ t.rr JIll d. ~ for ~ ~ ~
Jml
-
m. T<I3'I ~ e
End exercises
I . b. Jri lis '" il'RW Ul'i, '" or>.iI a I c. Jri lis '" l/l31>Ir Ul'i, '" ~ a I d. Jri
lis '" iml' Ul'i, '" In!t al 2. b. '" fRa;: reu for<I'a mil a, J{j' ~ ;(t al
c. '" fRa;: "fR1' R;p ~ """ <P, J{j' fui'tr ;(t ~ """ <PI d. N 3'>if
tli!'>l m. ~ N >I'Ua, ~ R;p ?tf ~ ~I e. Hi<;ti '" Hi<, ~ '" ,Mre
tli!'>l ~ al 3. ~, ~, ~, ~ ~, H5a'tr, ~, ~,
""""
Finger
Foot
Hair
Hand
Head
Knee
Leg
Moustache
Mouth
Neck
Nose
Shoulder
Stomach
Throat
Tongue
Tooth
Vegetables
Biner gourd
Brinjal/egg plant
Cabbage
Capsicum
sabzeeaal!
karelaa
va!aaoon/bainganh
band gobhee
shimlaa mirach
>h
f\l'o
~
Jre'I<J, fMRH
rn
em
~
&<1/r.roa~
00
"'fRo"
fi'
'ff-3
&<1
lIRR<'<
n"CI
H'l'
r.i'lr/~
iIR! /im'
i'iB' /i'!>I'i'i
~
~
~
~/~
""
m
fiI>reo fH<r.J
266
Carrots
Cauliflower
Courgette
Mushrooms
Mustard leaves
Okra
Peas
Potato
Spinach
Tomatoes
Turnip
Fruit
Apple
Apricot
Banana
Grapes
Lemon
Mango
Orange
Peach
Pear
Pineapple
Plums
Pomegranate
Places
Church
College
Community kitchen
Enquiry office
Exhibition
Factory
Fort
Hindu place of
worship (temple)
Hospital
PANJABI
gaajar
gobhee
raam loree
khunbaan
sar-h-on!le pa!!e (saag)
bhindee
matar
aaloo
paalak
tarnaatar
shalgarn/ gongloo
phal
seb
khurrnaanee
kelaa
angoor
ninboo
anb
1II'ircI
D!
<I'}l
T.il
~ ~
fils't
.n (I'I'aI)
~
\I'l'!OI'
'eH'C:CI
~(~
1m
mr
~
~
~
~
santraa
-rn,.
aarhoo
naakh/naashpaa!ee
~
mI/~
anaanaas
alooche/ aaloobukhaaraa ~/ "I't!!!.~

anaar
Ilfl'>'CI
!haallvaall
girjaa
mahaan vi!liaalaa
langar
puchch gichch !laa !laf!ar
numaaish, par!!arshanee
kaarkhaanaa
kilhaa
mandar
haspa!aal
...."
1'<IcriI'
Hu' f<if., ..w
l'r.!
yo. tar. ?
~,
or<nIW
toRr
ttaeaSnl
267
TOPIC VOCABULARY
Library
Market
Museum
Muslim place
of worship (mosque)
Office
Palace
Park
Police station
Post office
Roadside restaurant
School
Shop
Sikh place of
worship
pus!akaalaa
mandee
Hit
ajaaib ghar
masji!l
rnfea URI
HRf'tre/ l-lRb
!laf!ar
mahhal
baag!!
!haanhaa,
pulas chaunkee
daakkhaanaa
dbaabaa
vidiaalaa. magrasaa
!lukaan, hattee
t!J:<ra
H'<re
~
>re", ym! ~
~
;j'>'('
f<if.,i'l'S', J-re<IJl'
~,
<fu'l
gUTg3vaaraa,
i!aeC:'d',
Zoo
gur!luaaraa
chirheeaaghar
~URI
Occupations
peshe
iIii
Carpenter
Cook/chef
Doctor
Farmer
Gardener
Judge
Lawyer
Mechanic
Milkman
Policeman
Postman
Priest (Sikh)
Singer
Teacher
Writer
!arkhaanh
laangree
daaktar
kisaan
maalee
H'ffi
jajj
vakeel
iI'n
>:oiIB
mislaree
~
liI'OlCcI
f'o!W<o;
~ '<i'5'
!ludhdh vaalaa
pulas vaalaa
daakeeaa
garanthee
gaaik
adbiaapak
lekhak
.re.n
Colours
raug
<fBI
Black
kaalaa
O!'!!'
ym! '<i'5'
iJ'OiIr
irlec!
~
mror
~d'rcr
268
PANJABI
>I'IH'
lre'H'I
Blue
Brown
Gold/Golden
Green
Grey
Khaki
Maroon
Orange
Pink
Purple
Red
Saffron
White
Yellow
sunahiree
haraa/sabaz
saletee
khaakee
laakhaa
santaree
gulaabee
jaarnnee
laal
kesaree
chittaa/safeg
peelaa
tit5'
Directions
dishaavaa!1
Behind
Down
East
Far
In front
Left side
Near
Norrh
Right side
South
Straight
That side
Tltis side
Up
West
pichche
!halle
poorab
goor
agge
khabbe
nerhe/nazll.eek
unar
sajje
gakhkhanh
sidhdhaa, sidhdhe
fi1i
lffl
is paase
uppar
pachcham
f>.J
Animals
jaanvar
Bear
Buffalo
Camel
Cat
Cow
richch
majhjh
ooth
billee
gaan
fch:
neelaa
bagaamee
us paase
~
<1i!'/mIB
mre'I
~
Jt.ra'I
~
i!'H1"iI
f<:R!1<
~
<l"iI
Monkey
Mouse
Pig
Sheep
Tiger
hiran
leu!!aa
haa!hee
loonbarh
ghorhaa
baandar
choohaa
soor
bhed
sher
Moods
birleeaal1.
f'rRT3'/o(I
Angry
Anxious
Contented
Curious
Depressed
Determined
Disgusted
Frightened
Happy
Irritated
Lazy
LoYing
Sad/unhappy
Surprised
Thoughtful
gussaa
pareshaan
s"!Ltushat
u!suk
ghamgeen
hairaan janak
yichaarsheel
mrn Mno!
Travel and
transport
safar Ie aavaajaaee
'lifflit~
Aeroplarie
Airport
Bicycle
Boat
Booking clerk
Bus
Bus station
hayaaee jahaaz
havaaee addaa
saaikal
berhee
tileat baaboo
bas
basaan gaa add.a
~ i'RI'B
~ I'r
Deer
Dog
Elephant
Fox
Horse
8'tI'
269
TOPIC VOCABULARY
~
1iil!'
~
eo
iii
W
5'fS
fu'?/
Sl/'i
>l'i
~/n.re'IO!
JF.i
fR'tr/ fl:l'iI
~trii
~trii
~
lhJ
!ls
Mn
...
u4aas
~
~
~
nishchi!
upraam
dariaa hoiaa
khush
khijhiaa hoiaa
susal
piaaraa
B"'I'
~~
~
f>hf~
Ii.P>r<r
i!MfIo
f<i:a 'dm6
"FI'f'ecre
;rn
f'eore ~
'IiR
~ "i!'
I'r
270
Car
Fare
Foot (on)
Horse carriage
Journey
Passenger
Road
Rickshaw
Ship
Ticket
Train
(To) travel
Traveller
Vehicle
Waiting room
Personal
PANJABI
kaarl gaddee
kiraaiaa
paillal
taangaa/ yakkaa
yaa!Taa/ safar
1i!'a'a'/JIlrcI
savaaree
JW<iI
sarhak
rikshaa
samundaree jabaaz
tikat
rei gaddee
safar karnaa
yaatree
vaabanh
udeek gharl
musaafar khaanaa
mrcr
f'c:rarao
nijjee shanaakhar
umar
janam lIin
janmnhaa
zaa!
go!
kadd
pekaa naan
aal!mee
viaahiaa honhaa
naarn/ naan
kaum
kaumeea!
janam asthaan
lIbaram, mazhab
kanvaaraa honhaa
javaan
27 1
CI'a/ron
House and home
makaan Ie ghar
J./iil7f ~ URI
fOidfer
ili!8
Bathroom
ghusal khaanaa/
ishnaan ghar
manjaa, palangh
~ ~ / /'eJ;!lw;
HMo/tmuJ
saunh vaalaa kamraa

imaara!
i'k' <;"5'
fuHooa'
banglaa
lIaree
andarlee chal!
chullhaa
vihrhaa
khaanh vaalaa kamraa
~/'fho
Bed
Bedroom
Building
Bungalow
Carpet
Ceiling
Cooker
Court yard
Dining room
Door
Floor
Garden
Key
Kitchen
Light
Lock
Roof
Room
Sink
Silting Room
Stairs
Storey
Tap
Utelicils
Wall
Window
,darvaazaa
farash
baagheechaa
taalee, chaabee
rasoee
roshnee
!aalaa, jandraa
baabarlee chal!
karnraa
chubachchaa
baithak
paurheeaan
manzal
nalkaa
bartan, bhaande
lIeevarl kandh
baareel khirhkee
liRJa
Nature
kugrar
iIl'H~
Climate
Earth
~~
Flowers
Forest
Grass
Lake
paunh paanhee
dhartee
phull
jangal
ghaab
jheel
i'k! tI'it
tRIM, }fipI
~i'KJ'a
ken:
~nt
JIlrcI ""'"
"I'3'CI'I
~
~lJI<j/ ~~
f7r.fl_
identification
Age
Birthday
(To be) born
Caste
Family name
Height
Maiden name
Man
(To be) married
Name
Nation
Nationality
Place of Birth
Religion
(To be) unmarried
Young
TOPIC VOCABULARY
~
iIl'H fu;o;
~
ira'
ia'
oI'i!
ilor~
ri!li'l
m'fo... ~
'mI/
iH
C!>iO'
"'"
~h
iM'
f'>:"o;p
"f'(! <;"5'
C!>iO'
~
~
~
<m'I,
.fur.oil
ffi!<r
>I'<T<R!'t h
a'!'P,
C!>iO'
80cI
i:htIr
Htre
<'i'/!C!'
>ICl'31", r i
cka/ c!'CI
U'a'I, f>I3Cil
mm
~
~
lIf'U
lJI<j
272
PANJABI
Land
Lightning
Moon
Mountains
River
Sea
Seasons
Sky
Star
Sun
Tree
zameen
bijlee lIee chamak
chann
parbal/pahaarh
lIari..
samundar
ru.ttaan
asmaan
laaraa
sooraj
lIarakhal
Weather
mausam
>IR>t
Breeze
Cloud
Cold
Drought
Drizzle
Dry
Flood
Fog
Frost
Hail Slones
Heat wave
Hot
Rain
Shade
Snow
Sunshine
Thunder
Wet
havaa
baddal
thand
sok..
boondaa baandee
khushak
harhh
dhund
kor..
garhe
ri
100
BH'I
fuilI'!'I 1!'1
1n!Ol
"'"
tre>r.r /tro'S
"i!f<!>lr
~
~
~
4
5
6
7
8
9
chaar
paID
me
sall
athth
10
II
lias
giaaraan
baar-h-aan
ler-h-aan
chaull-h-aan
panl!raan
solhaan
salOar-h-aan
athaar-h-aan
unoee
veeh
ikkee
baaee
le-ee
chauvee
PaID hee
mabbee
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
0'6'
B<IR
~
9
jt.;r
FlI'l!'!
~
24
Numerals
ginhlee
0
1
2
3
sifar
ikk
lIo
linn
fi:rJre
ff!'O!
~
~
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
II
41
gannee
baarash, meenh
chaan
baraf
l!!!upp
garaj
sill..
T<M
~. li'I'U
...
'9'l.I
"""
fr:I'8o
0
273
TOPIC VOCABULARY
naun
sataaee
athaaee
unallee
leeh
ikkalee
ballee
lelee
chaurnee
pailLlee
mallee
sainlee
athallee
untaaIee
chaalee
iktaaIee
"""
iIM
i
Jfo
,,
4
1l/'o
'"
l!I'I
'0
1'Pr6i
"
1!'<f
~
~
mr
l'IT<!'
"Il5'<l'
f1\'!
,~
'li
,a
'4
"
",t
,t
~o
fi!'oiI
~,
~~
~
~
~lI
Us'!
PI
~4
JlO'e1
>lIl5'it
~
~,
f'l!om
>h'I
nI
s,
oro
~a
~,
~t
~t
lIO
lI~
lIli
rn
sa
iI'<it
lI4
lie
r.n
fM
>IRI"3't
~
;r5'l
feOC3'61
s,
lit
lit
ao
a'
. I
274
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
PANJABI
balaalee
lir!aalee
chulaalee
pamaalee
chilaalee
samaalee
~
f3d3'69
~
~
.mn
8'l
83
89
8~
8~
89
9t:
8t
73
74
75
76
athlaalee
unhnjaa
panjaah
ikvanjaa
bavanjaa
larvanjaa
churaillaa
pachvanjaa
chivanjaa
salvanjaa
athvanjaa
unhaath
sathth
i1eaahth
baahth
trehth
chaunhth
painhth
chiaahth
salaahth
athaahth
unha!!ar
sa!!ar
ikha!!ar
bahaLtar
liba!!ar
chauha!!ar
pacha!!ar
chiba!!ar
77
salafiar
JI"3"3o
99
78
79
atha!!ar
unaasee
9t:
9C
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
~
~
~
~
friil'
~
~
~o
~~
~'l
~3
~8
~~
~,
~9
~t:
~
l'h;
~C
~
'II'<Jl5
,~
~o
~ 'l
~3
~8
0'Uc5
l'Prm5
~~
"Ff"3'<n5
>lR5'iJl5
~n(J"ad
~9
"R"<re
90
~~
~ t:
~t
feCii(,,vad
9~
~
~
9'l
W3"a
98
~
~
9,
93
9~
275
TOPIC VOCABULARY
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
1000
100 000
10 000 000
assee
i1eaasee
..mt
feorR't
t:~
biaasee
triaasee
churaasee
t:'l
t:s
t:8
pachaasee
ffiiaasee
~
~
""""
1'PrR'I
J!3'R1
t:o
t:~
athaasee
unhaanven
navve
ikaanven
t:,
t:9
t:t:
t:t
f3;41'Oir
~
C'l
t3
C8
sataasee
baanven
triaanven
churaanven
pachaanven
chiaanven
salaanven
athaanven
narhinven
sau
ikk hazaar
lakhkh
karorh
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
to
C~
C~
t~
C9
tt:
Ct
j!j
~oo
fl!'O! mre
8'>1
orili
,\000
'00 000
,\0000000
277
PANJABI-ENGLISH GLOSSARY
PANJABI-ENGUSH
GLOSSARY
1If\.RI'Q
"Il:I'RI
~
III1I'i!'I
"IHCl'Ior
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
us
uh
ukharhnaa
udeeknhaa
u!suk
uththoll
umar
umeell.
urll.oo
ulanghnbaa
ooth
asslaam alaikam
~
lI/'Jre'>i "Ii!c!H
>IfJ'if
>IfJ'if J!'6
>IfJ'if i<'
aseengonon
>If>re'
~
"1m!'
akhaanh
akheer
aglaa
>i/are;;r
angrez
"IT
/'n
/'nih!
achchaa
an
an kallh
>lftI'<iI
azaagee
aruar raashtaree
1aa~
~
~
>lftI'<iI l're'I
t! nf<re
~
~~
lIth'dCii81
aseen
aseen. saare
that
he, she, that, they
to be displaced, to be uprooted
to wait
anxious awaiting
from there
age (f.)
hope (f.)
Urdu (m./f.)
to disobey, to break
male camel (m.)
Muslim greeting
we
all of us, we all
both of us
proverb, saying (m.)
end
next (v.)
English (m./f.)
OK, alright
today
these days
freedom, independence (f.)
""""
apraal!!!
afsar
afsos
abaall.ee
arnreekaa
anmri!
art!!
offence (m.)
officer (m./f.)
regret, sorry
population (f.)
America (m.)
nectar, holy water (m.)
meaning (m.)
rest (m.)
come (informal request)
lIf'il'
araam
aajaa
1l$'
aaunhaa
to come
"I'fj
aao
aas paas
aagiaa
aapnhaa
aaloo
adhiaapak
a!!hiaapkaa
aine saare
aityaar
is
is kar ke
istaree
come (formal)
around and about
permission (f.)
"f<I'}f
1If'R l.I'R
..mr.r
"I'll\!'
""!!
~
~
iii! J!'6
~
feJI
feJI ore iii
feJIm
feJI >:'<it
feu
fr.!
fr.! 1.I'il
fr.! j:j >;lu
1'!!ire
~
~
~
andar
international
inside
fi!'i
ale
azaa.dee laee
and
struggle for independence (f.)
rem.r
""'"
~ "Ii:<iIor
jall.o jahill.
ajokaa
anand maanho
anaarkalee
modem
enjoy yourself
name of classic Urdu film (f.)
~
~
J;Ifuo
F.lfua1t"3'
is vaaree
ih
ill
ill paase
ill sau veeh
ikathth
ikaththe
illo
in..tzaam
il!!lhe
inshaa allaa
eest afreekaa
e
sahima!
shahir
shahireea!
one's own
potato/es (m.)
teacher (m./f.)
teacher (f.)
so much
Sunday (m.)
it, this
that is why
lady (f.)
this time
he, she, it, this
one,a
one side
one hundred and twenty
gathering (m.)
together
same
arrangements (m.)
here
hopefully [lit: if God wishes)
East Africa (m.)
is (informal)
agree
city (m.)
citizen (f.)
278
PANJABI
..rom
ROll!'
Jl
>m
Jl';J
l'I';iI tf;n
llfa' JfIrcm
Rf>m
1'1'? tho
Hfned ~'d
~ 0l'CiI"
~
l'!tRror
Jl>IE'I
CRI?'i'
-~
-~
-~~
~
\1''
ffifi! i'l>:q
HH'l'i
li'Or
J:!i:iw
Irei!'a ~
~
~
~
m:<m
w:'<I1
w:oa'IrI
~
~
sahure
in-laws (m.)
sahelee
friend (f.)
saknhaa
can, to be able to
sakool
school (m.)
sagon
but also
sachch
true, truth (v.)
sachchee muchchee genuinely
sal sree akaal
Sikh greeting
sa!hi!ee
situation (f.)
saddaa pallar
invitation (m.)
sanicharvaar
Saturday (m.)
shanaakhtee kaard identity card (m.)
saplaah
week (m.)
sanparak
contact (m.)
sabzee
vegetable (f.)
safar kama
to travel
sabh
all, every
sabh kujh
everything
sabh paase
everywhere
sabh lon vadheeaa the best
samjhnbaa
to understand/comprehend
samaan
time (m.)
samaan paa ke
after a while, after some time
samaaj sevak
social worker (m./f.)
samaan
luggage, things (m.)
samundar
sea (m.)
samundaree daak sea mail (f.)
sarnosaa
triangular stuffed pastry (m.)
sar!!aar saahib
Mr (m.)
sar!!ee
winter (f.)
sbreobee
class (f.)
sarovar
pool (m.)
shalgarn
turnip (m.)
savarag
heaven (m.)
savaaree
installation (f.)
savaareeaan
passengers, travellers (f.)
savere
in the morning
saahib
sir (m.)
J!T
Ih'I
JI'.i: CRI?'i'
l;I'1I'J;I
J.I'H8
JI'5
J!'a'
wa
H"U5
J1'l\'I ~
~
1lroa'
fF.tCit'fed
fR'tt! ~
f'I:!3'a
!l"P'!
~
~
fu"otaC:'d
~
~
~
~
feR
!!O'f,,_ l'Il:l!
~UZ'
~ CRI?'i'
~
~
~
~
~
jj ('100)
i'icI
saadaa
shaamee
saafkamaa
shaabaash
shaamal
saal
saaraa maahaul
saare
saarhhee vaalee
siaanhaa
sibal
shikaail
sikhkhaan !!e
silaar
seet
sheeshaa
seenaa
suaa!!
suaa!!ee
suhnhaa
shukkarvaar
shukreeaa
sunhnaa
sunahiree
shubh iQjaavaan
surakhkhial safar
shuroo hoobaa
shuroo kamaa
sooee
sevaa!!aar
sailaanee
sochnbaa
sonaa
somvaar
sau
shauk
279
our
peace (f.)
to clean
well done
to be present, to join in,
participate
year (m.)
whole atmosphere (m.)
everyone, all (v.)
the one wearing the sari (f.)
wise, mature (v.)
health (f.)
complaint (f.)
of the Sikhs
sitar (f.) (stringed classical
musical instrument)
seat (f.)
mirror (m.)
bosom, heart (m.)
taste (m.)
tasty
nice, pretty (v.)
Friday (m.)
thank you (m.)
to listen
golden
best wishes (f.)
safe journey
to start, to begin
to begin, to commence
needle (f.)
volunteer (m./f.)
tourist (m./f.)
to think
gold (m.)
Monday (m.)
one hundred
fondness, enjoyment, like (m.)
280
i!itI'
<nIH
dee-Rid
~
~
~E..m
<Ja'
lri!
~Rfua
=-it
=-it i'lP
=-it Yo!
<J'5
<Pm
~
r.Js
~
m=r
.ret
.reto;f
~
orc.!'
ch!
cre<P
or.iI
~
C!l.r.I'
0lHCI'
0IHfujI
~
~ cran'
cran'
C16'<I'
or.rech!
0IH'l'!
0l'U5'
PANJABI
saukhaa
hazam
handhanhsaar
haftaa
haftaa
haile ge akheer
har paase
harmandar saahib
havaaee
havaaee addaa
havaaee daak
haal
haanjee
hisaab
hindoo
hunh
hostal
honhaa
hai
kaee
kaee tar-h-aan
kahinhaa
katnhaa
kadd
kagraan
kagee
kagon
kaprhaa
kamraa
karnzoree
kanm
kanm kamaa
kamaa
karaaraa
karelaa
kallh
kalaas
kaahlaa
easy, simple (v.)

digest
durable, hardwearing
week (m.)
Saturday (m.)
weekend (m.)
everywhere
Golden Temple (m.)
by air
airport (m.)
air mail (f.)
condition (m.)
yes (polite)
maths (m.)
Hindu (mJf.)
now
hostel (m.)
to be
is
several
different types
to speak
to cut
height (m.)
values (f.)
sometimes
when
cloth (m.)
room (m.)
weakness (f.)
job, work task (m.)
to work
to do
spicy (v.)
bitter gourd (m.)
yesterday/tomorrow
class (f.)
impatient, hasty (v.)
281
f<r.r
>!'<JB
mw.;r
~
kaahalvich
kaag!!zaat
kaafee kujh
kaanoonn
oro
kaar
kaalaj
ki
kiun
kiun ki
kihaa jaandaa hai
kihrhaa
kiththe
kinnaa
kinne
M;om~
kinnaa chir Ion
O!'ffil
for
~
~for
foroo iVi!' i
f<;ru;p
foi'ij
M;o
fW;'Isa
~ t!' >fIC<I
~~
~
foRrfer
fW
1'ri' fa<!'
cit
cIDa
ciIn'Ir
ciIoan
~
m:it
m:itnm:it
iUaa cran'
i5
~
~
~/.oo,.
~
~
~
kinnee door
kinne gaa meetar
kinne vaje
kirpaa
kiraaiaa
kiven
kiven rihaa
kee
keema!
keeneeaa
keenan
kullaa
koee
koee na koee
koshish karnaa
kol
kaunh
kaum
kaurhaa/kasailaa
keval
kaimraa
cran'
khatam kamaa
khatamaak
in a hurry
papers, documents (m.)
quite a lot, plenty
law (m.)
car (f.)
college (m.)
that
why
because
is said, is called
which
where
how much
how many
since when, for how long
how far
how much per metre
what time
blessings (f.)
rate, fare, rent (m.)
how
how did it go?
what
price (f.)
Kenya (m.)
singing of hymns (m.)
dog (m.)
any
some one or another
to try
with, next to, in possession of
who
nation, community (f.)
bitter (v.)
only
camera (m.)
to fmish, to complete
dangerous
282
PANJABI
>mil
~
~
~
~
~
M'i:
!:!IiI
l:!IiI'I
!:f'!' 'il'1'.ir.!
>ftr
iiR'
~
n'I
n'I
~
iIIl!<I
iIJt!C!
U'aiI
;00
T<Dil
e.r
wI'5
iIIffir
~
1I'McI
~
1I'l'!lI't
fai'Q'
J!iRb~
Dl
ft'I
~
khatree
kharchaa
khalonhaa
kharhhnaa
khaas
khaanhaa
khaalee
khilaaf
khush
khushee
khul!aa haafiz
khullhaa
khednhaa
khair
gaddee
gaddee
galkaa
ghagar
ghal!ar paartee
ghamee
garmee
gared
gall
ghalal
gallaan
gaajar
gaanhaa
gaalrhee
gidhdhaa
geet
ghusal khaanaa
gujraalee
gunbag
gobhee
goree
ghar
Khatri (m./f.) (caste)

expense, expenses (m.)
to be stood, to stand
to stand, to park
special
to eat
empty, vacant
against
happy
good (f.) (lit: happiness)
Muslim departing phrase
open, plenty (v.)
to play
anyway
car, vehicle (f.)
automobile, train (f.)
a Sikh martial art, like fencing (m.)
mutiny (m.)
Gadar Party (f.)
sadness (f.)
summer, heat (f.)
grade (m.)
matter, news (f.)
(lit: talk)
wrong
speech, conversation (f.)
carrots (f.)
to sing
talkative
women's folk dance (m.)
song (m.)
bathroom (m.)
a person from Gujarat or of
Gujarati origin (m./f.)
dome (m.)
cauliflower (f.)
fair, white (v.)
house, home (m.)
283
lIRI<!'olH
1Ifl!l:'5'
ok
ok
0RII'i'
vrelli'c
vre
~
~fl:oo>
iiI;ft
\im
~
1IH'I'
;ra>r
~
OR'!'
'\JlF'i'
~
;r;!'n'l
~
t.re
~
~
~
~
~'MS
b
'P!Z'
~
~
..m
~
FI""
iC"
;:re nfue
imH
imH_
ghar gaa kanm

gharvaalaa
ghatt
ghatt kamaa.
ghatto ghatt
ghaat
homework (m.)
husband (m.)
less, lower
to reduce, to lessen
at least
place where clothes are washed

on the bay (m.)
to go around
ghunmnhaa
ghunmnbaa phimaa to travel around
mare (f.)
ghorhee
good (v.)
changee
glittering, shining (v.)
charnkeelaa
spoon (m.)
chamchaa
spinning wheel (m.)
charkhaa
to go
chalnhaa
high spirits
charhhl!ee kalaa
to be upon, to ride
charhhnaa
to need, to want
chaahunhaa
uncle (m.) (father's brother)
chaachaa jee
letter (f.)
chiththee
length of time
chir
thing (f.)
cheez
to be settled, finished
chuknhaa
to lift, to pick
chukknhaa
choice, selection (f.)
chonh
fourth Guru (m.)
chaulhe guroo
wide (v.)
chaurhaa
to take, to consume
chaknhaa
to leave, to quit
chaddnhaa
the printed one (m.)
chapaaeevaalaa
corn on the cob (f.)
challee
print (m.)
roaapaa
holidays (f.)
chutteeaan
small (v.)
chotaa
place, location (f.)
jag-h-aa
struggle (f.)
jal!o jahil!
birth (m.)
janam
birthplace (m.)
janam aslhaan
284
PANJABI
fun
iOOre
jaloos
joan
birthday (m.)
raised, born and bred
to be born
times (m.)
German (m.If.)
definitely
procession, parade (m.)
or
zaaiaa kamaa
to waste time
M'.:t
jaa chuknhaa
jaannjee
jaanhnaa
have (already) been

members of the groom's
wedding party (m.!f.)
to know
too much
which (oblique)
il<'H
~
iIHW
janam !lin
janmpal
janmnhaa
zamaanaa
jarman
~
~
zaroor
'"
iI'fer ""'"
il'~
ziaagaa
ftm
fiw
jis
jibaa
jihrhaa
jil!!!he
jee
f;:ro;r
ftffl
RI
RI 1lI'f'er ~
iiI=
i!H'
iI
i'I1I'
~
~
~
t1. ~.
~
~
""'"
m
m ""'"
jee aaiaan noon

jeevan
jumaa
jumeraa,
je
jebaan
jhaaknhaa
jhoote
tamaatar
tikat
tee vee
teknhaa
taileefon
taileefon kamaa
thand
thahimaa
theek
theek kamaa
sort of, rather

that, which
where
honorific particle signifying
respect
welcome
life (m.)
Friday (m.)
Thursday (f.)
if
pockets (m.!f.)
to stare, to look at
rides (m.)
tomato/es (m.)
stamp (f.)
TV (television) (m.)
to bow down
telephone (m.)
to call by telephone
cold (f.)
to stay
fine/OK/aJright/right
to fix, to correct
285
theek thaak
daak
daaktar
daang
daalar
dolee
<5'0!
B'OI
lI'Ore<I
"
lJ'ffiI
ire'I
~
~
~<fijRl
dhol
dholkee
tashreef rakhkho
jee
!akteeban
!akieef
tankhaah
!abeea!
tar-h-aan
!alaak
3C1101an
~
~
"3Cf
<ffi'Ol
taan
~
~fq
!aan ki
!iuhaar
gR1'
!Useen
~.re
!uhaadaa
,uhaadaa kee
haal hai
tuhaadee kirpaa
hai
tuhaade baare
!UIDaa
~ cil
~
<J'5
f'orotlo e
i
i<!'
3'
3' fe5":'
3' l.Ifuil
3' >l"'R
3' fa;o;i /..ao
~~
it.l'\ ~
OK, fine
mail, post (f.)
doctor (m.!f.)
long wooden pole (f.)
dollar (m.)
ceremony bidding farewell
to the bride (f.)
big drum (m.)
small drum (f.)
please have a seat
about, approximately
trouble, irritation, bother (f.)
pay, salary (f.)
state of health, condition (f.)
way, style
divorce (m.)
then
so that
celebration, festival (m.)
you (formal)
your (informal)
How are you?
by your blessings
about you
to walk, to depart, to leave
you (informal)
,oon
and, on
,e
your (informal)
leraa
from
ton
apart from, besides
Ion i1aavaa
before
ton pahile
after
,on baa-a-!I
,on binaan/baghair without
each and every place (m.)
maan maan
more or less, to some extent
morhee bahu!ee
PANJABI
286
~
;:.mor
"i!<r.!
em
e~
~
fur>;
~
~
~~
ft!'8'I
-.iI~
~
sCll'ne:a
"I>lI'
5"'fur>;
~
s<'
~~
~>iRffl
~~
~lVi
~ 1I'tRI
1I'1ri!'!
~1!1'8
~m
~.m
~
~
!laflar
!larshak
!lar!l
gavaaee
!laa
!lisnhaa
!!iJ<haaunhaa
!lin
!Iii
!lilchasp
!lillaggnhaa
!lillee
!lee jag-h-aa
!lukaan
!lukaandaar
!luneeaan
!loojaa !lin
!looje
!loor
!loorlon
!Ie uppar
!Ie an dar
!lesh
!lesi
!Ie saahmanhe
!lekhnhaa
!lenhaa
de lhalle
!Ie nerhe
!Ie pichche
!Ie baahar
!Ie baavjOO!!
!Ie baare
!Ie laee
!Ie vaasle
20sh
!lonon
office (mo)
participant, visitor (m./fo)
pain, hurt (fo)
medicine (fo)
of
to be visible, to be seen
to show
day (mo)
heart (mo)
interesting
to feel at home, to be settled, to
live happily
Delhi (fo)
in place of
shop (fo)
shopkeeper (mo)
world (f.)
second day
others
far, distant
far from/away from
dhannvaa!l
tilr
dheeaan
'ijHtl'H
~
mit
rn:if
1'rn<l oiI<J3?;
~
~
l'\OH
-gr
'" W:5
1'i'
1'i'H
?'iIH>
~
~
~
UJt.!
above, upon
inside
country (mo)
Indian, Panjabi, home
opposite, facing
uf<re't
to see, to watch
tl'lrH
tit!>:iI
tit!'>!
to give
below
near
behind
outside
in spite of
about, concerning
for
for
charge (mo)
both
thanks (mo)
daughters (fo)
bang, pomp and show
dhoom dhaam
to wash
dhonhaa
washerman (mo)
dhobee
no
naheen
religious procession (mo)
nagar keenan
to dance
nachchnhaa
salty
namkeen
pattern, design (mo)
namoonaa
kind natured
naram subhaa
narne (mo) (informal)
naan
not only
naa keval
narne (mo) (formal)
naam
blue (vo)
neelaa
exhibition (fo)
numaaish
male servant (mo)
naukar
job, employment (f.)
naukaree
youth (mo)
naujuaan
like, pleasing
pasand
a type of deep-fried pastry
pakaurhaa
similar to fritters (mo)
frrst time
pahilee vaaree
before
pahile
pahunchaa !lenhaa to deliver. to cause to arrive
fifth
panjvaan
west (mo)
pachcharn
five o'clock
panj vaje
Panjab (mo)
panjaab
a person from Panjab or of
panjaabee
Panjabi origin (m./fo)
(fo)
autumn
harh
pani
wife
(f.)
ee
pa!D
thin, slim (vo)
pallaa
respectable (vo)
e
palVanl
to know
palaa
husband (mo)
palee
but
par
.mm
l.$'~
ti;W
.:r.rm
l.Ia?il
U<rn'
~
l.I3'
tril
tre
287
288
PANJABI
uejf
parson
day before yesterday/day after

tomorrow
~
~
~
l.Iik
~
"'fe't
l.iflr't' ~
triI
ftPlI'<!
ftPlI'<!
0Rffi'
1i.Ira
fliR'I'I'
~
tiIo
tiIo
Y'R'
Y'o.!
ycm
~
il1;r
il1;r 0Rffi'
ill;r;re
ir.i
ire
il'e
il'R5
~
~
iiltI>JtI
~
partnhaa
parvaar
parvaarak
praahuohe
palet
parMaa!!aa
parhbnaa
parhbaaunhaa
parhbaaee
parhhiaa likhiaa
paasport
paase
piaar
piaar kamaa
piaare
pindvaa!aa
peeohaa
peer
peer
puchchohaa
puttar
purasb
poorab
pooreeaan
pesh
pesh kamaa
pesbaavar
peke
pet
pendoo
painsal
paisevaale
painhaa
paurbeeaan
fasalaan
fl:ore
1Tor
to return
family (m.)
family (relating to family)
guests (m.)
plate (f.)
great grandfather (m.)
to read, to srudy
to teach
srudies (f.)
educated (v.)
passport (m.)
direction, way
uit1!'

to love
dear, beloved (v.)
villager (m.)
to drink
holy man (m.)
Monday (m.)
to ask
son (m.)
gentleman (m.)
east (m.)
fulfilling
to present
to present, to produce
professional (m./f.)
bride's family, bride's
parents (m.)
stomach, belly (m.)
of the village, village-like (m./f.)
pencil (f.)
wealthy people (m.)
to act (to fall)
stairs (f.)
crops (f.)
289
fl:mi
~
it!
"11!!"3"
"11!!"3" ,q.
"11!!"3" wa
"11!!"3" ~
"11!!"3" ~
~
1F.I
~
1!R!'
ae<~ei
~
~
~ 0Rffi'
lie
1RIJ'l'O
1I<IMurH
"EICI'a"
flkar
phikkaa
pOO
phirnaa
filam
foto
fauj
bas,,!!!
bahul
bahul achchaa
bahul saare
bahul suhnhaa
bahul ziaa!!aa
bagheecbaa
bachpan
bachche
batvaaraa
banhnaa
banhvaauohaa
ba!!alnhaa
band
ban!!kamaa
bande
barsaal
barmin...gham
baraal
balki
barhee
baa-a-!! !!upahir
1I"lr.! ~
1I'<fcj'
baahron
"IRIJ;(
baarash
baa!
11'8
bimaar
1inR!
1inR! ~ ~ ~bimaar hooh
lon pahile
bilkul
~
"IiI>iI
beebee
"II"lI'!
worry (m.)
light, pale (v.)
again
to travel
film (f.)
photograph (f.)
military (f.)
spring (f.)
very
very good (v.)
a lot, many
very nice, excellent (v.)
far too much
garden (m.)
childhood (m.)
children (m.)
division, partition (m.)
to become
to get built
to change, to exchange
closed, off
to close
people (m.)
rainy season (f.)
Birmingham (m.)
procession of the groom's
relatives and friends (f.)
but also
very (v.)
afternoon
from outside/from abroad
rain (f.)
male child (m.)
ill, sick
before falling ill
absolutely, perfectly
madam (f.)
290
PANJABI
>re-
8iI
~
il"a'I
mea
~
~
a&ti1
~
~
ire
>m't
>m'tr
h;p
rnRI
WC3'I
Tc!'
lfflCI/-mEl
nil wfua
"'
11'<13"
"II'<IiI
filtl
~
iffi!o
il!
>ifmIr
bukhaar
budhdhvaar
betaa
betee
ben!ee
bebee sitar
baithak
baithnhaa
baitho jee
bor honhaa
bohthaa
bolee
boleeaan
bhangrhaa
bha!eejee
bhanee
bharaa
bhalak/bhalke
bhalee
bhaaee saahib
bhaabee
bhaara!
bhaanee
bhindee
bhukhkh
bhejnhaa
bhainh
mahin~aa
HE10
Hfmit
masheen
mahindee
maheenaa
}!CI'i';
makaan
mangnhaa
mangalvaar
mangaan
Hire
~
l-!iIr
}ffilf'
HC:<I
mazmoon
matar
fever/temperature (m. )
Wednesday (m.)
son (m. )
daughter (f.)
request (f.)
baby sitter (m./f.)
sitting room (f.)
Ha"mI
to sit
please sit down (form al)
to be bored, to feel bored
to speak
language (f.)
folk verse couplets (f.)
bhangra (m.) (style of Panjabi
dance)
niece (f.)
join
brother (m.)
H'3"'
tomorrow
look after, watch over

brother (m.)
sister-in-law (f. ) (brother's wife)
India (m.)
Indian (m./f.)
okra (type of vegetable) (f.)
hunger (f.)
to send, to post
sister (f.)
expensive, costly (v.)
machine (f.)
henna (f.)
month (m.)
house (m.)
to request, to ask, to charge
Tuesday (m.)
demands (f.)
subject (m.)
peas (m.)
291
H';re
O!<rn'
>I?i M' no >I?i

til
~
~
O!<rn'
l1'O~Aed
H'il
H'<In'
~
~
fi.fc:
fH'i5'
~
fH5~
~
tftt
~
tn:O
~
ii>f
H<r
~
ire ?ro'I'
Ha n'5
118
ilw
H'
AAire
}f;j\
~
iior
j:jnI ORIn'
,;r;!
ma!lab
maddal! karnaa
man
manparchaave
manaaunhaa
manno jaan naa

manna
maa!aajee
maaf
maafkarnaa
maanchaistar
maape
maamaa
miharbaanee
mitnhaa
mint
miththaa
mithiaaee
miljaanhaa
mihthaa
mukhkh
mukaablaa
mufa!
murhnaa
mekh
meraa
mere kol naheen
mere naal
mel
melaa
main
mainejar
mochee
motaa
maukaa
maujaan kamaa
yaall
meaning, definition (m.)

to help
mind (m.)
entertainment, enjoyment (m.)
to pray, to believe, to celebrate
believe it or not
mother (f.)
pardon, excuse
sorry, to pardon
Manchester (m.)
parents (m.)
to hit
thanks, please (f.)
to finish, to vanish
minute (m.)
sweet (v.)
Panjabi sweet (f.)
to get, to receive
to meet
face (m.)
comparison, competition (m.)
free
to tum around, to return
nail (f.)
my
with me, not in my

possession
with me
meeting, combination (m.)
fair (m.)
I
manager (m./f.)
cobbler (m.)
fat, thick (v.)
opportunity, occasion (m.)
to enjoy
memory, remembrance (f.)
not
292
~
PANJABI
<J'R
yuvak
yoogandaa
yog
ras
rasam
rasoee
rahinhaa
rakhkhnhaa
rang
rarrggaar
ranglaa
rachnaa
ral milnhaa
ravaaj
rarhkanhaa
raahaan
raaheen
raaj
<I'il'
raaja
f'aI'!a"
rish!aa
rish!eliaar
om
<lR
<II'I>i
oireI
C!f'<:Je'
~
em
~
.r.ma.Ji';'
<R'!~
<fP:'i!
~
0'0l
faQ3id
~
mil
~
6dlc:'QE'
mre
~
~
H'e
=til
~
5se'
ll'~
6'uaC::'h9 iiio3
5'H
rupaiaa
laee
laggnhaa
lagvaaunhaa
langar
lagaaunhaa
lagaalaar
landan
laddoo
lafzee
lanbaa
labhbhnhaa
laa parvaah
laaisains
laahaurvaalee
aura!
laal
youth (m.)
Uganda (m.)
suitable
(fruit) juice (m.)
custom, ritual (f.)
kitchen (f.)
to stay, to live
to put
colour (m.)
colourful
colourful (v.)
composition (f.)
to be mixed
fashion (m.)
to prick, to rub against
roads, routes (f.)
via, by
rulership, kingdom (m.)
king (m.)
(marriage) relation (m.)
relatives (m./f.)
rupee (m.)
for, in order to
to be covered, laden, to feel
to get covered
community kitchen (m.)
to stitch, to apply, to put on
continuously, on going
London (m.)
a type of Panjabi sweet (m.)
literal
long, lengthy (v.)
to fmd
careless
licence (m.)
the woman from Lahore (f.)
red
293
PANJABI-ENGUSH GLOSSARY
H'l!'
~
f/lhl~c;'
~
ill!'
ffi!
ffi! m!
83
..:'J:!
~
>:ora
~
~<!'iio!
~
c6"fCIIIIf'
Qo
.:'tI
~
~
~
laarhaa
likhnhaa
liaaunhaa
liaakal
lainhaa
10k
10k naach
lorh
vass
vasaaunhaa
vakal
vaii nhaa
vajaaunh liaa
shauk
vajaaunhaa
vadkkiaan
vaddaa
vadhdh
vadhaaunhaa
vadhaaee
groom (m.)
to write
to bring
ability (f.)
to take, to have
people (m.)
folk dance (m.)
require, necessity, want (f.)
authority, jurisdiction (m.)
to establish, to habilitate
time (m.)
to be played, to be beaten
fond of playing, enjoy playing
to play (music), to beat
ancestors, forefathers (m.)
big, large (v.)
high, more
to increase
congratulations (f.)
good quality
>:ire
vadheeaa
vadhere
vargaa
vara!nhaa
r:aa~c;'
vartaaunhaa
vall
vallon
vaajbee
vaaje vaale
vaalaikam asslaam
to use
to serve
towards
on behalf of
reasonable, fair, right
band of musicians (m.)
Response to Muslim
greeting
vaapas
vaaree
viaah
vihaaree naukaree
viknhaa
vich
vichchon
return, back
turn, instance (f.)
wedding (m.)
professionally employed (f.)
to be sold
in
from within
.re
>fii
~
>:'iI >:'8
~ >l/'m!'H
1;'l.IJf
1'I:lII'<J
f>:<r<jj ~
f>:a!c;o
mr
more
like (v.)
294
PANJABI
f.. f"t'aei'l
-..'I
-..'Iu ('10)
>rnr
~
~
~
~
~
~
vil!iaarthee
vee
veeh
veezaa
veervaar
ve
vekhnhaa
vele
vaisaakh
vaisaakhee
student (m./f.)
also
twenty
visa (m.)
Thursday (m.)
subjunctive particle
to see
period, time (m. )
one of the Indian months (m.)
a Sikh festival (f.)
Grammar and Verb

Index
Numbers refer to unit numbers

Adjectives 3
Adjectives in the oblique 4
Comparison of adjectives 4
Conditional sentences 12
The ending vaalaa 8
Formal and informal speech 1
Indirect speech 14
Interrogative sentences 5, 6
Interrogative words 3
MUSI, have 10 8
Negative sentences 5, 6
Nouns 3
Nouns in the oblique 4
Participal uses 13
Particle ke 10
Phrases of choice 16
Possessive adjectives
Fonna! uses of possessive
adjectives 2
Possessive adjectives with plural
objects 3
Possessive particle daa 3
Agentive postposition ne
Compound postpositions 14
Simple postpositions 4
Postposition vargaa - like 11
Postposition noon - 10 9
Pronouns in the oblique 8

Relative pronouns 9
Purpose clauses 14
Reflexive adjectives and
pronouns 13
Relative-correlatives 15
Subject pronouns 2
Subject-verb agreement 4
Subjunctive particle ve 15
Word order 2
Causative verbs 11
Chuknhaa - already
compleled 9
Compound verbs 10
Conjunct verbs 11
Future continuous tense 16
Future tense 7
Imperative 5, 7
Infinitives in the oblique 8
Infinitive as a verbal noun 11
Infinitives in the oblique with
denhaa 15
Intransitive verbs 10
Laggnhaa - 10 be applied 10 15
Past perfect continuous tense 12
Past perfect tense 12
Passive voice 11
Past continuous teose 15
296
Past ten se (simple, remote and
habitual) 6
Past tense of to be - was and
were 5
Present continuous tense 5
Present perfect continuous
tense 12
Present perfect tense 12
GRAMMER AND VERB INDEX
Present tense 4
to be - is, am and
are 2
Saknhaa - can and can't 9
Simple verb 3
Subjunctive 12
Transitive verbs 10
Vocative case 8
Present ten se
Long-renowned as the authoritative source for

self-guided learning-with more than 30 millior ISBN 0-8442-0185-5
copies sold \\Qrldwide-:-the Teach Yourself serie 111111111111111111111111111111
mcludes over 200 titles m the fields of languages
crafts, hobbies, sports, and other leisure activities
Ja NTC Publishing Group
;:"'
L ,*,~'~"......;-~~-~..-.. ;;;==-,-,;
. -
52095

32.teach Yourself Panjabi

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

32.teach Yourself Panjabi

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

32.teach Yourself Panjabi

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

panjabi

Surjit Singh Kalra

TEACH YOURSELF BOOKS

Library of Congress Catalog Card Number. On File

How to use this course

The Panjabi script and sound system

? How are you?

British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data

<:r I'm Kiran

lAnguage points: Subject pronouns; Use of subject pronouns;

What does it taste like?

4 >r.iI1't .tt 1Ii'H ~I That's very good news!

What was the matter?

Did you study in Jalandhar?

What will you (have to) drink?

8 ~ fJ:Ja"C! ~ ? i:ic! ~ I enjoy playing the sitar

9 "AT O!\r:!' "" i' ~ ~ lOur cloth is tbe best!

10 ft!'c! fu;o; M f>:;j A day in the village

11 ~ 'R'fu>I The Golden Temple

12 111<1 ~ f;i'l5'I A letter home

The subjunctive; Conditional sentences

ABOUT THE AUTHORS

Navtej Kaur PurewaJ is a lecturer at the University of Manchester in the

Sue 1)!son-Ward was formerly Subject Officer for Community Language

He! m! Folk dances of Panjab

Language points: Future continuous; Phrases of choice;

Geographically, the present day area of Panjab is divided between the

Map 1 Indian sub-continent

No accurate figures are available on the number of Panjabi speakers,

Given the great variety of Panjabi there is some debate as to what is

(1504--1552 AD), began the process of modifying existing scripts of the

HOW TO USE THIS

Who is this course for?

How to use this course

~ lI'a' gall baa! (Dialogue): Each unit has two or three

rfw>II'J! abhiaas (Exercises): These follow the vocabulary

HOW TO USE THIS COURSE

How to study each unit

Complete the exercises at the end of the unit, checking your

How to use the course with the cassette

THE PANJABI SCRIPT

The book is accompanied by an audio tape which will help you to

Panjabi is most commonly written in the Gurmukhi script which is the

The Gurmukhi alphabet has forty letters including thirty-seven consonants

Equivalent sounds which have been given in romanised (English) script

PANJABI SCRIPT AND SOUND SYSTEM

It is quite possible to learn the characters of the Gurmukhi script (~

consonants. These do not occur in English. Aspirated consonants are

PANJABI SCRIPT AND SOUND SYSTEM

as 'ng' in 'sing'. No English equivalent.

as 'ch' as in 'cheese' but with less release

strongly aspirated form of 'ch' . No English

as 'j ' in 'jeer' but with less release of breath

the stronger aspirated counterpart of the

representing the palatal nasal sound.

as 't' in 'train' but with the tongue further back

The syllabary in Table B gives the Panjabi letters in groups, according to

the strongly aspirated counterpart of the above.

as 'd' in 'drum' but with tongue further back